HUTTOM & FRELIGH'S EDITIOI. 
 
 RJT ,B AND LIGHT INPANTRl- 
 
 .-^ 
 
 ItOOLoKTlfFimlMKl;." 
 
 ; ^\ ' 
 
 
COL. GEORGE WASHINGTON FLOWERS 
 MEMORIAL COLLECTION 
 
 DUKE UNIVERSITY LIBRARY 
 DURHAM. N. C. 
 
 PRESENTED BY 
 
 W. W. FLOWERS 
 
EIFLE 
 
 \ 
 
 AJn> 
 
 LIGHT INFANTRY TACTICS; 
 
 THE EXERCISE AND MANEUVERS 
 
 TROOPS WTCEN ACTING A8 LIGHT INFANTRY OR 
 
 RIFLEMEN. 
 
 BY 
 
 BREVET LIEUT. COL, W. J. HARDBB, 
 
 LATK OP C. 3. ARMT. NOW OF C. 8. AEMT. 
 
 Two Volume?* in One. 
 VOL. I. 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER AND COMPANY. 
 
 MEMPHIS: 
 
 SOmiRRW PtJBLWHINO HOUSK OP nUTTON k TtUtUQIL, SBOWTD STRKrT. 
 
 1861. 
 

 Publishers' Notice. 
 
 Sappliea of this work from the North having been stopped sw contraband of war, thie 
 .•dition is got up fir practical purposes and immediate use, in an emergency tliat admits of 
 mo delay ; and a considerable portion of remarks and matter, not particularly pertinent* 
 3uw been omitted. The numberinji; of sections, however, has been retained, which will 
 «Kp]ain a hiatu* in numbers, wherever it occurs. The edition has been revised in thie 
 ■lanner to subserve the pressing demand of a great exigency, and gives all the drill in- 
 ftrmation imperatively necessary for soldier and officer. 
 
 BUTTON & FRKLIGH. 
 
r::^^ 
 
 RIFLE AND LIGHT INFANTRY TACTICS. 
 
 TITLE FIJRST. 
 
 Article First. — Formatiori of a Regiment i« order of battle, or in lint 
 
 1. A regiment is composed of ten companies, whicli will habit- 
 ually be posted from rij^ht to left, in the following order: first, 
 sixth, fourth, ninth, third, eighth, fifth, tenth, seventh, second, 
 according to the rank of captains. 
 
 2. With a less number ol" companies the same principle will be 
 observed, viz.: the first captain will command the right company, 
 the second captain the left company, the third captain tin; right 
 center company, and so on. 
 
 3. The companies thus posted will be designated from right to 
 left, first company, secotid company, «tc. This designation will be 
 observed in the manoeuvres. 
 
 4. The first two com])anie8 on the right, whatever their denomi- 
 nation, will form {ho first division; the next two companies the 
 second division ; and so on, to the left. 
 
 5. Each company will be divided into two equal parts, which 
 will be designated as the first and second platoon, counting from 
 the right; and each platoon, in like manner, will be subdivided 
 into two sections. 
 
 6. In all exercises and manoeuvres, every regiment, or part of a 
 regiment, composed of two or more companies, will be designated 
 as a battalion. 
 
 7. The color, with a guard t<^ be hereinafter designated, will be 
 posted on the le(^ of tl»e right center battalion company. That 
 company, and all «»ii \is right, will be donominat^^d tlie right winf 
 of the biiUaliuii ; the remaining i-ompanies the left King. 
 
 8. The formation <»f a regiment is in two ranks; and each com- 
 pany will be formed into two ranks, in the following manner: the 
 cor}»orals will be p<jsted in the front rank, and on the right and 
 left, of platoons, according to hight; the tallest corporal and the 
 tallest man will form the first file, the next two tallest men will 
 form the second file, and so on to the last file, which will be com- 
 posed of the shortcKt eorp^jral and the shortest man. 
 
 9. The odd and even files, nnmbercd as one, two. in the oom- 
 nany, from right to left, will form groups of four men, who will 
 be dewignated comrades in battle. 
 
 20.9656 
 
FORMATION OF THE BATTALION, 
 
 10. The distance from one rank to another will be thirteen 
 inches, measured from the breasts of the rear rank men^o the 
 backs or knapsacks of the front rank men. 
 
 11. For manoeuvring, the companies of a battalion will always 
 be equalized, by transferring men from the strongest to the 
 weakest companies. 'i*'';/ J'.'' 
 
 Post of Company Officers, Sergeants and Corporals'. 
 
 12. The company officers and sergeants are nine in number, and 
 will be posted in the following manner : 
 
 13. The captain on the right of the company, touching with the 
 left elbow. 
 
 14. The jfirst sergeant in the rear rank, touching with the left 
 elbow, and covering the captain. In the manoeuvres he will be 
 denominated covering sergeant, or right guide of the company. 
 
 15. The remaining officers and sergeants will be posted as file 
 closers, and two paces behind the rear rank. 
 
 16. The first lieutenant, opposite the center of the fourth section. 
 
 17. The second lieutenant, opposite the center of the first platoon, 
 
 18. The third lientenant, opposite the center of the second platoon. 
 
 19. The second sergeant, opposite the second file from the left of 
 the company. In the manamvres he will be designated left guide 
 of the company. 
 
 20. The third sergeant, opposite the second file from the right of 
 the second platoon. 
 
 21. The fourth sergeant, opposite the second file from the left of 
 the first platoon. 
 
 22. The fifth strgeant, o})posite the second file from the right of 
 the first platoon. 
 
 23. In the left or t^-nth company of the battalion, the second 
 sergeant will be posted in the front rank, and on the left of the 
 battalion. 
 
 24. The coqjorals will be jjosted in the fi-ont rank, as prescribed 
 No. 8. ■ . - 
 
 25. Absent officers and sergeants will be replaced — officers by 
 sergeants, and sergeanta by corporals. The colonel may detach a 
 first lieutenant from one company to command another, of which 
 both the captain and first lieutenant are absent ; but this authority 
 will give no right to a lieutenant to demand to be so detached. 
 
 Posts of Field Officers and Regimental Staff. 
 
 2G. The field officers, colonel, lieut^'nant colonel and major, are 
 supposed to be mounted, and on active service shall be on horse- 
 back. The adjutant, when the battalion is manceuvring, will be 
 on foot. 
 
 27. The colonel will take post thirty paces in rear of the file 
 closers, and oppoi^^ite the center of the battalion. This distance 
 will be reduced whenever there is a reduction in the front of the 
 battalion. 
 
FORMATION OF THE BATTALION. 6 
 
 28. The lieutenant colonel and the major will be opposite the 
 centers of the right and left wings respectively, and twelve paces 
 in rear of the file closers. 
 
 29. The adjutant and sergeant major will be opposite the right 
 and left of tiic battalion, respectively, and eight paces in rear of 
 the file closers. 
 
 30. The adjutant and .sergeant major will aid the lieutenant 
 colonel and major, respectively, in the mana?uvres. 
 
 31. The colonel, if absent, will be replaced by the lieutenant 
 colonel, and the latter by the major. If all the field officers be 
 absent, the senior captain will command the battalion; but if 
 either be present, he will not call the senior captain to act as field 
 officer, except in case of evident necessity. 
 
 32. The quartk'-master, surgeon, and other stafl' officers, in one 
 rank, on the left of the colonel, and three paces in his rear. 
 
 33. The quarter-master sergeant, on a line with the front rank 
 of the field music, and two paces on the right. 
 
 Posts of Field Music and Band. 
 
 34. The buglers will be drawn up in four ranks, and posted 
 twelve paces in rear of the file closers, the let\ opposite the center 
 of the left center com])any. The senior principal musician will be 
 two paces in front of the field music, and the other two paces in 
 the rear. 
 
 35. The regimental band, if there be one, will be drawn up in 
 two or four ranks, according to its numbers, and posted five paces 
 in rear of the field music, having one of the principal musicians 
 at its head. 
 
 Color-guard. 
 
 36. In each battalion the color-guard will be composed of eight 
 corporals, and posted on the left of the right center company, of 
 which company, for the time being, the guard will make a part. 
 
 37. The front rank will be composed of a sergeant, to be 
 selected l)y the colonel, who will be called, for the time, rolor- 
 bearcr, with the two ranking corporals, re^])cctively, on his right 
 and left; the rear rank will be composed of the three corporals 
 next in rank ; and the three remaining corporals will be ]>ostcd in 
 their rear, and on the line of file closers. The left guide of the 
 color-company, when these three last named corporals are in the 
 rank of file closers. Avill be immediately on their left. 
 
 38. In battalions with less than five companies present, there 
 will he no color-guard, and no display of colors, except it may be 
 at reviews. 
 
 39. The corporaU for the color-guard will be selected from thoM 
 most distinguished for regularity and prcciHion, af well in thoir 
 positions under arms as in their marching. The latter advantage, 
 and a just carriage of the person, arc U> he more jiarticularly 
 sought for in the selection of the color-b«arer. 
 
6 INSTRUCTION OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 General Guides. 
 
 40. There will bo two general guides in each battalion, selected, 
 for the time, by the colonel, from among the sergeants (other than 
 first sergeants) the most distinguished for carriage under arms, 
 and accuracy in marching. 
 
 41. Those sergeants will be respectively denominated, in the 
 manceuvree, right general guide, and left general guide, and bo posted 
 in the line of file closers; the first in rear of the right, and the 
 second in rear of the left flank of the battalion. 
 
 Article Second. — Instruction of the Battalion. 
 
 42. Every commanding officer is responsible for the instruction 
 of his command. He will assemble the officers together for theo- 
 retical and practical instruction as often as he may judge necessary, 
 and when unable to attend to this duty in person, it will be dis- 
 ■charged by the officer next in rank. 
 
 43. Captains will be held responsible for the theoretical and prac- 
 tical instruction of their non-commissioned officers, and the adju- 
 tant for the instruction of the non-commissioned staff. To this end, 
 they will require those tactics to be studied and recited lesson by 
 lesson; and when instruction is given on the ground, each non-com- 
 missioned officer, as he explains a movement, should be required to 
 put it into practical operation. 
 
 44. The non-commissioned officers should also be practiced in 
 giving commands. Bach command, in a lesson, at the theoretical 
 instruction, should first be given by the instructor, and then re- 
 peated, in succession, by the non-commissioned officers, so that 
 while they become habituated to the commands, uniformity may be 
 established in the manner of giving them. 
 
 45. In the school of the soldier, the company officers will be the 
 instructors of the squads ; but if there be not a sufficient number 
 of company officers present, intelligent sergeants may bo substitu- 
 ted ; and two or thi'oe squads, under sergeant instructors, bo super- 
 intended, at the same time, by an officer. 
 
 46. In the school of the company, the lieutenant-colonel and the 
 major, under the colonel, will be the principal instructors, substi- 
 tuting frequently the captain of the company, and sometimes one 
 of the lieutenants ; the substitute, as far as practicable, being one 
 of the principals. 
 
 47. In the school of the battalion, the brigadier general may con- 
 stitute himself the principal instructor, frequently substituting the 
 colonel of the battalion, sometimes the lieutenant colonel or major, 
 and twice or thrice, in the same course of instruction, each of the 
 three senior captains. In this school, also, the substitute will al- 
 ways, if practicable, be superintended by the brigadier general or 
 the colonel, or (in case of a captain being the instructor), by the 
 lieutenant colonel or major. 
 
INSTRUCTION OP THE BATTALION. 
 
 48. Individual instruction being the basis of the instruction of 
 companies, on which that of the regiment depends, and the first 
 principles having the greatest influence upon this individual in- 
 struction, classes of recruits should be watched with the greatest 
 care. 
 
 49. Instructors will explain, in a few clear and precise worda, 
 the movement to be executed ; and not to overburden the memory 
 of the men, they will always use the same terras to explain the 
 same principles. 
 
 50. They should often join example to precedent, should keep up 
 the attention of the men by an animated tone, and pass rapidly 
 from one movement to another, as soon as that which they com- 
 mand has been executed in a satisfactory manner. 
 
 51. The saber bayonet should only be fixed when required to be 
 used, either for attack or defense; the exercises and manoeurres 
 will be executed without the bayonet. 
 
 52. In the movements which require the bayonet to be fixed, the 
 chief of the battalion will cause the signal to fix bayonet to be 
 sounded; at this signal the men will fix bayonets without com- 
 mand, and immediately replace their pieces in the position they 
 were before the signal. 
 
 Instruction of Officers. 
 
 53. The instruction of officers can be perfected only by joining 
 theory to practice. The colonel will often practice them in march- 
 ing and in estimating distances, and he will carefully endeavor to 
 cause them to take steps equal in length and swiftness. They will 
 also be exercised in the double quick step. 
 
 54. The instruction of officers will include all the Titlofl in thit 
 system of drill, and such regulations as prescribe their duties in 
 peace and war. 
 
 55. Every officer will make himself perfectly acquainted with 
 the bugle signals ; and should, by practice, bo enabled, if necessary, 
 to sound them. This knowledge, so necessary in general instruc- 
 tion, becomes of vital importance on actual service in the field. 
 
 Instruction of Sergeants. 
 
 56. As the discipline and efficiency of a company materially de- 
 pend on the conduct and charact<>r of its sergeants, they should be 
 selected with care, and properly instructed in all the duties apper- 
 taining to their rank. 
 
 57. Their theoretical instruction should include the School of the 
 Soldier, the School of the Company, and the Drill for Skirmisherg. 
 They should likewise know all Uie details of service, and the reg- 
 ulations prescribing their duties in garrison and in campaign. 
 
 58. The captain selects from the corporals in his c/)mpany thoM 
 whom ho judges fit to be admitted to the theoretical instruction 
 of the sergcantB. 
 
8 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 {,) , Instruction of Corporals. 
 
 '*59. Their theoretical instruction should include the School of the 
 Soldier, and such regulations as prescribe their duties in garrison 
 and in campaign. 
 
 60. The captain selects from his company a few privates, who 
 may be admitted to the theoretical instruction of the corporals. 
 
 61. As the instruction of sergeants and corporals is intended 
 principally to qualify them for the instruction of the privates, they 
 should be taught not only to execute, but to explain intelligibly 
 everything they may be required to teach. 
 
 -i.i, Commands. 
 
 There are three kinds. 
 
 62. The command of caution, which is attention. 
 
 63. The preparatory command, which indicates the movement 
 which is to be executed. 
 
 64. The command of execution, such as marcli or halt, or, in the 
 manual of arms, the part of command which causes an execution. 
 
 65. The tone of the command should be animated, distinct, and 
 of a loudness proportioned to the number of men under instruction. 
 
 66. The command attention is pronounced at the top of the voice, 
 dwelling on the last syllable. 
 
 67. The command of execution will be pronounced in a tone firm 
 and brief. 
 
 68. The commands of caution and the preparatory commands 
 are herein distinguished by italics, those of execution by capitals. 
 
 69. Those preparatory commands which, from their length, are 
 difficult to be pronounced at once, must be divided into two or 
 three parts, with an ascending progression in the tone of command, 
 but always in such a manner that the tone of execution may be 
 more energetic and elevated : the divisions are indicated by a hy- 
 phen. The parts of commands which are placed in a parenthesis, 
 are not pronounced. ' 
 
 TITLE SECOND— SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIEE. 
 
 General Rules and division of the School of the Soldier. 
 
 70. The object of this school being the individual and progres- 
 sive instruction of the recruits, the instructor never requires a 
 movement to be executed until he has given an exact explanation 
 of it ; and he executes, himself, the movement which he commands, 
 so as to join example to precept. He accustoms the recruit to take, 
 by himself, the position which is explained — teaches him to rectify 
 it only when required by his want of intelligence — and sees that 
 all the movements are performed without precipitation. 
 
 71. Each movement should be understood before passing to ano- 
 ther. After they have been properly executed in the order laid 
 down in each lesson, the instructor no longer confines himself to 
 
>^CHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 that order ; on the contrary, he should change it, that he may judge 
 of the intolligciice of the men. 
 
 72. The inntructor allows the men to rest at the end of each 
 part of the lessons, and oficner, if he thinks proper, especially at 
 the commencement; for this purpose he commands Rest. 
 
 73. At the command Rest, the soldier is no longer required to 
 preserve immobility, or to remain in his place. If the instructor 
 wishes merely to relieve the attention of the recruit, he commands. 
 in place — IiEst; tlie soldier is then not required to preserve his im- 
 mobility, but he always keeps one of his feet in its place. 
 
 74. When the instructor wishes to commence the instruction, he 
 commands — Attention; at this command the soldier takes his po- 
 sition, remains motionless, and fixes his attention. 
 
 75. The ScJiool of the Soldier will be divided into thi-ce parts: — 
 the first, comprehending what ought to be taught to recruits with- 
 out arms ; the second the manual of arms, the loadings and firings ; 
 th^third, the principles of allignmcnt. the march by the front, the 
 different steps, the march by the flank, the principles of wheeling 
 and those" of change of direction ; also, long marches in double 
 quick time and the run. 
 
 76. Each part will be divided into lessons, as follows : 
 
 PART FIRST. 
 
 Lesson 1. Position of the soldier without arms; Eyes right, lefl 
 and front. 
 
 Lesson 2. Facings. 
 
 Lesson 3. Principles of the direct step in common and quick 
 time. 
 
 Lesson 4. I'rineiples of the direct step in double quick time and 
 the run. 
 
 PART SECX3ND. 
 
 Lesson 1. Principles of shouldered arms. 
 
 Lesson 2. Manual of arms. 
 
 Lesson 3. To load in four times and at will. 
 
 Lesson 4. Firings, direct, oblique, by file and by rank. 
 
 Lesson 5. To fire and load, kneeling and lying. 
 
 Lesson fi. Bayonet exercise. 
 
 PART THIRD. 
 
 Lesson 1. Union of eight or twelve men for instruction in the 
 principles <tf allignmcnt. ^ 
 
 Lesson 2. The direct march, the oblique mar<h, and the differ- 
 ent steps. 
 
 Lesson 3. The march by th<^ flank. 
 
 Lesson 4. Princiitlcs of wheeling and change of direction. 
 
 Lrsson 5. Long marches in double quick time, and the run. with 
 arms ami knapsacks. 
 
 PART FIRST. 
 
 77. This will be taught, if praotifuible. to one reernit at a time: 
 but three or four may bo united, when the number Vte great com- 
 
10 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 pare^ with that of the instructors. In this case the recruits will 
 be phiced in a single rank, at one pace from each other. In this 
 part, the recruit will be without arms. 
 
 Lesson I. — Position of the Soldier. 
 
 78. Heels on the same line, as near each other as the conforma- 
 tion of the man will permit ; 
 
 The feet turned out equally, and forming with each other some- 
 thing less than a right angle ; 
 
 The knees straight without stiffness ; 
 
 The body erect on the hips, inclining a little forward ; 
 
 The shoulders square and falling equally ; 
 
 The arms hanging naturally ; 
 
 The elbows near the body ; 
 
 The palm of the hand turned a little to the front, the little fin- 
 ger behind the seem of the pantaloons ; 
 
 The head erect and square to the front, without constraint; 
 
 The chin near the stock, without covering it; 
 
 The eyes fixed straight to the front, and striking the ground 
 about the distance of fifteen paces. 
 
 REMARKS ON THE POSITION OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 JTeels on the same Line ; 
 
 79. Because, if one were in the i-ear of the other, the shoulder 
 on that side would be thrown back, or the position of the soldier 
 would be constrained. 
 
 Heels more or less closed; 
 Because, men who are knock-kneed, or who have legs with large 
 calves, cannot, without constraint, make their heels touch while 
 standing. 
 
 The feet equally turned out, and not forming too large an angle; 
 
 Because, if one foot were turned out more than the other, a shoul- 
 der would be deranged, and if both feet be too much turned out, it 
 would not be practicable to incline the upper part of the body for- 
 ward without rendering the .whole position unsteady. 
 Knees extended without stiffness ; 
 Because, if stiffened, constraint and fatigue would be unavoidable. 
 
 The body erect on the hips ; 
 Because, it gives equilibrium to the position. The instructor 
 will observe that many recruits have the bad habit of dropping a 
 shoulder, of drawing in a side, or of advancing a hip, particularly 
 the right, when under arms. These are defects he will labor to 
 correct. 
 
 The upper part of the body inclining fonvard ; 
 
 Because, commonly, recruits are disposed to do the reverse, to 
 project the belly and to throw back the shoulders, when they wish 
 to hold themselves erect, from which result great inconveniences 
 in marching. , The habit of inclining forward the upper part of 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER, 11 
 
 the body ia so important to contract, that the instructor must on- 
 forco it at the bcginninij, particularly with recruits who have nat- 
 urally the opposite habit. 
 
 Shoulders square; 
 
 Bocauso, if the shoulders be advanced beyond the line of the 
 breast, and the back arched (the defect called round-shouldered, 
 not uncommon with recruits,) the man cannot allifijn himself, nor 
 use his piece with address. It is important, thtm, to correct this 
 defect, and necessary to that end that the coat should set easy 
 about the shoulders and arm pits; but in correcting this defect, 
 the instructor should take care that the shoulders l)e not thrown 
 too much to the rear, which would cause the belly to project, and 
 the small of the back to be curved. 
 
 The aryns hanging naturally, elboirs near the bodij, the palm of the> 
 hand a little turned to the front, the little finger behind the scam of 
 the pantaloons ; 
 
 Because these positions are equally important to the shoulder- 
 arms, and to prevent the man from occupying more space in a rank 
 than is necessary' to a free use of the piece ; they hav<>, moreover, 
 the advantage of keeping in the shoulders. 
 
 The face straight to the front, and ivithout constraint ; 
 
 Because, if there be stiffness in the latter position, it would com- 
 municate itself to the whole of the upper part of the body, embar- 
 rass its movements, and give pain and fatigue. 
 
 Eyes direct to the front ; 
 
 Because, this is the surest means of maintaining the shoulders 
 in line — an essential object, to be insisted on and attained. 
 
 80. The instructor having given the recruit the position of the 
 soldier without arms, will now teach him the turning of the head 
 and eyes. He will command : 
 
 1. J^ljjes — EioHT. 2. Front. 
 
 81. At the word right, the recruit will turn the head gently, ho 
 aa to bring the inner corner of the left eye in a lino with the but- 
 tons of the foat, the eyes fixed on the line of the eyes of the men 
 in, or supposed to be in, the same rank. 
 
 82. At the second command, the head will resume the direct or 
 habitual position. 
 
 8.3. The movement of Eye^'i — Lkft will be executed by inverse 
 means. 
 
 84. The instructor will take particular care that the movement 
 of the head does not. derange the squareness of the shoulderti, 
 which will happen if the movement of the former be too sudden. 
 
 8ft. When the in«truct<:»r shall wish the recruit to pa^s from the 
 aU^ of attention to that of ease, he will cvommand : 
 
IBi SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 Eest. 
 
 86. To cause a reaiimption of the habitual position, the instruot- 
 or will command : 
 
 1. Attention. 1. Squad. 
 
 87. At the first word, the recruit will fix his attention ; at the 
 second, he will resume the prescribed position with steadiness. 
 
 Lesson II. — Facings. 
 
 88. Facings to the right or left will be executed in one time, or 
 pause. The instructor will command : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Might (or I(ift) — FAC^ . 
 
 89. At the second command, raise the right foot slightly, turn on 
 the left heel, raising the toes a little, and then replace the right 
 heel by the side of the left, and on the same line. 
 
 90. The full face to the rear (or front) will be executed in two 
 times, or pauses. The instructor will command : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. About — Face. 
 
 91. (First time.) At the word about, the recruit will turn on the 
 left heel, bring the left toe to the front, carry the right foot to the 
 rear, the hollow ojiposite to. and full three inches from, the left 
 heel, the feet square to each other. 
 
 92. (Second time.) At the word face, the recruit will turn on 
 both heels, raise the toes a little, extend the hams, face to^^the rear, 
 bringing, at the same time, the right heel by the side of the left. 
 
 93. The instructor Avill take care that tliose motions do not de- 
 range the position of the body. 
 
 Lesson III. — Principles of the Direct Step. 
 
 94. The length of the direct step, or pace, in common time, will 
 be twenty-eight inches, reckoning from heel to heel, and, in swift- 
 ness, at the rate of ninety in a minute. 
 
 95. The instructor, seeing the recruit confirmed in his position, 
 will explain to him the principle and mechanism of this step — pla- 
 cing himself six or seven paces from, an^ facing to the recruit. 
 He will himself execute slowly the step in the way of illustration, 
 and then command : 
 
 1. Squad, forward. 2. Common time. 3. March. 
 
 96. At the first command, the recruit will throw the weight of 
 the body on the right leg, without bending the left knee. 
 
 97. At the third command, he will smartly, but without a jerk, 
 carry straight forward the left foot twenty -eight inches from the 
 right, the sole near the ground, the ham extended, the toe a little 
 depressed, and, as also the knee, slightly turned out ; he will, at 
 the same time, throw the weight of the body forward, and plant 
 flat the left foot, without shock, precisely at 'the distance where it 
 finds itself from the right when the weight of the body is brought 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 13 
 
 forward, the whole of which will now rest ou the advanced foot. 
 The I'ccruit will next, in like manner, advance the right foot and 
 plant it as above; the heel twenty-eight inches from the heel of the 
 left foot, and thus continue to march without crossing the legs, or 
 striking the one against the other, without turning the shoulders, 
 and preserving always the face direct to the front. 
 
 98. When the instructor shall wish to arrest the marcVi, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. Squad, i. Halt. ' , 
 
 99. At the second command, which will be given at the instant 
 when either foot is coming to the ground, the foot in the rear will 
 be brought up. and planted by the side of the other, without shock. 
 
 100. The iustructor will indicate, from time to time, to the re- 
 cruit, the cadence of the step, by giving the command one at the 
 instant of raising a foot, and two at the instant it ought to, bo 
 planted, observing the cadence of ninety steps in a minute. This 
 method will contribute greatly to impress upon the mind the two 
 motions into Avhich the step is naturally divided. 
 
 101. Common time will be employed onl}' in the first and second 
 part^ of the School of the Soldier. As soon as the recruit has ac- 
 quired steadiness, has become established in the principles of shoul- 
 dered arms, and in the mechanism, length and sAviftness of the 
 stop in common time, he Avill be practiced only in quick time, the 
 double quick time, and the run. 
 
 102. TIk! principles of the step in quick time are the same us 
 for common time, but its swiftness is at the rate of one hundred 
 and ten stej)s per minute. 
 
 10.'{. The iri--trurt<.»r wishing the squad to march in quick time, 
 will command 
 
 1. ,^{Ua<^. fonrar<l. 2. March. 
 
 Lehson IV. — HrifK^ipli'.* of thp Double Quick Step. 
 
 104. The length of the double quick .step is thirty-three inchea, 
 and its swil\ncss at the rat* of one hundred and sixty-five stepfi 
 per minute. 
 
 105. The instructor wishing to teacli the recruits the principles 
 and mechanism of the double quick stej), will command : 
 
 1. Double quick step. 2. March. 
 
 lOG. At the first command, the recruit will raise his hands to a 
 level with hit hip-<. the hand'* closed, the nails toward the body, 
 the elbow.-, to the rear. 
 
 107. At the second command, he will raise to the front his lefl 
 leg bent, in order to give to the knee the greatest elevation, the 
 part of the leg betwet-n the knee and the instep verticle. the toe 
 depref'Sed ; he will tlien replace his foot in it^ former position ; 
 with the right leg he will then execute what hju* just been pro- 
 ecribed for the leit. and the alternate movement of the le^ will be 
 continued until the c<tmmaDd: 
 
14 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 
 
 108. At the second command, the recruit will bring the foot 
 which ie raised by the aide of the other, and dropping at the same 
 time his hands by his side, will resume the position of the soldier 
 without arms. 
 
 109. The instructor placing himself seven or eight paces from, 
 and facing the recruit, will indicate the cadence by the commands, 
 one and two, given alternately at the instant each foot should be 
 brought to the ground, which at first will be in common time, but 
 its rapidity will be gradually augmented. 
 
 110. The recruit being sufficiently established in the principles 
 of this step, the instructor will command : 
 
 1. Squad, forward. 2. Double quick. 3. March. 
 
 111. At the first command, the recruit will throw the weight of 
 his body on the right leg. 
 
 112. At the second command, he will place his arms as indicated 
 No. 106. 
 
 113. At tiie third command, he will carry forward the left foot,, 
 the leg slightly bent, the knee somewhat raised — will plant hi& 
 left foot, the toe first, thirtj^-three inches from the right, and with 
 the right foot will then execute what has just been prescribed for 
 the left. This alternate movement of the legs will take place by 
 throwing the weight of the body on the foot that is planted, and 
 by allowing a natural, oscillatory motion to the arms. 
 
 114. The double quick step may be executed with diiferent 
 degrees of swiftness. Under urgent circumstances the cadence of 
 this step may be increased to one hundred and eighty per minute. 
 At this rate a distance of four thousand yards would be pjuseed 
 over in about twenty-five minutes. 
 
 115. The recruitjs will be exercised also in running. 
 
 IIG. The principles are the same as for the double quick step^ 
 the only diflf'erencc consisting in a greater degree of swiftness. 
 
 117. It is recommended in mai-ching at double quick time, or 
 the run, that the men should breathe as much as possible through 
 the nose, keeping the mouth closed. Experience has proved that-, 
 by conforming to this principle, a man can pass over a much 
 longer distiince, and with less fatigue. 
 
 PARTSECOND. 
 
 GENERAL RULES. 
 
 118. The instructor will not pass the men to this second part 
 until they sliall be well established in the position of the body, 
 and in the manner of marching at the different steps. 
 
 119. He will tlien unite four men, whom he will place in the 
 same rank, elbow to elbow, and instruct them in the position of 
 shouldered arnss, a* Ibllows : 
 
SCHOOJL OF THE SOLDIER. 16 
 
 Lesson 1. — Principles of Shouldered Arms. 
 
 120. The recruit being placed as explained in the first lesson of 
 the first part, the instructor will cause him to bend the right arm 
 slightly, and place the piece in it, in the fi)llowing manner: 
 
 121. The piece in the right hand — the barrel nearly vertical and 
 resting in the hollow of the shoulder — the guard to the front, the 
 Arm hanging nearly at its full length near the body; the thumb 
 and fore-finger embracing the guard, the remaining fingers closed 
 together, and grasping the swell of the stock just under tlie cock, 
 which rests on the little finger. 
 
 122. llecruits are frequently seen with natural defects in the 
 conformation of the shoulders, breast and hips. These the 
 instructor will labor to correct in the lessons without arms, and 
 afterwards, by steady endeavors, so that the appearance of the 
 pieces, in the same line, may be uniform, and this without con- 
 straint to the men in their positions. 
 
 123. The instructor will have occasion to remark that recruits, 
 on first bearing arms, are liable to derange their poKition by low- 
 ering the right shoulder and the right hand, or by sinking the hip 
 and spreading out the elbows. 
 
 124. He will be careful to correct all these faults by continually 
 rectifying the position; he will sometimes take away the piece to 
 replace it the better ; he will avoid fatiguing the recruits too much 
 in the evening, but labor by degrees to render this jiosition so 
 natural and easy that they may remain in it a long time without 
 fatigue. 
 
 125. Finally, the instructor will take great care that the ])iece, 
 at a shoulder, be not carried too high nor too low: if too high, 
 the right elbow would spread out, the soldier would occupy too 
 much space in his rank, and the piece be made to waver; if too 
 low, the files would be too much clof^ed, the soUiier would not have 
 the necessary space to handle his piece with facilit}', the right arm 
 would become t'OO much fatigued, and would draw down the 
 shoulder. 
 
 126. The instructor, before passing to the second lesson, will 
 cause to be repeated the movements of eyes rights left, and front, 
 and the facings. 
 
 Lesson II. — Manual of Arms. 
 
 127. The manual of arms will be taught to foiir men, placed, at 
 first, in one rank, elbow to elbow, and afterwards in tw(^ ranks. 
 
 128. Riioh connnand will bo executed in one time (or pause), but 
 this time will be divich-d into motions, the better to make knrtwn 
 the mechanism. 
 
 129. The rate (or swiflness) of each motion, in the manual of 
 arms, with the exceptions herein indicated, is fixed at the nine- 
 tieth part of a minute; but. in order not to fatigue the attention, 
 the inhtructor will, at first, look more particularly to the execution 
 c>f the motions, without requiring a nice observance of the cadence, 
 
16 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 to which he will brin<5 the recruits progressively, and after they 
 shall have become a little familiarized with the handling of the 
 piece. 
 
 130. As the motions relative to the cartridge, to the rammer, 
 and to the fixing and unfixing of the bayonet, cannot be executed 
 at the rate prescribed, nor even with a uniform swiftness, they will 
 not be subjected to that cadence. The instructor will, however, 
 labor to cause these motions to be executed with promptness, and, 
 above all, with regularity. 
 
 131. The last syllable of the command will decide the brisk 
 execution of the first motion of each time (or pause). The com- 
 mands two, three, and four, will decide the brisk execution of the 
 other motions. As soon a,s the recruits shall well comprehend the 
 positions of the several motions of a time, they will bo taught to 
 execute the time without resting on its difi'erent motions ; the 
 mechanism of the time will nevertheless be observed, as well to 
 give a perfect use of the piece, as to avoid the sinking of, or slur- 
 ring over, either of the motions. 
 
 132. The manual of arms will be taught in the following pro- 
 gression : The instructor will command : 
 
 Supiwrt — Arms. 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 133. (First motion.) Bring the piece, with the right hand, per- 
 pendicularly to the front and between the eyes, the barrel to the 
 rear ; seize the piece with the left hand at the lower band, raise 
 this hand as high as the chin, and seize the piece at the same time 
 with the right hand four inches below the cock. 
 
 134. (Second motion.) Turn the piece with the right hand, the 
 barrel to the front : carry the piece to the left shoulder, and pass 
 the fore-arm extended on the breast between the right hand and 
 the cock ; support the cock against the left fore-arm, the left hand 
 resting on the right breast. 
 
 135. (Third motion.) Drop the right hand by the side. 
 
 136. When the instructor may wish to give repose in this posi- 
 tion, he will command : 
 
 Eest. 
 
 137. At this command, the recruits will bring up smartly the 
 right hand to the handle of the piece (small of the stock), when 
 they will not be required to preserve silence, or steadinees of 
 position. 
 
 138. When the instructor may wish the recruits to pass from 
 this position to that of silence and steadine^ss, he will command : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Squad. 
 
 139. At the sex'^ud word, the recruits will resume the position 
 of the third motion of support arms. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 17 
 
 ^h(nilder — Arms. 
 One time and three 7notions. 
 
 140. {First inotion.) Grasp the piece with the right hand under 
 and against the loft forearm ; seize it with the left hand at the 
 lower band, the thumb extended ; detatch the piece slightly from 
 the shoulder, the left fore-arm along the stock. 
 
 141. (Second nxotion.) Carry the piece vertically to the right 
 shoulder with both hands, the rammer to the front, change thepo- 
 Bition of the right hand so as to embrac^c the guard with the thumb 
 and fore-finger, slip the left hand to the hight of the shoulder, the 
 fingers extended and joined, the right arm nearly straight. 
 
 142. (Third motion.) Drop the left hand quickly by the side. 
 
 Present — Arms. 
 
 One time and two viotions. 
 
 143. (First motion.) With the right hand bring the piece erect 
 before the center of the body, the j-ammer to the front; at the 
 same time seize the piece with the left hand half-way between the 
 guide sight and lower band, the thumb extended along the barrel 
 and against the stock, the fore-arm horizonKil and resting against 
 the body, the hand as high as the elbow. 
 
 144. (Second motion.) Grasp the small of the stock with the 
 right hand below and against the guard. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 \Af). (First motion.)' Bring the piece to the right shoulder, at 
 the same time change the position of the right hand so as to em- 
 brace the guard with the thumb and fore-finger, slip up the left 
 hand to the hight of the shoulder, the fingers extended and joined, 
 the right arm nearly straight. 
 
 146. (Second motion.) iJrop the left hand quickly by the side. 
 
 Order — Arms. 
 Onr. tirKe and two motions. 
 
 147. (First motion.\ Seize the piece briskly with the left hand 
 near the upper bana, and detatch it slightly from the shoulder 
 with the right hand; loosen the grasp of the right hand, lower tho 
 
 f)ie<K; with the left, rencize the piece with the right liaud above tho 
 owcr band, the little finger in rear of the barrel, the butt about 
 four inches from the ground, the right hand ,'Jup]V)rtod against the 
 hip, drop the loft hand by the side. 
 
 * 148. (Second motion.) Let tho piece slip through tho right hand 
 to the ground by opening slightly the fingertj, and take tho posi- 
 tion about to be described. 
 
 Position of order arm . 
 
 149. The hand k)w, the barr*»l betw<>©n thf> thumb «nd fore- 
 
18 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 finger extended along the stock ; the other fingers extended and 
 joined ; the muzzle about two inches from the right shoulder; the 
 rammer in front ; the toe (or beak) of the butt, against, and in 
 a line with, the toe of the right foot, the barrel perpendicular. 
 
 150. When the instinictor may wish to give repose in this posi- 
 tiom, he will command : 
 
 Eest. 
 
 151. At this command, the recruits will not be required to pre- 
 serve silence or steadiness. 
 
 152. When the instructor may wish the recruits to pass from 
 this position to that of silence and steadiness, he will command : 
 
 1. Attention. 2. Squad. 
 
 153. At the second word, the recruits will resume the position of 
 order arms. 
 
 Shoulder — Aems . 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 154. (First ruotion.) Eaise the piece vertically with the right 
 hand to the hight of the right breast, and opposite the shoulder, 
 the elbo\v close to the body ; seize the piece with the left hand be- 
 low the right, and drop quickly the right hand to grasp the piece 
 at the swell of the stock, the thumb and fore-finger embracing the 
 guard ; press the piece against the shoulder with the left hand, the 
 right arm nearly straight. 
 
 155. {Second motion.) Drop the left hand quickly by the side. 
 
 Load in nine times. 
 *1. Load. 
 
 156. Grasp the piece with the left hand as high as the right el- 
 bow, and bring it vertically opposite the middle of the body, shift 
 the right hand to the upper band, place the butt between the feet, 
 the barrel to the front; seize it with the left hand near the muz- 
 zle, which should be three inches from the body; carry the right 
 hand to the cartridge box. 
 
 2. Handle — Cartridge. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 157. Hieze the cartridge with the thumb and next two fingers, 
 and place it between the teeth. 
 
 3. Tear — Cartridge. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 158. Tear the paper to the powder, hold the cartridn;e upright 
 between the thumb and first two fingers, near the top ; in this }X>- 
 
 ^Wbenever tbe loadiaga and firinofs are to be executed, tho inetructor will cause the 
 'eartridge box to b« brought to the front. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 19 
 
 8ition plate it in front of and noar the muzxle — the back of the 
 hand to the front. 
 
 4. Charge — Cartridge. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 159. Empty the powder into the barrel ; dlBcngagc the ball from 
 the paper with the right hand and the thumb and first two fingers of 
 the left; insert it into the bore, the* pointed end uppermost, and 
 press it down with the right thumb ; seize the bead of the rammer 
 with t!ie thumb and fore-finger of the right hand, the other fingers 
 closed, the elbows near the body. 
 
 5. Draw — Rammer. 
 
 One time and three tnotions. 
 
 160. (First motion.) Half draw the rammer by extending the 
 right arm ; steady it in this position with the left thumb; grasp 
 the rammer near the muzzle with the right hand, the little finger 
 uppermost, tbe nailH to the front, the thumb extended along the 
 rammer. 
 
 161. {Second motion.) Clear the rammer from the pipes by 
 again extending the arm ; the rammer in the prolongation of the 
 pipes. 
 
 VG2. {Third motion.) Turn the rammer, the little end of tho 
 rammer passing near the left shoulder ; place tho head of the ram- 
 mer on the ball, the back of the hand to the front. 
 
 G. Ram — Cartridge. 
 
 One time and en", motion. 
 
 163. Insert the rammer us far as the right, and steady it in this 
 position with the thumb of the left hand ; seize the rammer at the 
 small end with tho thumb and fore-finger of the right hand, the 
 back of the hand to the front; press the ball home, the elbows 
 near the body. 
 
 7. lieiurn — Rammer. 
 
 One \ime and three motions. 
 
 iCy (Fir.ot moti/fli.) Draw tho rammer half-way out, and steady 
 it in this ]>c>Mit ion with the left thumb; grasp it near the muzzle 
 with ViiC right hand, (he little finger uppermost, the nails to tho 
 front, the thni^jb along the rnmnicr; clear the rammer from tho 
 iKtre by extending iI)o arm, the nails to the front, the rammer in 
 the prolongation of the bore. 
 
 105. {Srcoiid root Inn) Tnr.'"» the rammer, the head of the mm- 
 mor passing near the left shoulder, and insert it in the pipes until 
 tho right hand reaches theonuzzlc, thd iiriils to the front. 
 
 1(»G. {Third motion.) Force the rammer home b}' placing tho 
 little finger of the right hand on the head of the rammer ; pmetlo 
 h'ft hand down t!m barrel to the extent of the arm, without de- 
 pressing the shoulder. 
 
20 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 8. Prime.* — One time and two motions. 
 
 167. (First motion.) With the left hand raise the piece till the 
 hand is as high as the eye, grasp the small of the stock with 
 the right hand; half face to the right; place, at the same time, 
 the right foot behind and at right angles with the left; the hollow 
 of the right foot against the left heel. Slip the left hand down to 
 the lower band, the thumb along the stock, the left elbow against 
 the body ; bring the piece to the right side, the butt below the right 
 fore-arm — the small of the stock against the body and two inches 
 below the right breast, the barrel upwards, the rau7-zle on a level 
 with the eye. 
 
 168. (Second motion.) Half cock with the thumb of the right 
 hand, the fingers supported against the guai'd and the small of the 
 stock — remove the old cap with one of the fingers of the right 
 hand, and with the thumb and fore-finger of the same hand take 
 a cap from the pouch, place it on the nipple, and press it down 
 with the thumb; seize the small of the stock with the right hand. 
 
 9. Should er—AR-MB. 
 One time and tv:o motion-^. 
 
 169. (First motion.) Bring the piece to the right shoulder and 
 support it there with the left hand, face to the front; bring the 
 right heel to the side of and on a line with the left; grasp tlio 
 piece with the right hand as indicated in the position of shoulder 
 arms. 
 
 170. (Second motion.) Drop the left hand quickly by the side. 
 
 Ready. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 171. (First motion.) Eaisethe piece slightly with the right hand, 
 making a half face to the right on the left heel ; carry the right 
 foot to the rear, and place it at right angles to the left, the h»llow 
 of it opposite to, and against the left heel ; grasp the piece with 
 the left hand at the lower band and detach it slightly from the 
 shoulder. 
 
 172. (Second )7iotion.) Bring down the piece with both hands, the 
 barrel upward.^, the left thumb extended along the stock, the butt 
 below the right fore-arm, the small of the stock against the body 
 and two inches below the right breast, the muzp^le n& high as the 
 eye, the left elbow against the side ; place at tha same time the 
 right thumb on the heiid of the cook, the other fingers under and 
 against the guard. 
 
 *If Maynard's j-irimer bo uaed, ti\f. eommund will be: load in eight Hrn-es, and the 
 eighth command will be, Bh</ul<hT arms, and executed from rtiurn ramrner, in one time and 
 two motion.s, a.'^ follow*' ; 
 
 (First vwtion.) Rair<e the piece with the left-hand, und ti\kc the poi?it4on of shoulder 
 arms, aa indicated No. 146. 
 
 (Second vuytion.) Drop the left hand quiildy hy thf sidf-. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 21 
 
 173. (Third motion.) Cock, and seize the pioc-e at the pmall of 
 the stock without deranging the position of the butt. 
 
 Aim. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 174. Raise the piece with both hands, and support the butt 
 against the right shoulder; the left elbow down, the right as high 
 as the shoulder; incline the head upon the butt, so that the right 
 eye may perceive quickly the notch of the haussc, the front sight, 
 and the object aimed at; the left eye closed, the right thumb 
 extended along the stock, the fore-finger on the trigger. 
 
 175. When recruits are formed in two ranks to execute the 
 firings, the front rank men will raise a little less the right elbow, 
 in order to facilitate the aim of the rear rank men. 
 
 176. The rear rank men, in aiming, will each carry the right 
 foot about ten inches to the right, and towards the left heel of the 
 man next on the right, inclining the upper part of the body 
 forward. 
 
 Fire. 
 
 (h\e time and one motion. 
 
 177. rres.s the fore-finger against the trigger, fire, without low- 
 ering or turning the head, and remain in this position. 
 
 178. Instructors will bo careful to observe when the men fire, 
 that thej^ aim at some distinct object, and that the barrel be so 
 directed that the line of fire and the line of sight be in the same 
 vertical plane. They will often cause the firing to be executed on 
 ground of different inclinations, in order to accustom the men to 
 fire at objects either above or below them. 
 
 Load. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 179. Bring down the piece with both hands, at the same time 
 face to the front and Uike the position of load as indicated No. 
 156. Each rear rank man will bring his right foot by the side of 
 the loft. 
 
 180. The men being in this position, the instructor will cause 
 the loading to be continued by the commands and means pre- 
 scribed No. 15G and following. 
 
 181. \f^ after firing, the instructor should not wish the recruits 
 to reload, ho will command : 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 182. Throw up the piece briskly with the left hand and resume 
 the position of shoulder arms, at the same time face to the front, 
 turning on %he left heel, and bring the right heel on a line with 
 the left. 
 
22 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 183. To accustom the recruits to wait for the command firCy the 
 instructor, when they are in the position of aim, will command : 
 
 Recover — -Arms. 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 184. At the first part of the command, withdraw the finger 
 from the trigger ; at the command arms, retake the position of the 
 third motion of ready. 
 
 185. The recruits being in the position of the third motion of 
 ready, if the instructor should wish to bring them to a shoulder, 
 he will command : 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 186. At the command shoulder, place the thumb upon the cock, 
 the fore-finger on the trigger, half-cock, and seize the small of the 
 stock with the right hand. At the command arms, bring up the 
 piece briskly to the right shoulder, and retake the position of 
 shoulder arms. 
 
 187. The recruits being at shoulder arms, when the instructor 
 shall wish to fix bayonets, he will command : 
 
 Fix — Bayonet. 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 188. (First motion.) Grasp the piece with the left hand at the 
 hight of the shoulder, and detach it slightly from the shoulder 
 with the right hand. 
 
 189. {Second motion.) Quit the piece with the right hand, lower 
 it with the left hand, opposite the middle of the body, and place 
 the butt between the feet without shock ; the rammer to the rear, 
 the barrel vertical, the muzzle three inches from the body ; seize 
 it with the right hand at the uj^per band, and carry the left hand 
 reversed to the handle of the sabre-bayonet. 
 
 190. {Third motion.) Di-aw the sabre-bayonet from the scabbard 
 and fix it on the extremity of the barrel ; seize the piece with the 
 left hand, the arm extended, the right hand at the upper band. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 191. (First motion.) Eaise the piece with the left hand and plaoo 
 it against the right shoulder, the rammer to the front; seize the 
 piece at the same time with the right hand at the swell of the 
 stock, the thumb and fore-finger embracing the guard, the right 
 a,rm nearly extended. 
 
 192. (Second motion.) Drop briskly the left hand by the side. 
 
 Charge — Bayonet. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 193. (First motion.) Eaise the piece slightly with the right hand 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 23 
 
 and make a lialf face to the right on the left heel; place the hol- 
 low of the right foot opposite to, and three inches from the left 
 heel, the feet squai-e ; seize the piece at the same time with the 
 left hand a little above the lower band. 
 
 194. (Second motion.) Bring down the piece with both hands, the 
 barrel uppermost, the left elbow against the body; seize the small 
 of the stock, at the same time, with the right hand, which will be 
 supported against the hip ; the point of the sabre-bayonet as high 
 as the eye. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 195. (First motion.) Throw up the piece briskly with the left 
 hand in facing to the front, place it against the right shoulder, the 
 rammer to the front; turn the right hand so as to embrace the 
 guard, slide the left hand to the hight of the shoulder, the right 
 hand nearly extended. 
 
 196. (Second motion.) Drop the left hand smartly by the Bide. 
 
 Trail — Arms. 
 One time and two ?notions. 
 
 197. (First ynotion.) The same as the first motion of order arms. 
 
 198. (Second motion.) Incline the muzzle slightly to the front, 
 the butt to the rear and about four inches from the ground. The 
 right hand supported at the hip, will so hold the piece that the 
 rear rank men may not touch witli their bayonets the men in the 
 front rank. 
 
 Shoulcter — Arms. 
 
 199. At the command shoulder, raise the piece perpendicularly 
 in the right hand, the little finger in rear of the barrel ; at the 
 command arms, execute what has been prescribed for the shudder 
 from the position of order anns. 
 
 Unfix — Bayonet. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 200. (First and second vwtions.) The same as the first and second 
 motions o^ fix bayonet, except that, at the end of the second com- 
 mand, the thumb of the right hand will be placed on the spring of 
 the sabre-bayonet, and the left hand will embrace the handle of 
 the sabre-bayonet and the l)a»rel. the thumb extended along the 
 blade. 
 
 201. (Third motion.) Press the thumb of the right hand on the 
 spring, wrest off the sabre-ltayonet, turn it to the right, the edge 
 to the front, lower the guard until it touches the right hand, whic^i 
 will seize the back and the (.(Ige of the blade between the thumb 
 and first two fingers, the other fingers holding the piece; change 
 the position of the hand without quitting the handle, return the 
 sabre-bayonet to the scabbard, and seize the piece with the loft 
 hand, the arm extended. 
 
34 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 202. (First motion.) The same as the first motion from jix bayo- 
 net, No. 191. 
 
 ' 203. (Second motion.) The same as the second motion from fix 
 bayonet, No. 192. 
 
 Secure — Arms. 
 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 204. (First motion.) The same as the first motion of support arms, 
 No. 133, except with the right hand seize the piece at the small of 
 the stock. 
 
 205. (Second motion.) Turn the piece with both hands, the bar- 
 rel to the front; bring it opposite the left shoulder, the butt 
 against the hip, the left hand at the lower band, the thumb as high 
 a.s the chin and extended on the rammer ; the piece erect and 
 detached from the shoulder, the left fore-arm against the piece. 
 
 206. (Third motion.) Eeverse the piece, pass it under the left 
 arm, the left hand remaining at the lower band, the thumb on the 
 rammer to prevent it from sliding out, the little finger resting 
 agaiHst the hip, the right hand falling at the same time by the 
 side. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 One time and three motions. 
 
 207. (First ^notion.) Raise the piece with the left hand, and seize 
 it with the right hand at the small of the stock. The piece erect 
 and detached from the shoulder, tke butt against the hip, the left 
 fore-arm along the piece. 
 
 208. (Second motion.) The same as the second motion of shoulder 
 arms from a support. 
 
 209. (Third motion.) The same as the third motion of shoulder 
 arms from a support. 
 
 Eight shoulder shift — Arms. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 210. (First motion.) Detach the piece perpendicularly from the 
 shoulder with the right hand, and seize it with the left between 
 the lower band and guide-sight, raise the piece, the left hand at the 
 bight of the shoulder and four inches from it ; place, at the same 
 time, the right hand on the butt, the beak between the first two* 
 fingers, the other two fingers \inder the butt plate. 
 
 211. (Second motion.) Quit the piece with the left hand, raise 
 and place the piece o» the right shoulder with the right hand, the 
 lock plate upwards; let fall, at the same time, the left hand by the 
 side. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 212. (First motion.) Raise the piece perpendicularly by extend- 
 
SCirOOL OF THE SOLDIER. ^^ 
 
 ing the right arm to its full length, the rammer to the front, at the 
 same time seize the piece with the left hand between the lower 
 band and guide sight. 
 
 213. (Second motion.) Quit the butt with the right hand, whic*li 
 will immediately embrace the guard, lower the piece to the posi- 
 tion of shoulder arms, slide up the left hand to the hight ol" tho 
 shoulder, the fingers extended and closed. Drop the left hand by 
 the side. 
 
 214. The men being at support arms, the instructor will some- 
 times cause pieces to be brought to the right shoulder. To this 
 effect, he will command : 
 
 Right shoulder shift — Arms. 
 One time and tico motions. 
 
 215. (First motion.) Seize the piece with the right hand, below 
 and near the Icfl fore-arm, place the left hand under the butt, the 
 heel of the butt between the first two lingers. 
 
 216. (Second motion.) Turn the piece with the left hand, the lock 
 plate upwards, carry it to the right shoulder, the left hand still 
 holding the butt, the muzzle elevated ; hold the piece in this posi- 
 tion and place the right hand upon the butt as is prescribed No. 
 210, and let fall the left hand by the side. 
 
 Support — Arms. 
 
 One time and two ^notions. 
 
 217. (First motion.) The same as the fix'st motion of shoulder 
 arms, No. 212. 
 
 218. (Second motion.) Turn the piece with both hands, the barrel 
 to the fi'ont, carry it opposite the left shoulder, slip the right hand 
 to the small of the stock, place the left fore-arm extended on the 
 breast as is -prescribed No. 134, and let fall the right hand by the 
 side. 
 
 Arms — At will. 
 
 One time jind one motion. 
 
 219. At this command, carry the piece at pleasure on either 
 shoulder, with one or both hands, the muzzle elevated. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 One time and one motion. 
 
 220. At this command, retake quickly the position of shoulder 
 arms. 
 
 '>.21. The recruits being at ordered arms, when the instructor 
 
 "isn w cause the pieces to be pUiccd on the ground, he will 
 oommana-. r. ' 
 
 Ground — Arms. 
 
 ^<- Hme and ttto motion-^ 
 
 222. (Fint motion.) Turn tht piece with the right hand, Uie bar- 
 
26 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 rel to the left ; at the same time seize the cartridge box with the 
 left hand, bend the body, advance the left foot, the heel opposite 
 the lower band ; lay the piece on the ground with the right hand, 
 the toe of the butt on a line with the right toe, the knees slightly 
 bent, the right heel raised. ' 
 
 223. (Second motion.) Rise up, bring the left foot by the side of 
 the right, quit the cartridge box. with the left hand, and drop the 
 h-ands by the side. 
 
 jRaise — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 224. (First motion.) Seize the cartridge box with the left hand, 
 bend the body, advance the left foot opposite the lower band, and 
 seize the piece with the right hand. 
 
 225. (Second motion.) Raise the piece, bringing the left foot by 
 the side of the right; turn the piece with the right hand, the ram- 
 mer to the front ; at the same time quit the cartridge box with the 
 left hand, and drop this hand by the side. 
 
 Inspection of Ar7ns. 
 
 226. The recruits being at ordered arms, and having the sabre- 
 bayonet in the scabbard, if the instrustor wishes to cause an in- 
 spection of arms, he will command : 
 
 Inspection — Arms. 
 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 227. (First motion.) Seize the piece wnth the left hand below and 
 near the upper baud, carry it with both hands opposite the middle 
 of the body, the butt between the feet, the rammer to the rear, 
 the barrel vertical, the muzzle about three inches from the body; 
 carry the left hand reversed to the sabre bayonet, draw it from the 
 scabbai-d and fix it on the barrel ; grasp the piece with tbe left 
 hand below and near the upper band, seize the rammer with the 
 thumb and fore-finger of the right hand bent, the other fingers 
 closed. 
 
 228. (Second motion.) Draw the rammer as has-been explained 
 in loading, and let it glide to the bottom of the bore, replace the 
 piece with the left hand opposite the right shoulder, and retake the 
 position of ordered arms. 
 
 229. The instructor will then inspect in succession the piece of 
 each recruit, in passing along the front of the rank. Each, as the 
 instructor reaches him, will raise smartly his piece with his right 
 hand, seize it with the left between the lower band and guide sight 
 
 the recruit, who will receive i1 
 
 place it in the position of ordered arms. , vAon 
 
 230. When the instructor shall hav^ passed him, eacn iei.iv 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 27 
 
 will retake the position prescribed at the command inspcctiori a7'7t\s, 
 roturn the rammer, and resume the position of ordered anyis. 
 
 231. If, instead of inspection o/^7-wi5, the instructor Rhonld merely 
 wish to cause bayonets to be fixed, he will command : 
 
 Fix — Bayonet. 
 
 232. Take the position indicated in No. 227, fix bayonets as has 
 been explained, and immediately resume the position of ordered 
 arms. 
 
 233. If it bo the wish of the instructor, after firing, to ascertain 
 whetlvcr the pieces have been discharged, he will command : 
 
 Spring — Rammers. 
 
 234. Put the rammer in the barrel as has been explained above, 
 and immediately retake the position of ordered arms. 
 
 235. The instructor, for the purpose stated, can take the ram- 
 mer by the small end, and spring it in the barrel, or cause each 
 recruit to make it ring in the barrel. 
 
 236. Each recruit, after the instructor passes him, will return 
 rammer and resume the position of ordered arms. 
 
 Remarks on the Manual of Arms. 
 
 237. The manual of arms frequently distorts the persons of re- 
 cruits before tlicy acquire case and confidence in the several posi- 
 tions. The instructor will therefore frequently recur to element- 
 ary principles in the course of the lessons. 
 
 238. Tlecruits are also extremely liable to curve the sides and 
 back, and to derange the shoulders, especially in loading. Conse- 
 quently, the instructor will not cause them to dwell too long at a 
 time in one position. 
 
 239. When, after smne days of exercise in the manual of arms, 
 the four men shall be well established in their use, the instructor 
 will always terminate the lesson by marching the men for some 
 time in one rank, and at one pace apart, in common and quick 
 time, in order to confirm them more and more in the mechanism of 
 the step ; he will also teach them to mark time and to change stej; ; 
 which will bo executed in the following manner: 
 
 To mark time. 
 
 240. The four men marching in the direct step, the instructor 
 will command : 
 
 1. Mark time. 2. March. 
 
 241. At the second command, which will be given at the instant 
 A foot is coming to the ground, tiie recruit* will make a semblance 
 of marching, by bringing the heels by the side of each other, and 
 observing the cadence of the step, by raising each foot alternately 
 without advancing. 
 
 242. The instructor wishing the direct step to be rowumed, will 
 command : 
 
28 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 243. At the second command, which will be given as prescribed 
 above, the recruits will retake the step of twenty-eight inches. 
 
 To change step. 
 
 244. The squad being in march, the instructor will command: 
 
 1. Change step. 2. March. 
 
 245. At the second command, which will be given at the instant 
 either foot is coming to the ground, bring the foot which is in rear 
 by the side of that which is in front, and step off again with the 
 foot which was in front. 
 
 2^0 march backwards. 
 
 246. The instructor wishing the squad to march backwards, will 
 command : 
 
 1. Squad backward. 2. March. 
 
 247. At the second command, the reci'uits will step oif smartly 
 with the left foot fourteen inches to the rear, reckoning from heel 
 to heel, and so on with the feet in succession till the command halt, 
 which will always be preceded by the caution squad. The men 
 will halt at this command, and bring back the foot in front by the 
 side of the other. 
 
 248. This step will always be executed in quick time. 
 
 249. The instructor will be watchful that the recruits march 
 straight to the rear, and that the erect position of the body and the 
 piece be not deranged. 
 
 Lesson III. — To load in four times. 
 
 250. The object of this lesson is to prepare the recruits to load 
 at will, and to cause them to distinguish the times which require 
 the greatest regularity and attention, siich as charge cartridge, ram 
 cartridge and prime. It will be divided as follows : 
 
 251. The first time will be executed at the end of the command; 
 I3ie three others at the commands, two, three and/owr. 
 
 The instructor will command : 
 
 1. Load in four times. 2. Load. 
 
 252. Execute the times to include charge cartridge. 
 
 Two. 
 
 253. Execute the times to include ram cartridge. 
 
 Three. 
 , 254. Execute the times to include prime. 
 
 Four. 
 
 255. Execute the time of shoulder arms. 
 
 To load at will. 
 
 256. The instruotor will next teach loading at will, which will 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 29 
 
 be executed a« loading in four times, but continued, and without 
 resting on either of the times. lie Avill command : 
 
 1. Load at icill. 2. Load. 
 
 257. Thw instructor will habituate the recruits, by degress, to 
 load with the greatest posKible promptitude, each without regula- 
 ting him8elf by his neighbor, and above all without waiting for 
 hi.nXj 
 
 268. The cadence prescribed No. 129, i.s not applicable to load- 
 ing in fourtime^s, or at will. 
 
 Lesson IV. — Firings. 
 
 259. The firings are direct or oblique, and will be oxciiutcd as 
 follows . 
 
 The direct fire. 
 
 260. The instructor will give the following commands : 
 
 1. Fire by sqwid. 2. Squad. 3. Ready. 4. Aim. 5. Fjrk. 
 
 G. Load. 
 
 261. ThoHe several c<^nimands will be executed as has been pre- 
 scribed in the Manual of Arms. At the third command, the men 
 will come to the position of ready as heretofore explained. At 
 the fourth they will aim according to the rank in which each may 
 find himself placed, the rear rank men inclining forward a little 
 the upper part of the body, in order that their pieces may reach 
 as much beyond the front rank as post^iblc. 
 
 262. At the sixth command they will load their pieco.i and re- 
 turn immediately to the position of ready. 
 
 263. Tho iiiPtruct<)r will recommence the firing by the command : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Aim. 8. Fire. 4. Load. 
 
 164. Whe.ri the instruet'^r wishes the firing to cease, he will 
 command : 
 
 Cc/ise firiiX'g. 
 
 2n5. At this rr^mmand the men will cca«e firing, but will load 
 their pie<yvj If unloarled, and afterwards bring them to a shoulder. 
 
 Oblique firings. 
 
 266. The obliqut' firings will be cxtxjut<Hi to the right and left, 
 and by the same commands a.s the direct fire, with this single dif- 
 ferenc<> — the command aim will alvvHyrt be |>roccded by the cau- 
 Mo«, right or left ol)lique. 
 
 Position of thf tiro rari/\s in the Oblique Fire to tJw. right. 
 
 a6T. At the command ready, the two ranks will oxe<'Ute what 
 ha« been prt*»cribc<l for the direct fire. 
 
 268. At the cautionary command, right oldique. tho two ranlcM 
 will throw back tho right shoiildor and look st^'adily at thf object 
 to b*' hit 
 
30 SCHOOL OF thp: soldier. 
 
 ^ 269. At the command, aim, each front rank man will aim to the 
 right without deranging the feet ; each rear i*ank man Avill ad- 
 vance the left foot about eight inches toward the right heel of the 
 man next on the right of his file leader and aim to the right, in- 
 clining the upper part of the body forward and bending a little 
 the left knee. 
 
 Position of the two ranks in the Oblique Fire to the left. 
 
 270. At the cautionary command, left oblique, the two ranks will 
 throw back the left shoulder and look steadily at the object to be 
 hit. 
 
 27L At the command, aim, the front rank will take aim to the 
 left without deranging the feet; each man in the rear will advance 
 the right foot about eight inches toward the right heel of the man 
 next on the right of his file leader, and aim to the left, inclining the 
 upper part of the body forward and bending a little the right knee, 
 
 272. In both cases, at the command, load, the men of each rank 
 will come to the position of load as pre-scribod in the direct firej 
 the rear rank men bringing back the foot Avhich is to the right and 
 fi'ont by the side of the other. Each man will continue to load as 
 if isolated. 
 
 To fire by fiU. 
 
 273. The fire by tile will be executed by the two ranks, the files 
 of which will fire successively, and without regulating on eaoh 
 other, except for the first fire. 
 
 274. The instructor will command: 
 
 1. Fire by file. 2. Squad. 3. REApy. 4. Commence firing. 
 
 275. At the third command, the two ranks will take the po8l'ti<» 
 prescribed in the direct fire. 
 
 276. At the fourth command, the file on the right will aim and 
 fire; the rear rank man in aiming will take the position indicated 
 No. 176. 
 
 277. The men of this file will load their pieces briskly and fire a 
 second time ; reload and fire again, and so on in continuation. 
 
 278. The second file will aim at the instant the first brings 
 down pi(>ces to reload, and will conform in all respects to that which 
 has just been pi'cscribed for the first file. 
 
 279. After the first fire, the front and rear rank men will not be 
 required to fire at the same time. 
 
 280. Each man, after loading, will return to the position of 
 ready, and continno the fire. 
 
 281. Wlien the instructor wishes tho fire to cease, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 Cease — Firing. 
 
 282. At this command, the men will cease firing. If they havS 
 fired they will load their pieces and bring them to a shoulder; if 
 at tho position of ready, they will half-coc!v and shoulder arms. 
 If in the position oP aim, they will bring down tlieir pieces, half- 
 cock, and shoulder ai-ms. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 31 
 
 To fire by rank. 
 
 283. The fire by rank will be executed by each entire rank, al- 
 ternately. 
 
 284. The instructor will command : 
 
 1. Fire by rank. 2. Squad. 3. Ready. 4. Rear Hank. 5. Aim. 
 G. Fire. 7. Load. 
 
 285. At the third command, the two ranks will take the position 
 of ready, an prescribed in the direct fire. 
 
 286. At the seventh command, the roar rank will execute that 
 which has been prescribed in the direct fire, and al"terward» take 
 the position of ready. 
 
 287. As soon as the instructor sees several men of the rear rank 
 in the position of ready, he will command : 
 
 1. Front Jiaiik. 2. Aim. 3. Fire. 4. Load. 
 
 288. At these commands, the men in the front rank will execute 
 what has been prescribed for the roar rank, but they will not step 
 off with right foot. 
 
 289. The instructor will recommence the firing by the rear rank, 
 and will thus continue to alternate from rank to rank, until he 
 shall wish the firing to cease, when he will command, cease firingy 
 which will be executed as heretofore pi'cscribed. 
 
 -Lesson V. — To fire and load kneeling. 
 
 290. \y\ this exorcise the ^quad will be supposed loaded and 
 drawn up in one rank. The instruction will be given to each man 
 individually, without times or motions, and in the following 
 manner. 
 
 29L The instructor will command: 
 
 Fire and load kn£Elino. 
 
 202. At thin command, the man on the right of the squad will 
 move forward three paces and halt; then carry the right foot to 
 the rear and to the right of the left heel, and in a ])OHition conve- 
 nient for placing the right knee upon the ground in bending the 
 left leg ; place the right knee upon the ground; lower the piece, 
 the left f<jre arm supported upon the thigh on tlio same side, the 
 right hand on the small of the stock, the butt resting on the right 
 thigh, the led hand supjtorting the piece m ar the lower Viand. 
 
 29.J. }lc will next move the right leg to the lefl .sirouml the knoo 
 supported on the ground, until this leg is nearly jtcrpendicular to 
 the direction of the left foot, and thus scat himself comfortably on 
 the right heol. 
 
 294. Itiiiso the piece vrith the right hand and wupjiort it with the 
 left, holding it near the lower band, the Icfl elbow resting on the 
 left thigh near the knee ; seize the hammer with tin- thumb, the 
 f)rc finger under the guard, crck and Beiz.e the pie< e at the Bmall 
 of the BUjck ; bring the piece to the shoulder, a\m and fire. 
 
^2 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 295. Bring the piece down as soon as it is fired, and support it 
 witli the left hand, the butt resting against the right thigh ; carry 
 the piece to the rear rising on the knee, the barrel downwards, the 
 l)utt resting on the ground ; in this position support the piece with 
 the left hand at the upper band, draw cartridge with the right and 
 load the piece, ramming the ball, if necessary, with both hands. 
 
 296. When loaded bring the piece to the front Avith the left 
 hand, which holds it at the upper band ; seize it at the same time 
 with the right hand at the smsiU of the stock ; turn the piece, the 
 barrel uppermost and nearly horizontal, the left elbow resting on 
 the left thigh ; half-cock, l*emove the old cq^ and prime, rise, and 
 return to the ranks. 
 
 297. The second man will then be taught what has just been 
 prescribed for the first, and so on through the remainder of the 
 squad. 
 
 Fire and load lying. 
 
 298. In this exorcise the squad will be in one rank and loaded : 
 the instruction will be given individually and without times or 
 motions. 
 
 299. The instructor will command : 
 
 Fire and load lying. 
 
 300. At this command, the man on the right of the squad will 
 move forward three paces and halt; he will then bring his piece 
 to an order, drop on both knees, and place himself on the ground 
 flat on his belly. In this position he wil Isupport the piece nearly 
 horizontal with the left hand, holding it near the lower band, the 
 butt end of the piece and the left elbow resting on the ground, the 
 barrel uppermost ; cock the piece with the right hand, and carry 
 this hand to the small of the stock ; raise the piece with both 
 hands, press the butt against the shoulder, and resting on both 
 elboAvs, aim and fire. 
 
 301. As soon as he has fired, bring the piece down and turn 
 upon his left, side, still resting on his left elbow; bring back the 
 piece until the cock is opposite his breast, the butt end resting on 
 the ground; take out a cartridge with the right hand; seize the 
 small of the stock with this hand, holding the cartridge with the 
 thumb and two first fingers ; he will then throw himself on his 
 back still holding the piece with both hands ; carry the piece to 
 the rear, place the butt between the heels, the barrel up, the muz- 
 zle elevated. In this position, charge cartridge, draw rammer, 
 ram cartridge, and return rammer. 
 
 302. When finished loading, the man will turn again upon his 
 left side, remove the old cap and prime, then raise the piece verti- 
 cally, rise, turn about, and resume his position in the ranks. 
 
 303. The second man Avill be taught what has just been pre- 
 scribed for the first, and so on throughout the squad. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 33 
 
 i ' ' 
 
 Lesson VI. — Bayonet Exercise. 
 
 304. The bayonet exercise in this book will be confined to two 
 movements, the guard against infantry, and the guard against cav- 
 alry. The men will be placed in one rank, with two pacea interval, 
 and beint; at nlioulder arms, the instructor will command : 
 
 I. Guard against Infantry. 2. Guard. 
 One time and tico tnotions. 
 
 ii05. (First motion.) iSiixkc a half face to the right, turning on 
 both heels, the feet square to each other ; at the same time rai.so 
 the piece slightly, and seize it with the loft hand above and near 
 the lower band. 
 
 30G. (Seco7id motion.) Carry the right foot twenty inches perpen- 
 dicularly to the rear, the right heel ou the prolongation of the left, 
 the knees slightlj* bent, the weight of the body resting equally on 
 both legs; lower the piece with both hands, the barrel uppermost, 
 the left elbow again.st the body; seize the piece at the same time 
 with the right hand at the small of the stock, the arms falling 
 naturally, the point of the bayonet slightly elevated. 
 
 Shoulder — Aiim.s. 
 
 One tiw^. and one ^notion. 
 
 307. Throw up the piece with the left hand, and place it against 
 the right shoulder, at the same time bring the right heel by the 
 aide of the left and face to the front. 
 
 1. Guard against Cavalry. 2. Guard. 
 One time and two motions. 
 
 308. ]ioth motions the same as for guard against infantry., except 
 that the right hand will be supported against the hip, and the 
 bayonet held at the hight of the eyi-, jvh in charge bayonet. 
 
 Shoulder — Arms. 
 (h\f time and one motion. 
 
 309. Spring up the piece with the left hand and place it against 
 the right shoulder, at the same time bring the right hool bv the 
 aide of the left, and face to the front. 
 
 PAIIT THIRD. 
 
 310. Wheu the recruits are well estiiblislied in tho principles and 
 mechanism of the .ttrp, the position of the body, and tfie manual of 
 arms, the instructor will unite eight men. at least, and twolve men, 
 at most, in order to tearh them the principleH of alignment, the 
 principles of the touch of elbowH in marching to the front, the 
 princi|>le8 (^'f the march by tho flank, wheeling from a halt, wheel- 
 ing in marching, and the chnngo of dirt»f:lion to the Hide of tbo 
 
 .1 
 
34 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 guide. He will place the squad in one rank elbow to elbow, and 
 number the men from right to left. 
 
 Lksson I. — Alignments. 
 
 311. The instructor will at first teach the recruits to align 
 themselves man by man, in order the better to make them com- 
 prehend the principles of alignment; to this end, he will command 
 the two men on the right flank to march two paces to the front, 
 and having aligned them, he will caution the remainder of the 
 squad to move up, as they may be successively called, each by his 
 number, and align themselves successively on the line of the first 
 two men. 
 
 312. Each recruit, as designated by his number, will turn the 
 head and eyes to the right as prescribed in the first lesson of the 
 first part, and will march in quick time two paces fonvard, shorten- 
 ing the last, so as to find himself about six inches behind the new 
 alignment, which ho ought never to pass ; he will next move up 
 steadily by steps of two or three inches, the hams extended, to the 
 side of the man next to him on the alignment, so that, without 
 dei'anging the head, the line of the eyes, or that of the shoulders, 
 he may find himself in the exact line of his neighbor, whose elbow 
 he will lightly touch without opening his own. 
 
 313. The instructor seeing the rank well aligned, will command: 
 
 Front. 
 
 314. At this, the recruits will turn eyes to the front, and remain 
 firm. 
 
 315. Alignments to the left will be executed on the same 
 principles. 
 
 316. When the recruits shall have thus learned to align them- 
 selves man by man, correctly, and without groping or jostling, the 
 instructor will cause the entire rank to align itself at once by the 
 command : 
 
 Eight (or left) — Dress. 
 
 317. At this, the rank, except the two men placed in advance as 
 a basis of alignment, will move up in quick time, and place theni- 
 selves on the new line, according to the principles prescribed No. 
 312. 
 
 318. The instructor, placed five or six paces in front, and facing 
 the rank, will carefully observe that the principles are followed, 
 and then pass to the flank that has served as the basis, to verify 
 the alignment. 
 
 319. The instructor seeing the greater number of the rank 
 
 aligned, will command : 
 
 Front. 
 ,)if.i 
 
 320. The instructor may afterwards ovdcv this or that ^\q foncard 
 or hack, designating each by its number. The file or files desig- 
 nated, only, will slightly turn the head towards the basis, to judge 
 how much they ouglit to move up or back, steadily place them- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 36 
 
 selves on the line, and then turn eyes to the front, without a parti- 
 cular command to that effect. 
 
 321. Alignments to the rear will be executed on the name prin- 
 ciples, the recruits stepping back a little beyond the line, and then 
 dressing up according to tlie principles prescribed No. 312, the in- 
 structor commanding : 
 
 Right (or left) bachuard — Dbi.ss 
 
 322. Arter each alignment, the instructor will examine the posi- 
 tion of the men, and eause the rank to come to ordered arms, to 
 prevent too much fatigue, and also the danger of negligence at 
 shouldered ar77is. 
 
 LESSON II. 
 
 323. The men liaving learned, in the first and second parts, to 
 marcli with steadiness in common time, and to take steps equal in 
 length and swiftness, will be exercised in the third part only in 
 quick time, double quick time, and the run ; the instructor will cause 
 them to execute successively, at these different gaits, the march to 
 the front, the facing about in marching, the march by the flank, 
 the wheels at a halt and in nianhing. and the changes of direction 
 to the side of the guides. 
 
 324. The instructor will inform the recruits that at the com- 
 mand 1/utrch. they will always move off in quick time, unless this 
 command should be preceded by that of double quick. 
 
 To march to the front. 
 
 325. The rank being corrcctl}- aligned, when the instructor shall 
 wish to cause it to march by the front, he will place a well in- 
 structed man on the right or the loll, according to the side on 
 which he may wish the guide to be, and command : 
 
 1. Squad, forxcard. 2. Guide right (or left.) 3. March. 
 
 32(j. At the command march, the rank will step off umartly with 
 the lefl foot; the guide «ill take care to march straight to the 
 front, kce]>ing his shouhlers always in a square with that line. 
 
 327. The instructor will observe, in marching to ihe front, that 
 the men touch lightly th« elbow towards tin- side of the gui<le; 
 that they do not open out the left elbow, nor the right arm : that 
 they yield lo presstin! coming from the side of the guide, and re- 
 sist that coming from the opposite side ; that they recover by in- 
 sensible degrees the slight toiieh of the elbow, if lost; (hat thej- 
 maintain the head direct to the front, no matter on which side the 
 guide nay be; and if found >R'fore or behind the alignment, that 
 the man in fault corrects himself by shortening (»r lengthening the 
 step, by degrecis, almost insensible. 
 
 32S. The ins(rucl^)r will labor to cause recruits to C(»mprehend 
 that the alignment can otil}' be preserved . in marching, b}- the re- 
 gularity of the step, the touch of the elbow, and the mainfcfiance 
 >f the shoulders in a square with the line of direction ; that if, for 
 
36 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 example, the step of some bo longer than that of others, or if gome 
 march faster than others, a separation of elbows, and a loss of the 
 alignment, would be inevitable ; that if (it being required that the 
 head should be direct to the front) they do not strictly observe the 
 touch of elbows, it would bo impossible for an individual to judge 
 whether ho marches abreast witb his neighbor, or not, and whether 
 there bo not an interval between them. 
 
 329. The impulsion of the quick step having a tendency to make 
 men too easy and free in their movements, the instructor will be 
 careful to regulate the cadence of this step, and to habituate them 
 to preserve always the erectness of the body, and the duo longth 
 of the pace. 
 
 330. The men being well established in the principles of the di- 
 rect march, the instructor will exercise them in marching oblique- 
 ly. The rank being in march, the instructor will command : 
 
 1. Itight (or left) oblique. 2. March. 
 
 331. At the second command, each man will make a half face 
 to the right (or loft), and will then march straight forward in the 
 new direction. As the men no longer touch elbows, they will 
 glance along the shoulders of tho nearest files, towards the side to 
 which the}'' are obliquing, and will I'Ogulato their steps so that the 
 shoulders shall always bo behind that of their next neighbor on 
 that side, and that his head shall conceal the heads of tho other 
 men in the rank. Besides this, the men should preserve the same 
 length of pace, and the same degree of obliquity. 
 
 332. Tho instructor, wishing to resume tho primitive direction, 
 will command : 
 
 1. Forward. 2. Marcu. 
 
 333. At the second command, each man will make a half face to 
 the left (or right), and all will thou march straight to the front, 
 conforming to the principles of the direct march. 
 
 To nuirch to the front in Sbublc cpiick time. 
 
 334. When the several principles, heretofore explained, have be- 
 come familiar to tho recruits, and they shall be \vell established in 
 the position of the body, the bearing of arms, and the mechanism, 
 length, and swiftness of tho step, tho instructor will pass them 
 from quick to double quick time, and the reverse, observing not to 
 make them march obliquely in double quick time, till they are well 
 established in the cadence ot this step. 
 
 335. The squad being at a march in quick time, tho inytructor 
 will command : 
 
 1. Double q^iick. 2. March. 
 
 336. At the command inarch, which will be given when either 
 foot is coming t<j the ground, tho squad will step off in double quick 
 time. The men will endeavor to follow the principles laid down 
 in tho first part of this book, and to pretH-rve the alignment. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 37 
 
 337. When the instructor wishes the squad to resume tlie sU'p in 
 quick time, he will command : 
 
 1. Quick time. . 2. March. 
 
 338. At the command march, which will be given when either 
 foot is coming to the ground, the squad will retake the step in 
 quick time. 
 
 339. The squad being in march, the instructor will halt it by 
 the commands and means prescribed Nos. 98 and 99. The com- 
 mand halt, will be given an instant before the foot is ready to be 
 placed on the ground. 
 
 340. The squad being in march in double quick time, the in- 
 structor will occasionally cause it to mark time by the commands 
 proscribed No. 240. The men will then mark double quick time, 
 without altering the cadence of the step. He will also cause them 
 to pass from the direct to the oblique stc]), and reciprocal 1}', con- 
 forming to what has been prescribed No. 330, and following; 
 
 341. The squad being at a halt, the instructor will cause it to 
 march in double quick time, by preceding the command march, by 
 double quick. 
 
 342. The instructor will endeavor to regulate well the cadence 
 of this step. 
 
 To face about in marching. 
 
 343. If the squad be marching in quick, or double quick time, 
 and the instructor should wish to march it in retreat, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. tSguad right about. 2. March. 
 
 344. At the command march, which will be given at the instant 
 the left foot is coming to the ground, the recruit will bring this 
 foot to the ground, and turning on it, will face to the rear ; he wWl 
 then place the right foot in the new direction, and step ofl' with 
 the left foot. 
 
 To maj'ch backward.^. 
 
 345. The squad being at a halt, if the instructor should wish to 
 inarch it in the back 8t<;p, lie will command : 
 
 1. Squad backward. 2. Quide left (or right). 3. March. 
 
 340. The back step will be executed by the means prescribed 
 No. 247. 
 
 347. The instructor, in this step, will be watchful that the men 
 do not lean on each other. 
 
 348. As the march to the front in quick time should only be ex- 
 ecuted at shouldered arros, the instructor, in order not to fatigue 
 the men too much, and also to prevent negligence in gait and posi- 
 tion, will halt the squad from time to time, and cause arms to be 
 ordered. 
 
 349. In marching at double quick time, the men will always carry 
 Ibor pieces on the right sJwuldcr or at a trail. Thvi rule is general. 
 
38 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 350. If the instructor shall wish the pieces carried at a trail, he 
 will give the command trail arms, before the command double quick. 
 If, on the contrary, this command be not ^iven, the men will 
 shift their pieces to the right shoulder at the command double quick. 
 In either case, at the command halt, the men will bring their pieces 
 to the position of shoulder arms. This rule is general. 
 
 "V; Lesson III. — The march by the flank. 
 
 351. The rank being at a halt, and correctly aligned, the in- 
 structor will command : 
 
 1. Squad, right — Face. 2. Forward. S. March. 
 
 352. At the last part of the first command, the rank will face to 
 the right; the even numbered men, after facing to the right, will 
 step quickly to the right side of the odd numbered men, the latter 
 standing fast, so that when the movement is executed, the men will 
 be formed into files of two men abreast. .-qi 
 
 353. At the third command, the squad will step oif smartly witk 
 the left foot ; the files keeping aligned, and preserving their in- 
 tervals. 
 
 354. The inarch by the left flank will be executed by the same 
 commands, substituting the word left for right, and by inverse 
 means ; in this case, the even numbered men, after facing to the 
 left, will stand fast, and the odd numbered will place themselves 
 on their left. 
 
 355. The instructor will place a well-instructed soldier by the 
 side of the recruit who is at the head of the rank, to regulate the 
 step, and to conduct him ; and it will be enjoined on this recruit 
 to march always elbow to elbow with the soldier. 
 
 356. The instructor Avill cause to be observed in the march, by ,{j 
 the flank, the following rules: 
 
 That the step be executed according to the principles prescribed, for the 
 
 direct step; 
 
 Because these ])rinciples, without which men, placed elbow to 
 olbow, in the same rank, cannot preserve unity and harmony of 
 movement, are of a more necessary observance in marching in 
 file. 
 
 That the head of the man who immediately precedes, covers the heads 
 of all v-ho are in front; 
 
 Because it is the most certain rule by which each man may 
 maintain himself in the exact line of the file. 
 
 357. The instructor will place himself habitually five or six pa- 
 ces on the flank of the rank marching in file, to watch over the ex- 
 ecution of the principles prescribed above. He will also place .; 
 himself sometimes in its rear, halt, and suffer it to pass fifteen or ■. 
 twenty paces, the better to see whether the men cover each other^' 
 accurately. 
 
 358. When he shall wish to halt the rank, marching by the 
 flank, and to cause it to face to the front, he will command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 39 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 359. At the second command, the rank will halt, and afterwards 
 no man Nvill Htir, although he may have lost his distance. Tiiis 
 prohibition is necessary, to habituate the men to a constant pres- 
 ervation of their distances. 
 
 360. At tlie third command, each man will front by facing to the 
 left, if marching by the right flank, and by a face to the right, if 
 marching by the left flank. The I'car rank men will at the same 
 time move quickly into their places, so as to form the squad again 
 into one rank. 
 
 361. When the men have become accustomed to marching by the 
 flank, the instructor will cause them to change direction by file ; 
 for this purpose, he will command : 
 
 1. By file left (or right). 2. March. 
 
 362. At the command march, the first file will change direction 
 to the left (or right) in describing a small arc of a circle, and will 
 then march straight forward ; the two men of this file, in wheeling, 
 will keep up the touch of the elbows, and the man on the side to 
 which the wheel is made, will shorten the first three or four stops. 
 Each file will come successively to wheel on the same spot where 
 that which preceded it wheeled. 
 
 363. The instructor will also cause the squad to face by the right 
 or left flank in marching, and for this purpose will command : 
 
 1. Squad by the right (or left) flank. 2. March. 
 
 364. At the second command, which will be given a little before 
 either foot comes to the ground, the recruits will turn the body, 
 plant the foot that is raised in the new direction, and step off" with 
 the other foot without altering the cadence of the step; the men 
 will double or undouble rajiidly. 
 
 365. If, in facing by the right or left flank, the squad should 
 face to the rear, the men will come into one rank, agreeably to the 
 principles indicated No. 360. It is to be remarked that it is the 
 men who are in rear who always move up to form into single rank 
 and in such manner as never to invert the order of the numbers 
 in the rank. 
 
 366. If, when the squad has been faced to the rear, the instructor 
 should cause it to face by the left flank, it is the even numbers who 
 will double by moving to the leflof the odd numbers ; but if by tho 
 right flank, it is the odd numbers who will double to the right of, 
 the even numbers, 
 
 367. This lesson, like the preceding one, will be practiced with 
 pieces at a shoulder; but the instructor may, to give relief by 
 change, occasionally order nuppori armn, and he will require of the 
 recruits marching in this position, as much regularity as in the 
 former. 
 
 The march by the flank in double quick time. 
 
 368. Tho principles of the marfb bv the flank in double quick 
 
40... SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 time, are the same as in quick time. The instructor will give the 
 commands prescribed No. 351, taking care always to give the com-' 
 mand double quick before that of march. 
 
 369. He will pay the greatest attention to the cadence of the 1 
 step. * 
 
 370. The instructor will cause the change of direction, and the 
 march by the flank, to be executed in double quick time, by the 
 same commands, and according to the same principles as in quick '^ 
 time. ' 
 
 371. The instructor will cause the pieces to be carried either on 
 the right shoulder or at a trail. 
 
 372. The instructor will sometimes march the squad by the 
 flank, without doubling the files. 
 
 373. The principles of this march are the same as in two ranks, 
 and it will always be executed in quick time. 
 
 374. The instructor will give the commands pi'cscribed No. 351, 
 but ho will be careful to caution the squad not to double tiles. 
 
 375. The instructor will be watchful that the men do not bend ^ 
 their knees unequally, which would cause them to tread on the : ^ 
 heels of the men in front, and also to lose the cadence of the .'[ 
 step and their distances. , 
 
 376. The various movements in this lesson will be executed in ^ 
 single rank. In the changes of direction, the leading man will 
 change direction without altering the length or the cadence of the 
 step. The instructor will recall to the attention of the men, that 
 in facing by the right or left flank in marching, they will not 
 double, but march in one rank. 
 
 ■ Lesson IV. — Wheelings. — General j)inciples of Wheelings. 
 
 377. Wheelings are of two kinds : fi'om halts, or on fixed pivots, 
 and in march or on moveable pivots. 
 
 378. Wheeling on a fixed pivot takes place in passing a corps 
 from the order in battle to the order in column, or from the latter 
 to the former. 
 
 379. Wheels in marching take ])lace in changes of direction in 
 column, as often as this movement is executed to the side opposite 
 to the guide. 
 
 380. In wheels from a halt, the pivot-man only turns in his 
 place, without advancing or receding. 
 
 381. In the wheels in marching, the pivot takes steps of nine or 
 eleven inches, according as the squad is marching in quick or 
 double quick time, so as to clear the wheeling point, which is 
 necessary, in order that the subdivisions of a column may change 
 direction without losing their distances, as will be exj^lained in 
 the school of the company. 
 
 382. The man on the wheeling flank will take the full step of 
 twenty-eight inches, or thirty -three inches, according to the gait. 
 
 Wheeling from a halt, or on a fixed pivot. 
 
 383. The rank being at a halt, the instructor will place a well- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER, 41 
 
 instructed man on the wheolinf^ flank to condiiet it. and thon 
 command : 
 
 1. By squad, right wheel. 2. March. 
 
 384. At the second command, the rank will stop oil' with the 
 left foot, turning at the same time the head a little to the left, the 
 eyes fixed on the line of the ej-os of the men to their loll; the 
 pivot-man will merely mark time in gradually turning his body, 
 in order to conform himself to the movement of the marching 
 flank; the man Avho conducts this flank will take steps of twenty- 
 eight inches, and from the iirst step advance a little the left 
 shoulder, cast his eyes from time to time along the rank and feel 
 constantly the elbow of the next man lightlj', but never push him. 
 
 385. The other man will feel lightly the elbow of the next man 
 towards the pivot, resist pressure coming from the opposite side, 
 and each will conform himself to the marching flank — shortening 
 his step according to his approximation to the i)ivot. 
 
 38G. The instructor will make the rank wheel round the circle 
 once or twice before halting, in order to cause the principles to be 
 the better understood, and he will be watchful that the center 
 does not break. 
 
 387. lie will cause the wheel to the left to be executed according 
 to the same principles. 
 
 388. When the instructor shall Avish to arrest the wheel, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. Squad. 2. Halt. 
 
 3»'». At the f-ocond command, the rank will halt, and no man 
 stir. The instructor, going to the flank opposite the pivot, will 
 place the two outer men of that flank in the direction he may wish 
 to give to the rank, without however displacing the pivot; who 
 will conform the line of his shoulders to this direction. The 
 instructor will take care to have between these two men, and the 
 pivot, only the space necessary to contain the other men. He will 
 then command : 
 
 Left (or right) — Dress. 
 
 300. At this, tlic rank will place itself on the alignment of the 
 two men established as the ba,sis, in conformity with the principles 
 prescribed. 
 
 391. The instructor will next c<^;mmand Front, which will be 
 executed as prescribed No. 314. 
 
 Rrmarks: on the principles of the xrhcd from a halt. 
 
 392. Turn a little the head towards the marching flank, and fix the 
 eyes, on the live of the eyes of the men who are on that side ; 
 
 Because, othorwiso, it would be impossible for each man to reg- 
 ulate the length of his st<^ji so as to conform his own movement to 
 that of the marching flank. 
 
 Touch lightly the clboxc of the ne.vt man towards the pivot ; 
 
 In order that the filee may not open out in the wheel. 
 
42 SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 Resist pressure that comes from the side of the marching flank ; 
 
 Because, if this i)i-inciplo be neglected, the pivot, which ought 
 to be a fixed point, in wheels from a halt, might be pushed out of 
 its place by pressure. 
 
 Wheeling in marching, or on a movable pivot. 
 
 393. When the recruits have been taught to execute well the 
 wheel from a halt, they will be taught to wheel in marching. 
 
 39-4. To this end, the rank being in march, when the instructor 
 shall wish to cause it to change direction to the reverse flank, (to 
 the side opposite to the guide or pivot flank,) he will command : 
 
 1. Bight (or left) wheel. 2. March. 
 
 395. The first command will be given when the rank is yet four 
 paces from the wheeling f)oint. 
 
 396. At the second command, the wheel will be executed in the 
 same manner as fi'om a halt, except that the touch of the elbow 
 will remain towards the marching flank (or side of the guide) 
 instead of the side of the actual pivot; that the pivot man, instead 
 of merely turning in his place, will conform himself to the move- 
 ment of the marching flank, feel lightly the elbow of the next 
 man, take steps of full nine inches, and thus gain ground forward 
 in describing a small curve so as to clear the point of the wheel. 
 The middle of the rank will bend slightly to the rear. As soon as 
 the movement shall commence, the man who conducts the march- 
 ing flank will cast his eyes on the ground over which he will have 
 to pass. 
 
 397. The wheel being ended, the instructor will command : 
 
 '"'' 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 398. The first command will bo pronounced when four paces are 
 yet required to complete the change of direction. 
 
 399. At the command'march, which will be given at the instant 
 of completing the wheel, the man who conducts the marching 
 flank wmII direct himself straight forwai'd ; the pivot-man and all 
 the rank will retake the stej) of twenty-eight inches, and bring 
 the head direct to the front. 
 
 Turning, or change of direction to the side of the guide. 
 
 400. The change of direction to the side of the guide; in march- 
 ing, will be executed as follows : The instructor will command : 
 
 1. Left (or right) turn. 2. March. 
 
 401. The first command will be given when the rank is yet four 
 paces from the turning point. 
 
 402. At the command march, to be pronounced at the instant the 
 rank ought to turn, the guide will face to the left (or right) in 
 marching, and move forward in the new direction without slack- 
 ening or quickening the cadence, and without shortening or 
 lengthening the step. The whole rank will promptly conform 
 
SCH06t, OF THK SOLDIER. 43 i 
 
 itself to tho now diivction ; to effoct which, each man will advance 
 the shoulder oppoHit<> to the jjfuide, take the double quick step, to 
 Ciirrj himHclf ii) the new direction, turn the head and eyc>8 to the 
 side of the guide, and retake the touch of tho elbow on that.Hido, 
 in placinc^ himself on the aliirnment of the f^uide, from whom be 
 will take the step, and then resume the direct position of the head. 
 Each man will thus arrive Hiujcessivel}' on the aliujnment. 
 
 Wheeling and changing direction to the. side of the guide, in double 
 
 quick time. 
 
 403. When the reci-uits comprehend and execute well, in quick 
 time, the wheels at a halt and in marching, and the change of 
 direction to the side ol' the guide, the inntructor will cause the 
 same movements to be repeated in double quick time. 
 
 404. These various movements will be executed by the same 
 commands and according to the same principles as in quick time, 
 except that the command double quick will precede that of march. 
 In wheeling while marching, the pivot man will take Hteps of 
 eloven inches, and in the changes of direction to the side of the 
 guide, the men on the side opposite the guide must increase the 
 gait in order to bring themselves into line. 
 
 405. The instructor, in order not to fatigue the recruits, and not 
 to divide their attention, will cause them to execute the several 
 movements of which this lesson is composed, first without arms, 
 and next, after the mechanism be well comprehended, with arms. 
 
 liEssoN V. — Long marches in double quick time and the run. 
 
 406. Tho infrtpwctor will cause to bo resumed tho exerciBcs in 
 double quick time and the run, with arms and knapsacks. 
 
 407. He will cause long marches to be execute<l in double quick 
 time, boih b)^ the front and by the flank, and by constant i)ractice 
 will lead the men t-o ])as8 over a distance of live miles in sixty min- 
 utoe. Th6 pieces will be carried on either shoulder, and sometimes 
 at a trail. 
 
 408. Ho will also exercise them in long marches at a run, the 
 pioco« carried at will; tho men will be instructerl tokeepH.s imited 
 RH po«*it>lo, without however exacting much regularity, which is 
 impracticable. 
 
 409. The run, in actual service, will only be resorted to when it 
 may bo highly important to reach a given point with great prompt- 
 itude. 
 
 To stack arms. 
 
 The men being at order arms, the instructor will command : 
 Stack — Arms. 
 
 410. At this command the front rank man of every even num- 
 bered file will pass bis piece before him, seizing it with the left 
 hand near the upper band ; will plac^ the butt a little in advance 
 of his left toe, the barrel turned towards the body, and draw tho 
 rammer slightly from its place ; tho front rank man of every odd 
 
44 SCHOOL OF THE 80LDIER. 
 
 numbered file will also draw the rammer slightly, and pass his 
 piece to the man next on his left, who will seize it with the right 
 hand near the upper baud, and place the butt a little in ad- 
 vance of the right toe of the man next on his right, the barrel 
 turned to the front ; he will then cross the rammers of the two 
 pieces, the rammer of the piece of the odd numbered man being 
 inside ; the rear rank man of every even file will also draw his 
 rammer, lean his piece forward, the lock plate downwards, advance 
 the right foot about six inches, and insert the rammer between the 
 rammer and barrel of the piece of his front rank man ; with his 
 left hand he will place the butt of his piece on the ground, thirty- 
 two inches in rear of, and perpendicular to, the front rank, bring- 
 ing back his right foot by the side of the left ; the front rank man 
 of every even file will at the same time lean the stack to the rear, 
 quit it with his right hand, and force all the rammers down. The 
 stack being thus formed, the rear rank man of every odd file will 
 pass his piece into his left hand, the bai'rel to the front, and inclin- 
 ing it forward, will rest it on the stack. 
 
 411. The men of both ranks having taken the position of the 
 soldier without arms, the instructor will command : 
 
 1 . Break ranks. 2. March. 
 
 To resume arms. 
 
 412. Both ranks being re-formed in rear of their stacks, the in- ' 
 structor will command : 
 
 Take — Arms. 
 
 413. At this command the rear rank man of every odd numbered 
 file will withdraw his piece from the stack ; the front rank man of 
 every even file Avill seize his own piece with the left hand and that 
 of the man on his right with his right hand, both above the lower 
 band ; the rear rank man of the even file will seize his piece with 
 the right hand below the lower band ; these two men will raise up 
 the stack to loosen the rammers ; the front rank man of every odd 
 file will facilitate the disengagement of the rammers, if necessary, 
 by drawing them out slightly with the left hand, and will receive 
 his piece from the hand of the man next on his left ; the four men 
 will retake the position of the soldier at order arms. 
 
 END OF THE SCHOOL OF THE POLIjIKK, 
 
TTTLK THIRD 
 
 SCnOOL OV THE COMPANY. 
 
 (rener<il RyJes and Divi-vott of the School of th^ Company. 
 
 1. Instruction by company will always precede that by batta- 
 lion, and the object being to prepare the soldiers for the higher 
 school, the exercises of detail by co'nj)any will be strictly adhered 
 to, as well in rt*si)eot to principles, as the order of pi'ogresKion heroin 
 prescribed. 
 
 2. There will bo attached to a company undergoing elementary 
 instruction, a captain, a covering sergeant, and a certain number 
 of file cIosiTS, the whole posted in the manner indicated, Title 
 First, and, according to the same Title, the officer charged with 
 the cxvmHO of tiucli company will herein be denojninated the in- 
 structor. 
 
 3. The School of the- Company will l)o divided into six lessons, 
 and Cxioh k^«on will comprehend five artick*, as follows : 
 
 T.IM'SnN- I. 
 
 1. To open ranks. 
 
 2. AHgr)mentfl in open rMnks. 
 
 3. Manual of arms. 
 
 4. To closi: ranks. 
 
 5. Alignments, and manual of arms in ch>Hed ranks. 
 
 Li>>.S<>> II. 
 
 1. To load in tour timcv* and nt will. 
 
 2. To fire l>y eonipany 
 
 3. To fire by file. 
 
 4. To fire by rank. 
 
 ") To fir*^' '>v tlif> rofir rnnk. 
 
 ].VSh'f>'S MI. 
 
 I To inarcli in line of battle. 
 
 2. To halt the eonipany inarehing in line of battle,and to allign it. 
 
 3. C)l)li(pie march in line of battle. 
 
 4. To mark timf, in marcli in double (piick time, and the baek 
 step. 
 
 F) To m.'irrli in ritr>>it in line of battl'V 
 
 ,J-XHON IV. 
 
 1. To rniircli bv iIk- llank. 
 
 2. To change diri*rtion by file. 
 
 .3. To halt tho eorapany marcliing by the flank, and to fecc it to 
 thf^ front. 
 
46 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 4. Tlie company being in march by the flank, to foi-ra it on the 
 right or left by file into line of battle. 
 
 5. The company marching by tlie flank, to form it by company 
 or platoon into line, and cauec it to face to the right and left in 
 marching. 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 1. To break into column by platoon either at a halt or while 
 marching. 
 
 2. To march in column. 
 
 3. To change direction. 
 
 4. To halt the column. 
 
 5. Being in column by platoon, to form to the right or left into 
 line of battle, either at a halt or marching. 
 
 LESSON VL 
 
 1. To break into platoons, and to re-form the company. 
 
 2. To bx'eak files to the rear, and to cause them to re-enter into 
 line. 
 
 3. To march in column in route, and to execute, the movements 
 incident thereto. 
 
 4. Countermarch. 
 
 5. Being in column by platoon, to form on the right or left into 
 line of battle. 
 
 4. The comj)any will always be formed in two ranks. The in- 
 structor will then cause the files to be numbered, and for this pur- 
 pose will command : 
 
 In each rank — Count Twos. 
 
 5. At this command, the men count in each rank, from right to 
 left, pronouncing in a loud and distinct voice, in the same tone, 
 without hurry and without turning the head, one, tioo, according to 
 the place which each one occupies, lie will also cause the com- 
 pany to be divided into platoons and sections, taking care that the 
 first platoon is always composed of an even number of files. 
 
 6. The instructor will be as clear and concise as possible in his 
 explanations ; he will cause faults of detail to be rectified by the 
 captain, to whom he will indicate them, if the captain should not 
 haveliimsclf observed them; and the instructor will not otherwise 
 interfere, unless the captain should not well comprehend, or should 
 badly execute his intentions. • 
 
 7. Composure, or ])resence of mind, in him Avho commands, and 
 in those who obo}^ being the first means of order iji a body of 
 troops, the instructor will labor to habituate the company to this 
 essential quality, and will himself give the example. 
 
 LESSON FIEST. 
 Artfolk First. — To open ra7}ks. 
 
 ®* 8. The company being at ordered arms, the rank and file closers 
 well aligned, when the instructor shall vf'mh to cause the ranks to 
 
SCHOOL OF THK COMPANY. . ^ 47 
 
 be opened, lie will direct the left guide to place HtmHcrf on the left 
 of the front rank, which heing executed, he will oonunand : 
 
 1. Atteiition. 2. Company. 3. Shoulder — Amrs. 4. To the rear 
 
 open order. 
 
 9. At the fourth command, the covering sergeant, and the left 
 guide, will step off smartly to the rear, four paces from the front 
 rank, in order to mark the alignment of the rear rank. They will 
 judge this distance by the eye, without counting the steps. 
 
 10. The instructor will place himself at the same time on the 
 right flank, in order to observe, if these two non-commissioned 
 oflScers are on a line parallel to the front rank, and if necessary, to 
 correct their positions, which being executed, he will command: 
 
 5. March. 
 
 11. At this command, the front rank will stand fast. 
 
 12. The rear rank will step to the rear, without counting the 
 steps, and will pla(;e themselves on the alignment marked for this 
 rank, conforming to what is prescribed in the school of the soldier, 
 No. 321. 
 
 13. The covering s(^rgeant will align the rear rank on the left 
 guide placed to mark the left of this rank. 
 
 14. The file closers will march to the rear at the same time with 
 the rear hank, and will place themselves two jiacen fi-()m this rank 
 when it is aligned. 
 
 15. The instructor seeing the rear rank aligned, will command: 
 
 (). Front. 
 
 16. At this command, the sergeant on the left of the rear rank 
 will return to his place as a file closer. 
 
 17. The rear rank being alignefl, the instructor will direct the 
 captain and the covering sergeant to observe the men in their re- 
 spective ranks, and to correct, if necessary, the positions of persons 
 and pieees. 
 
 AnTiri.K Skconp. — Alignment.'^ in open ranks. 
 
 18. The ranks being o))en, the instructor will, in the first exer- 
 cises, align the ranks, man by man, the better to inculcato the 
 principles. 
 
 19. To effect this, he will cause two or four men on the right or 
 left of eaeh rank to murch two or three paces forward, and, after 
 Ijaving aligned them, command : 
 
 Jiy §lc right (or left) — Dress. 
 
 20. v\t this, the men of enc;h mnk will move up wicocssively on 
 the alignment, each man being preceded by his ni'ighbor in the 
 name rank, towards the basis, by twf) ]»ac.cs, and having correctly 
 alignc(i himself, will east his eye* to the front. 
 
 21. Sii(ee>Hive silignmcnl-'* havitig habituated the eoUJicrs to 
 
48 SCHOOJ. OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 dress correctly, the instructor will cause the ranks to align them- 
 selves at once, forwai-d and backward, sometimes in a direction 
 parallel, and Bometimes in one oblique, to the original dii'ection, 
 giving, in each case, two or four men to serve as a basis of align- 
 ment to each rank. To effect which, he will command : 
 
 ]. Bight (or left) — Dress. 2. Fron-i;.,!, j^.^ ^> 
 
 Or, : -i ''■// .'»f)iiiv 
 
 i. Jiight (or left) backward — Drebs^ ,2. Front. '■"';■ 
 
 22. In oblique alignments, in opened ranks, the men of the rear 
 rank will not seek to cover their file leaders, as the sole objiect of 
 
 > the exercise is to teach them to align themselves correctly in their 
 respective ranks, in the different directions. 
 
 23. In the several alignments, the captain will superintend the 
 front rank, and the covering sergeant the rear rank. For this pur- 
 pose, they will place themselves on the side by which the ranks 
 are dressed. 
 
 24. In oblique alignments, the men will conform the line of their 
 shoulders to the new direction of their rank, and will place them- 
 selves on the alignment as has been prescribed in the School of the 
 Soldier, No. 317 or No. 321, according as the new direction shall 
 be in front or rear of the original one. 
 
 25. At the end of each alignment, the captain and the covering 
 sergeant will pass along the front of the ranlcs. to correct the posi- 
 tions of persona and arms. 'iijiilij i- 
 
 Article Third. — Manual ofaiiris. 
 
 26. The ranks being open, the instructor will place himself in a 
 position to see the ranks, and will command the manual of arms 
 in the following order : 
 
 Present arms. (then) Shoulder arms. 
 Order arms. 
 Ground arms. 
 
 Raise anns. Shoulder armB. 
 
 Support arms. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Fi.v bayonet. Shoulder anr^. 
 
 Charge bayonet. Shoxdder arms. 
 
 Trail arms. Shoidder arms. 
 
 UnjLc bayonet. ShouMer aiins. 
 
 Secure arms. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Load in nine times. 
 
 27. The instructor will t^ike wire that the position of the body, 
 of the feet^ and of the piec-e, be always exact, and that the times 
 be briskly executed and close to the person. 
 
 '' - ' "' Article Fourth. — To clo-^e ranks. 
 
 28. The manual of arms being ended, the instructor will com- 
 m.and : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 49 
 
 1. Close order. 2. March. 
 
 29. At the command march, the rear rank will cTose up in quick 
 time, each man directing himself on hi.s file leader. 
 
 Article V. — Alignments, and manual of arms in closed ranks. 
 
 30. The ranks being closed, the instructor will cause to be exe- 
 cuted parallel and oblique alignments by the right and left, forward 
 and backward, observing to place alwa^'s two or four files to serve 
 aH a l>asis of alignment. He will give the commands prescribed, 
 No. 21. 
 
 31. In alignments in closed ranks, the captain will superintend 
 the front rank, and the covering sergeant the rear rank. They 
 will habituate themselves to judge the alignment by the lines of 
 the eyes and shoulders, in casting a glance of the eye along the 
 front and rear of the ranks. 
 
 32. The moment the captain perceives the greaternumber of the 
 front rank aligned, he will command Front, and rectify, after- 
 wards, if necessary, the alignment of the other men by the means 
 prescribed in the School of the Soldier, No. 320. The rear rank 
 will conform to the alignment of the front rank, superint<;nded by 
 the covering sergeant. 
 
 33. The ranks being steady, the instructor will place him.self on 
 t% flank to verify their alignment. He will also see that each 
 rear rank man covers accurately his file leader. 
 
 34. In oblique alignments, the instructor will observe what is 
 prcHcribed No. 24. 
 
 35. In all alignments, the file closers will preserve the distance 
 of two paces from the rear rank. 
 
 36. The alignments being ended, the instructor will cause to bo 
 fc.vocuted the manual of arms. 
 
 37. The instructor, wishing to rest the men, without deranging 
 the alignment, will first cause arras to be supported, or ordered, 
 and then command : 
 
 In place — Rkst. 
 
 38. At this command, the men will no longer be constrained to 
 proflcrve silence or steadiness of position ; but they will always 
 keep one or other heel on the alignment. 
 
 31>. If on the contrary, the instructor should wish to rest the 
 men without constraining them to ])rescrve the alignment, ho 
 will command : 
 
 TIkst. 
 
 40. At which command, the men will not be required to pre- 
 hervo immobility, or to remain in their places. 
 
 41. the instructor may, also, when he shall Judge proper, cause 
 arms to be stacked, which will be executed as proscribed, school of 
 the ^oldier. 
 
 LEHRON II. 
 
 42. The inptruotor, wishing to pafs to the oeoond leewjn, will 
 
 4 
 
50 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 cause the company to take arms, if stacks have been formed, and 
 command : 
 
 1. Attention 2. Company. 3. Shoulder — Arms. 
 
 43. The instructor will then cause loadings and firings to bo ex- 
 ecuted in the following order : 
 
 Article I. — To load at four times and at will. 
 
 44. Loading in four times will be commanded and executed as 
 prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 251, and following. 
 The instructor will cause this exercise to be often repeated, in suc- 
 cession, before passing to load at will. 
 
 45. Loading at will will be commanded and executed as pre- 
 scribed in the" school for the soldier, No. 256. In priming when 
 loading in four times, and also at will, the captain and covering ser- 
 geant will half face to the right with the men, and face to the front 
 when the man next to them, respectively, brings his piece to the 
 shoulder. 
 
 46. The''instructor will labor to the utmost to cause the men, in 
 the different loadings, to execute what has been prescribed in the 
 school of the soldier, Nos. 257 and 258. 
 
 47. Loading at will, being that of battle, and consequently the 
 one with w'hich it is most impox'tant to render the men famil- 
 iar, it will claim preference in the exercises the moment the ftien 
 bo well established in the principles. To these they will be brought 
 by degrees, so that every man may be able to load with cartridges 
 and to fire at least three rounds in a minute with case and regu- 
 larity. 
 
 Artcle II.— 7 fire by Compjany. 
 
 48. The instructor, wishing to cause the fire by company to be 
 execut^ed, will command : 
 
 1. Fire by Company. 2. Comynence firing. 
 
 49. At the first command, the captain will promptly place him- 
 self opposite the center of his company, and four paces in rear of 
 the lino of file closers : the covering sergeant will retire to that 
 line, and place himself opposite to his interval. 2'his rule is gen- 
 eral, for both the captain and covering sergeant, in all the different 
 firings. 
 
 50. At the second command, the captain will add: 1. Company ; 
 2. Eeady ; 3. Aim ; 4. Fire ; 5. Load. 
 
 51. At the command ^oa^/, the men will load their pirces, and 
 then take the position ready, as pre-scribed in the school of the 
 soldier. 
 
 52. The captain will imm(«ditttely rocommcnce the firing, by the 
 commands : 
 
 1. Company. 2. Aim. 3. Fire. 4. Loai). 
 
 53. The firing will ]>o thus continued until the signal to cease 
 firing is sounded. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE GOMPANY. 51 
 
 "54. The captain will sometimes cause aim to be taken to the 
 right and lofl, simply observing to pronounce right (or left) oblique, 
 before the command aiwi. 
 
 Article III. — The fire by file. 
 
 55. The instructor wishii^ to cause the fire by file to be execu- 
 ted, will command : 
 
 1. Fire by file. 2. Company. 3. Rkadt. 4. Commence firing. 
 
 56. The third and fourth commands will be executed as pre- 
 scribed in the school of the soldier, No. 275 and following. 
 
 57. The fire will be commenced by the right file of the company; 
 the next file will take aim at theinstant thefirst brings down pieces 
 to re-load, and so on to the left; but this progression will only be 
 observed in the first discharge, after which each man will ro-load 
 and fire without regulating himself by others, conforming himself 
 to what is prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 280. 
 
 Article IV. — The fire by rank. 
 
 58. The instructor wishing the fire by rank to be executed, will 
 command : 
 
 1. Fire by rank. 2. Company. 3. Eeadt. 4. 7?mr Jiank — Aim. 
 ^ 5. Fire. 6. Load. 
 
 59. The fifth and sixth commands will bo execute^ as is pre- 
 scribed in the school of the soldier, No. 285 and following. 
 
 60. When the instructor sees one or two pieces in the rear rank 
 at a ready, he will command : 
 
 1. Front Ran/;. 2. Aim. :',. Firk. 4. Loah. 
 
 61. The firing will be continued thus by alternate ranks, until 
 the signal is given to cease firing. 
 
 62. The instructor will sometimes cau.se aim to be taken to the 
 right and left, conforming to what is prescribed No. 54. 
 
 63. The instructor will c^iuse the firing to cease, whether by com- 
 pany, by file, or by rank, by sounding the signal to cease firing, 
 and at the instant this sound commences, the men will cease to fire, 
 conforming to what is prescribed in the school of the soldier. No. 
 282. 
 
 64. The signal to c<!a«e firing will always be followed by a l)uglo 
 note ; at which f*ound. the captain and cfivoring sergeant will 
 prr>niptly resume their placos in line, an<l will rectify, if nccwtsary, 
 the alignment of the ranks. 
 
 65. In this school, except when i>owder in u(«ed, the signal to 
 oc'ise firing will bo in<iicALed by the command cca.'<e firing, which 
 will be i)roiiounced by the instructor when he wishes the sem- 
 blance of firing to coa*»e. 
 
 66. The command po.si-'\ will be likewise substituted, under sim- 
 ilar circumstances, for the bugle note cmj)loyed as the signal for the 
 return of the captain and covering sergeant to their placos in 
 
62 SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY. 
 
 line, which command will be given when the instructor sees the 
 men have brought their pieces to a shoulder. 
 
 67. The fire by file being that which is most frequently used 
 against an enemy, it is highly important that it be rendered per- 
 fectly familiar to the troops. The instructor will, therefore, give 
 it almost exclusive preference, and labor to cause the men to aim 
 with care, and always, if possible, at some particular object. As 
 it is of the utmost importance that the men should aim with preci- 
 sion in battle, this principle will be rigidly enforced in the exercises 
 for the purposes of instruction. 
 
 Article V. — To Fire by the rear rank. 
 
 68. The instructor will cause the several fires to be executed ta 
 the rear, that is, by the rear rank. To effect this, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. Face by the rear rank. 2. Company. 3. About — Face. 
 
 69. At the first command, the captain will step out and place 
 himself near to, and facing the right file of his company ; the 
 covering sergeant, and file closers, will pass quickly througli the 
 captain's interval, and place themselves faced to the rear, the 
 covering sergeant a pace behind the captain, and the file closers 
 two paces from the front rank opposite to their places in line, each 
 passing behind the covering sergeant. ' 
 
 70. At the third command, which will be given at the instant 
 the last file closer shall have passed through the interval, the 
 company will face about; the captain will place himself in his 
 interval in the rear rank, now become the front, and the covering 
 sergeant will cover him in the front rank, now become the rear. 
 
 71. The company having faced by the rear rank, the instructor 
 will cause it to execute the fire by company, both direct and 
 oblique, the fire by file, and the fire by rank, by the commands 
 and means prescribed in the three preceding articles ; the captain, 
 covering sergeant, and the men will conform themselves, in like 
 manner, to what is therein prescribed. 
 
 72. The fire by file will commence on the left of the company, 
 now become the right. In the fire by rank, the firing Avill com- 
 mence with the front rank, now become the rear. 
 
 73. To resume the proper front, the instructor will command : 
 
 1. Face by the front rank. 2. Company. 3. About — Face. 
 
 74. At the first command, the captain covering sergeant and file 
 closers will conform to what is proscribed Nos. 60 and 70. 
 
 75. At the third command, the company having faced about, the 
 captain and covering sergeant will resume their places in line. 
 
 76. In this lesson, the instructor will impress on the men the 
 importance of aiming always at some particular object, and of 
 holding the piece as prescribed irf'the school of the soldier, No. 
 
 178. 
 
 77. The instructor will recommend to the captain to make a 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 63 
 
 short pause between the commanda aim and /ire, to give the men 
 time to aim with accuracy. 
 
 78. The inHtructor will place himself in position to see the two 
 ranks, in order to detect faults ; he will charge the captain arid file 
 closers to be equally watchful, and to report to him when the ranka 
 are at rest. He will remand, for individual instruction, the men 
 who may be observed to load badly. 
 
 79. The instructor will recommend to the soldiers, in the firings, 
 the highest degree of composure or presence of mind; he will 
 neglect nothing that may contribute to this end. 
 
 80. He will give to the men, as a general principle, to maintain, 
 in the direct fire, the left heel in its place, in order that the align- 
 ment of the ranks and files may not be deranged ; and ho will 
 verify, by examination, after each exei'cise in firing, the observ- 
 ance of this principle. 
 
 81. The instructor will observe, in addition to these remarks, all 
 those which follow. 
 
 82. When the firing is executed with cartridges, it is particularly 
 recommended that the men observe, in uncocking, whether smoke 
 escapes from the tube, which is a certain indication that the piece 
 has been discharged ; but if, on the contrary, no smoke escapee, 
 the soldier, in such case, instead of reloading, will pick and prime 
 again. If. believing the load to be discharged, the soldier should 
 put a second cartridge in his piece, he ought, at least, to perceive 
 it in ramming, bj' the hight of the load ; and he would bo very- 
 culpable should he put in a third. The instructor will always 
 cause arms to be inspected after firing with cartridges, in order to 
 observe if the fault has been committed, of putting three car- 
 tridges, without a discharge, in the same piece, in wliich case the 
 ball screw will be applied. 
 
 83. It sometimes happens when a cap has missed fire, that the 
 tube is found stopped up with a hard, white, and compact powder; 
 in this case, picking will be dispensed with, and a new' cap substi- 
 tuted for the old one. 
 
 LESSON THIRD. 
 
 Akticlk I. — To advance in line of battle. 
 
 84. The company being in line of battle, and correctly aligned, 
 ■when the instructor shall wish to exercise it in marching by the 
 front, he will assure himself that the shoulders of the captain and 
 covering sergeant are perfectly in the direction f)f their respective 
 ranks, and that the sergeant accurately covers the captain ; the 
 instructor will then place himself twenty-five or thirty paces in 
 front of them, face to the rear, and place liimself exactly on the 
 prolongation of the line passing between tlteir heels. 
 
 85. The instructor, being aligned on th' 'lir<rting file, will 
 command : 
 
 % 1. Company, foricard. 
 
 86. At thin, a Aergoant, previously designated, will move six 
 
54 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 paces in advance of the captain : the instructor, from the position 
 prescribed, will correctly align this sergeant on the prolongation 
 of the directing file. 
 
 87. 'This advanced sergeant, who is to be charged with the 
 direction, will, the moment his position is assured, take two points 
 on the ground in the sti*aight line which Avould pass between his 
 own and the heels of the instructor. 
 
 88. These dispositions being made, the instructor will step aside, 
 and command : 
 
 2. March. 
 
 89. At this, the company Avill step off with life. The directing 
 sergeant will observe, with the greatest precision, the length and 
 cadence of the step, marching on the two points he has chosen ; he 
 will take in succession, and always a little before arriving at the 
 point nearest to him, new points in advance, exactly in the same 
 line with the first two, and at the distance of some fifteen or 
 twenty paces from each other. The captain will march steadily 
 in the trace of the directing sergeant, keeping always six paces 
 from him ; the men will each maintain the head direct to the front, 
 feel lightly the elbow of his neighbor on the side of direction, and 
 conform himself to the principles, school of the soldier, for the 
 march by front. 
 
 90. The man next to the captain will take special care not to 
 pass him ; to this end, he will keep the line of his shoulders a little 
 in the rear, but in the same direction with those of the captain. 
 
 91. The file closers will march at the habitual distance of two 
 paces behind the rear rank. 
 
 92. If the men lose the step, the instructor will command : 
 
 To the— Step. 
 
 93. At this command, the men will glance towards the directing 
 sergeant, retake the step from him, and again direct their eyes to 
 the front. 
 
 94. The instructor will cause the captain and covering sergeant 
 to be posted sometimes on the right, and sometimes on the left of 
 the company. 
 
 95. The directing sergeant, in advance, having the greatest 
 influence on the march of the company, he will be selected for the 
 precision of his step, his habit of maintaining his shoulders in a 
 square with a given line of direction, and of prolonging that line 
 without variation. 
 
 96. If this sergeant should fail to observe these princij^les, undu- 
 lations in the front of the company must necessarily follow ; the 
 men will be unable to eonti-aet the habit of taking steps equal in 
 length and swiftness, and of maintaining their shoulders in a 
 square with the line of direction — the only means of attaining 
 perfection in the mai'ch in line. 
 
 97. The instructor, with a view the better 1» establish the men 
 in the length and cadence of the step, and in the principles of the 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 5^ 
 
 inarch in line, will cause the company to advance three or four 
 hundred paccH, at once, without halting, if the ground will permit. 
 In the first exercises, he Avill inarch the company with open ranks, 
 the better to observe the two rankn. 
 
 98. The instructor will see, with care, that all the principles of 
 the march in line arc strictly observed ; he will generally be on 
 the directing flank, in a position to observe the two ranks, and the 
 faults they may commit; he will sometimes hjilt behind the direct-', 
 iug file during some thirty successive steps, in oi"der to judge' 
 whether the directing sergeant, or the directing file, deviate fvotii^ 
 the perpendicular. 
 
 Article II. — To halt the company, marching in line of battle^ and 
 
 to align it. 
 
 W. The instructor, wishing to halt the company, will command : 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 
 
 100. At the second command, the company will halt; the direct- 
 ing sergeant will remain in advance, unless ordered to return to 
 the line of file closers. The compan}' being at a halt, the instruct- 
 or may advance the first three or four files on the side of direc- 
 tion, and align the comjiany on that basis, or he may confine him-*" 
 self to causing the alignment to be rectified. In this last case, he 
 will command : Capfaiyi, rectify the alignment. The captain will 
 direct the covering sergeant to attend to the rear rank, when 
 each, glancing his eyes along liis rank, will promptl}' rectiry it, 
 conforming to what is prescribed in the school of the soldier. No. 
 320. 
 
 Article III. — Obliqui: march in line of battle.) 
 
 101. The company being in the direct march, when the instruct- 
 or shall wish to cause it to march obliquely, he will command : 
 
 1. Right (or left) oblique. 2. March. 
 
 102. At tho command inarch, the company will take the oblique 
 step. The men will accurately observe the principles prescribed 
 in the school of the soldier, No. .^,;}1. The rear rank men will pre- 
 serve their distances, and march in rear of the man next on the 
 right (or left) of their habitual file leaders. 
 
 103. When the instructor wishes the din-et »n;ire}i t'> bo iv^umcd, 
 he will command: 
 
 1. Foruard. 2. Mak< n. 
 
 104. At the command mnrch, the company will resume the direct 
 march. The instructor will move briskly twenty paces in front of 
 the captain, and facing the company, will place himself exactly in 
 the prolongation of the captain and covering sergeant; and then, 
 by a sign, will move the directing sergeant on the same line, if h« 
 be not already on it; the latter will immediately take two point%| 
 on the ground between himself and the instructor, and as he ad- 
 vancoft, will take new points of direction, as is explained 2^0. 89- 
 
s^' 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 105. In the oblique march, the men not having the tonch of el- 
 bows, the guide will aways be on the side toward which the oblique 
 is made, without an}"^ indication to that effect being given ; and when 
 the direct march is resumed, the guide will be, equally without 
 indication, on the side w^iei-e it was previous to the oblique. 
 
 106. The instructor will, at first, cause the oblique to be made 
 toward the side of the guide. He will also direct the captain to 
 have an eye on the directing sergeant, in order to keep on the same 
 perpendicular line to the front with him, while following a paral- 
 lel direction. 
 
 107. During the continuance of the march, the instructor will be 
 watchful that the men follow parallel directions, in conforming to 
 the principles prescribed in the school of the soldier, for preserv- 
 ing the general alignment ; whenever the men lose the alignment, 
 he will be careful that they regain it by lengthening or shortening 
 the step, without altering the cadence, or changing the direction. 
 
 108. The instructor will place himself in front of the company 
 and face to it, in order to regulate the march of the directing ser- 
 geant, or the man who is on the flank toward which the oblique is 
 made, and to see that the principles of the march are properly ob- 
 served, and that the files do not crowd. 
 
 Article IV. — To mark time, to march in double quick time, and the 
 
 back step. 
 
 109. The company being in the direct march, and in quick time, 
 the instructor, to cause it to mark time, will command : 
 
 1. Mark time. 2. March. 
 
 110. To resume the march, he will command : 
 
 1. Fonoard. 2. Makch. 
 
 111. To cause the march in double quick time, the instructor 
 will command : 
 
 1. Double quick. 2. March. 
 
 112. The command inarch will be pronounced at the instant either 
 foot is coming to the ground. 
 
 113. To resume quick time, the instructor will command : 
 
 1. Quick time. 2. March. 
 
 114. The command march will be pronounced at the instant 
 either foot is coming to the ground. 
 
 115. The company being at a halt, the instructor may cause it to 
 march in the back step ; to this effect, he will command : 
 
 1. Company backward. 2. March. 
 
 116. The back step will be executed according to the principles 
 prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 247, but the use of it 
 being rare, the instructor will not cause more than fifteen or twenty 
 steps to be taken in succession, and to that extent but seldom. 
 
 117. The instructor ought not to exercise the company in march- 
 
sc;hooj. of the company. 5f^' 
 
 ing in double quick time till the men are well established in the 
 length and pwiflncss of the pace in quick time; he will then en- 
 deavor to roiuler the march of one hniuired and eixty-fivo Bteps in 
 the minute equally easy and familiar, and also cause them to ob- 
 serve the same erectness of body and composure of mind, as if 
 marchinif in quick time. 
 
 118. When marching in double quick time, if a subdivision (in 
 a column) has to change direction by turning, or has to form into 
 line, the men will quicken the pace to one hundred and eighty steps 
 in a minute. The same swiftness of step will be observed under 
 all circumstances where great rapidity of movement is required. 
 But, as ranks of men cannot mai'ch any length of time at so swift 
 a rat<>, without breaking or confusion, this acceleration Avill not bo 
 considered a prescribed exercise, and accordingly companies or bat- 
 talions will only be habitually exercised in the double quick time 
 of one hundred and sixty -five steps in the minuto. 
 
 Articlk V. — To march in retreat. 
 
 119. The company being lialted and correctly aligned, when the 
 instructor shall wish to cause it to march in retreat, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Company. 2. About — Fack. 
 
 120. The company having faced to the rear, the instructor will 
 plac« himself in front of the directing file, conforming to what is 
 prescribed, No. 84. 
 
 121. The instructor, being correctly- established on the prolon- 
 gation of the directing file, will command : 
 
 3. Company, foricard. 
 
 122. At this, the directing sergeant will conform him.s«if to what 
 is prescribed Nos. 86 and 87, with this ditierence — he will place 
 himself six paces in front of the line of file closers, now leading. 
 
 123. The covering sergeant will step into the line of file closers, 
 opposite to his interval, and the captain will place himself in the 
 rear rank, now become the front. 
 
 124. This disposition being pi'omptly made, the instructor will 
 command : 
 
 4. March. 
 
 125. At this, the directing sergeant, the captain, and the men, 
 will conform themselves to what is prescribed No. 89, and following. 
 
 126. The instructor will cause to be executed, marching in re- 
 treat, all that is prescribe<l for marching in advance; the com- 
 mands and the means of execution will be the same. 
 
 127. The instructor having halted the company, will, when ho 
 may wish, cause it to fac« to the front by the commands prescribed 
 No. 119. The captain, th«! covering sergeant, and the directing 
 sergeant, will resume their habitual places in line, the moment thoy 
 shall have faced al>out. 
 
 128. The company being in march by the front rank, if the in- 
 
68 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 sti'uctor should wish to march in retreat, he will cause the right 
 about to be executed while marching, and to this effect will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Company. 2. JRiyht about. 3. March. 
 
 129. At the third command, the company will promptly faco 
 about, and recommence the march by the rear rank. 
 
 130. The directing sergeant will face about with the company^ 
 and will move rapidly six paces in front of the file closers, and 
 upon the prolongation of the guide. The instructor will place him 
 in the proper direction by the means prescribed No. 104. The 
 captain, the covering sergeant, and the men, will conform to the 
 principles prescribed for the march in retreat. 
 
 131. When the instructor wishes the company to march by the 
 front i-ank, he will give the same commands, and will regulate the 
 direction of the march by the same means. 
 
 132. The instructor will cause to be executed in double quick 
 time, all the movements prescribed in the 3d, 4th, 5th and 6th lea- 
 sons of this school, with the exception of the march backwards, 
 which will be executed only in quick time. He will give the same 
 commands, observing to add double quid< before the command 
 march. 
 
 133. When the pieces arc carried on the right shoulder, in quick 
 time, the distance between the ranks will be sixteen inches. AVhen- 
 ever, therefore, the instructor brings the comjjany from a shoulder 
 to this position, the rear rank must shorten a little the first steps 
 in order to gain the prescribed distance, and will lengthen the 
 steps, on the contrary, in order to close up when the pieces are 
 again brought to a shoulder. In marching in double quick time 
 
 he distance between the ranks will be twenty-six inches, and the 
 pieces will be carried habitually on the right shoulder. 
 
 134. Whenever a company is halted, the men will bring their 
 pieces at once to a shoulder at the command halt. The i-ear rank, 
 will close to its proper distance. These rules are general. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 59 
 
 i ( LESSON FOUETH. 
 
 Article I. — To march by the flank. 
 
 135. The company being in line of battle, and at a halt, when the 
 instructor shall wish to cause it to .march by the right flank, he 
 will command : 
 
 1. Company, ri{fht—FAc^. 2. Foricard. 3. March. 
 
 CD q: B E3 ;;^ □ cj 
 
 •od »a <n 
 
 136. At the first command, the company will face to the right, 
 the covering sergeant will place himself at the head of the front 
 rank, the captain having stepped out for the purpose, so far as to 
 find himself by the side of the sergeant, and on his left ; the front 
 rank will double as is prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 
 352 ; the rear rank will, at the same time, side step to the right one 
 pace, and double in the same manner; so that when the move- 
 ment is completed, the files will be formed of four men aligned, and 
 elbow to elbow. The intervals will bo preserved. 
 
 137. The file closers will also move by side step to the right, so 
 that when the ranks are formed, they will be two paces from the 
 rearmost rank. 
 
 138. At the command march, the company will move offbri.skly 
 in quick time ; the covering sergeant at the head of the front rank, 
 and the captain on his left, will march straight forward. Tho 
 men of each file will march abreast of their respective front rank 
 men, heads direct to tiie front ; the file closers will march ojtposite 
 their places in line of battle. 
 
 139. The instructor will cause the ))rincii)lcs of the march by 
 the flank to lie observed, in placing himself pending the march, as 
 prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 357. 
 
 140. The instructor will cause the march by the left flunk to be 
 executed by the same commands, substituting left for rigfU ; the 
 ranks will double as has been ]»rescribod in thc^cbool for the sol- 
 dier, No. 354 ; the rear rank will side-step to the left one pa^o bo- 
 fore doubling. 
 
 141. At the instant the company faces to the left, the left guide 
 will place himself at the head of the front rank ; the captain will 
 
60i' 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 pass rapidly to the left, and place himself by the right side of this 
 guide ; the covering sei-geant will replace the captain in the front 
 rank, the moment the latter quits it to go to the left. 
 
 Article II. — To change direction by file. 
 
 142. The company being faced by the flank, and either in march 
 or at a halt, when the instructor shall wish to cause it to wheel by 
 file, he will command : 
 
 1. By file ^ left, (or right). 2. March. 
 
 il3SEZEE3ZEE3:SECin2 
 
 pa DDfflD'DCE 
 y$>M B 151 PI 
 
 .<!r.i..i...i..l3...i-.-.i.- 
 
 D -^j m El 4J o 
 
 143. At the command march, the first file will wheel ; if to the 
 side of the front rank man, the latter will take care not to turn at 
 once, but to describe a short arc of a circle, shortening a little the 
 first five or six steps in order to give time to the fourth man of this 
 file to conform himself to the movement. If the wheel be to the 
 side of the rear rank, the front rank man will wheel in the step of 
 twenty-eight inches, and the fourth man will conform himself to 
 the movement by describing a short arc of a circle as has been ex- 
 plained. Each file will come to wheel on the same ground where 
 that which preceded it wheeled. 
 
 144. The instructor will see that the wheel be executed accord- 
 ing to these principles, in order that the distance between the files 
 may always be preserved, and that there be no check or hin- 
 drance at the wheeling point. 
 
 Article III. — To halt the company marching by the flank^ and to 
 face it to the front. 
 
 145. To effect these objects, the instructor will command: 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. .fjft jjj 
 
 146. The second and third commands will be executed as pre-" 
 scribed in the school of the soldier, Nos. 359 and 360. As soon as 
 the files have undoubled, the rear rank will close to its proper dis- 
 tance. The captain and covering sei'geant, as well as the left 
 guide, if the march be by the left flank, will return to their habit- 
 ual places in line at the instant the company faces to the front. 
 
 147. The instructor may then align the company by one of the 
 means prescribed, No. 100. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 61 
 
 Article IV. — The company hein^ in inarch by the jftank, to form 
 it on the right (or left) by file into line of battle. 
 
 148. If the company be marching by the i-ight flank, the 
 instructor will command : 
 
 1. On the right, by file into line. 2. March. 
 
 149. At the command march, the rear rank men doubled will 
 mark time ; the captain and the covering sergeant will turn to the 
 right, march straight forward, and be halted by the instructor 
 when they shall have passed at least six paces beyond the rank of 
 file closers, the captain will place himself correctly on the line of 
 battle, and will direct the alignment as the men of the front rank 
 successively arive; the covering sergeant will place himself behind 
 the Ciiptain at the distance of the rear rank ; the two men on the 
 right of the front rank doubled, will continue to march, and pass- 
 ing beyond the covering sergeant and the captain, will turn to the 
 right; after turning, they will contiinie to march elbow to elbow, 
 and direct themselves towards the line of battle, but when they 
 shall arrive at two paces from this line, the even number will 
 shorten the step so that the odd number may precede him on the 
 line, the odd number placing himself by the side and on the left 
 of the cajitain ; the even number will afterwards oblique to the 
 left,, and place himself on the left of the odd number; the next 
 two men of the front rank doubled, will pass in the same manner 
 behind the two fii'st, turn then to the right, and place themselves, 
 according to the means just explained, to the left, and by the side 
 of, the two men already established on the line; the remaining 
 files of this rank will follow in succession, and be formed to the 
 left in the same manner. The rear rank doubled will execute the 
 movement in the manner already explained for the front rank, 
 taking care not t^) commence the movement until four men of the 
 front rank aro established on the line of battle ; the rear rank 
 men, as they arrive on the line, will cover ac<;urately their file 
 leaders. 
 
 150. If the company be marching b}' the left flank, the in- 
 structor will cause it to form by file on the left into line of battle, 
 aoc-ording to the same principles and by the same commands, sub- 
 stituting the indication t-elffor rig/U. In this case, the odd numbers 
 will short<>n the step, so that the even numbei*s may jirecede them 
 on the line. The captain, placed on the left of the front rank, and 
 the left guide, will return to their places in line of battle, bv 
 order of the instructor, after the company' shall be Ibrmod and 
 abgnod. 
 
 151. To enable the men the better to comprehend themochanism 
 of this movement, the instnict/ir will at fii-st cause it to be executed 
 separately liy each rank doubled, and afterwards by the two ranks 
 
 • united and doubled. 
 
 $' \b2. The instructor will place himself on the lino of battle, and 
 without the point where the right or left is U) re^t. in order to 
 
rl^ 
 
 SGHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 establish the base of the alignment, and afterwards, he will follow 
 up the movement to assure himself that each file conforms itself 
 to what is jii'escribed No. 149. 
 
 Article Y. — The company being in march by the flank, to form 
 it by company, or by platoon, into line, and to cause it to face to the 
 right and left in marching. 
 153. The company being in march by the right flank, the 
 
 instructor will order the captain to form it into line ; the captain 
 
 will immediately command : 
 
 1. By compaixy, into line. 2. March. 
 
 /'•;0iT.i.^.i...- 
 
 
 /^/ / / / / / / , ^-FSI- 
 
 //////////y ffl" 
 /////////// ^ 
 
 «K] 
 
 
 154. At the command march, the covering sergeant will continue 
 to march straight forward ; the men will advance the right shoul- 
 der, take the double quick step, and move into line, by the shortest 
 route, taking care to undoublc the files, and to come on the line 
 one after the other. 
 
 155. As the front rank men successively arrive in line with the 
 covering sergeant, they will take from him the step, and then turn 
 their eyes to the front. 
 
 156. The men of the rear rank will conform to the movements 
 of their respective file leaders, but without endeavoring to arrive 
 in line at the same time with the latter. 
 
 157. At the instant the movement begins, the captain will face 
 f to his company in order to follow up the execution; and, an soon 
 
 as the company is formed, he will command, guide left, place him- 
 self two paces before the center, face to the front, and take the 
 I ) step of the company. 
 
 158. At the command guide left, the second sergeant will promptly 
 place himself in the front rank, on the left, to serve as guide, and 
 
 i the covering sergeant who is on the oppo.sit« flank will remain 
 (\ there. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. ^ 63 
 
 159. When the company marches by the left flank, thi.s move- 
 ment will hf executed by the same commands, and according to 
 the same principles ; the company being formed, the captain will 
 command gw'de right, and place hin\self in front of his company as 
 above ; the covering sergeant who is on the right of the front rank 
 will serve as guide, and the second sergeant placed on the left 
 flank will remain there. 
 
 160. Thus, in a column by com])any, right or left in front, the 
 covering sergeant and the second sergeant of each company will 
 Always be placed on the right and left, respectively, of the front 
 rank ; they will be denominated light guide and left guide., and the 
 one or the other charged with the direction. 
 
 161. The comi^any being in march by the flank, if it be the wish 
 of the instructor to cause it to i'orm platoons, he will give an order 
 ""JO that eflect U.) the captain, who will command : 
 
 1. By platoon, into line. 2. March. 
 
 162. The movement will be executed by each platoon according 
 to the above principles. The cai)tain will ])lace himself l)efore the 
 center of the first platoon, and the first lieutenant before the cen- 
 ter of the second, ])assiiig through the opening made in the cent<!r 
 of the company, if the march be by the right flank, and around 
 the left of his platoon, if the march be by the left; in this last case 
 the captain will also pass around the left of tho second platoon in 
 order to place himself in front of the first. Both the captain and 
 lieutenant, without waiting for each other, will command guide left 
 (or right) at the instant their i-espective ]>latoons are formed. 
 
 16:J. Atthe command guide, left (or light) the guide of each p^a- 
 toon will pa^iK rapidly to the iiidicjited flank' of the platoon, if not 
 already there. 
 
 164. The riglit guide of the company will always servo as the 
 guide of the right or left of the fii'st platoon, and the left guide of 
 the company will serve, in like manner, as the guide of the second 
 •platoon. 
 
 165. Thus in a column, by }ilatoon, there will be but one gJiide 
 to each platoon ; hci will always be placed o)i its left flank, if the 
 right bo in fr(»nt, and on the right flank, if the left be in front. 
 
 166. In these movements the file closers will follow the platoons 
 to which they are att-ached. 
 
 167. The instructor will cause the company, marching by tlie 
 flank, to form by company, ur by platoon, into line, by his own 
 dir^'t commands, using those ]irescribed for the captain. No. 15H 
 or 161. ' 
 
 HiH. The instructor will e.xi rii^e the (;om])any in passing, witli- 
 ont a halt, from the march by the front, to the march by the flank, 
 and nH'iprocally. In either case, he will employ the commands 
 proscriltf<l in the Sch(K>l of the Soldier, No. HfJiJ, sul)stituting eom- 
 pony for nqvad. Tlu^ company will fac(^ to the riglit or h-fl in 
 •narching, and the cnptnin. the guides, and flle closers will fonforni 
 tH^msolvVj* to ivhat is )>rcs<riltrd for (dch in tlw m.-u'i It by thr 
 
64 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 flank, or in the march by the front of a company supposed to be 
 a subdivision of a column. 
 
 169. If, after facing to the right or left, in marching, the com- 
 pany find itself faced by the I'ear rank, the captain will place him- 
 self two paces behind the center of the front i"ank, now in the rear, 
 the guides will pass to the rear rank, now leading, and the file 
 closers will march in front of this rank. 
 
 170. The instructor, in order to avoid fatiguing the men, and to 
 prevent them from being negligent in the position of shoulder arms, 
 will sometimes order support arms in marching by the flank, and 
 arms on the right shoulder, when marching in line. 
 
 LESSON FIFTH. 
 
 Article I. — To break into column by platoon, either at a halt or in 
 
 march. 
 
 171. The company being at a halt, in line of battle, the instruc- 
 tor, wishing to break it into column, by platoon to the right, will 
 command : 
 
 1. By platoon, right wheel. 2. March. 
 
 
 
 l> 
 
 o 
 
 n-U_L.LJ..J..J.X 
 SI Cb iS E B £ □ 
 
 172. At the first command, the chiefs of platoon will rapidly 
 place themselves two paces before the centers of their respective 
 platoons, the lieutenant passing around the left of the compan3\ 
 They need not occupy themselves with dressing, one upon the 
 other. The covering sergeant will replace the captain in the front 
 rank. 
 
 173. At the command march, the right front rank man of each 
 platoon will face to the right, the covering sergeant standing fast; 
 the chief of each platoon will move quickly by the shortest line, a 
 little beyond the point at which the marching flank will rest when 
 the wheel shall be completed, tace to the late rear, and place him- 
 self so that the line which he forms with the man on the right 
 (who had faced,) shall be perpendicular to that occupied by the 
 company in line of battle; each platoon will wheel according to 
 the principles prescribed for the wheel on a fixed pivot, and when 
 the man who conducts the marching flank shall approach near to 
 the perpendicular, its chief will command : 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 
 
 174. At the command halt, which will be given at the inetint 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 65 
 
 the man who conducta the marching flank shall havo arrived at 
 three paces from tlio perpendicular, the platoon will halt; the cov- 
 ering sergeant will move to the point where the left of the first 
 platoon is to rest, passing by the front rank; the second sergeant 
 will place himself, in like manner, in respect to the second pla- 
 toon. Each will take care to leave between himself and the man 
 on the right of his platoon, a space equal to its front ; the caj)tain 
 and first lieutenant will look to this, and each take care to align 
 the sergeant between himself and the man of the platoon who had 
 faced to the right. 
 
 175. The guide of each platoon being thus established on the 
 perpendicular, eacli chief will place himself two paces outside of 
 his guide, and facing towards him, will command : 
 
 3. Left — Dress. 
 
 176. The alignment being ended, each chief of ])latoon will com- 
 mand, Front, and place himself two paces before its center. 
 
 177. The file closers will conform themselves to the movement 
 of their respective platoons, preserving always the distance of two 
 paces from the rear rank. 
 
 178. The company will break by platoon to the left, according 
 to the same principles. The instructor will command : 
 
 1. By platooji, left wheel. 2. March. 
 
 17i). The first command will be executed in the same manner an 
 if breaking by platoon to the right. 
 
 180. At the command march, the left front rank man of each 
 platoon will face to the left, and the platoons will wheel to the left, 
 according to the principles prescribed for the wheel on a fixed 
 pivot; the chiefs of platoon will confonn to the principles indica- 
 ted Nos. 173 and 174. 
 
 181. At the command halt, given by the chief of each j)latoon, 
 the covering sergeant on the right of the front rank of the first 
 platoon, and the second sergeant near the left of the second pla- 
 toon, will each move to the points where the right of his platoon 
 is to rest. The chief of each ])Iatoon should be careful to align 
 the sergeant between himseltVind the man of the platoon who had 
 faced to the left, and will then command : 
 
 Rigid — ^Dress. 
 
 182. The platoons being aligned, each chief of ])latoon will com- 
 mand Front, and place himself opposite its center. 
 
 183. The instructor wishing to break the company by platoon 
 to the right and to move the column forward after the wheel is 
 completed, will caution the company to that cffVict, and command : 
 
 1. By platoon^ right wheel. 2. March. 
 
 184. At the first comraand the chio& of platoon will move rapidly 
 in front of their rospoctivc platoons, conforming to what haa been 
 proscribed No. 172, and will remain in this position during the 
 
66 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 continuance of the wheel. The covering sergeant will replace the 
 chief of the first platoon in the front rank. 
 
 185. At the command march, the platoons will wheel to the right, 
 conforming to the principles herein prescribed ; the man on the 
 pivot will not face to the right, but will mai'k time, conforming 
 himself to the movement of the marching flank ; and when the 
 man who is on the left of this flank shall arrive near the perpen- 
 dicular, the instructor will command : 
 
 3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide left. 
 
 186. At the fourth command, which will be given at the instant 
 the wheel is completed, the platoons will move straight to the front, 
 all the men taking the step of twenty-eight inches. The covering 
 Bergeant and the second sergeant will move rapidly to the left of 
 their respective platoons, the former passing before the front rank. 
 The leading guide will immediately take points on the ground in 
 the direction which may be indicated to him by the instructor. 
 
 187. At the fifth command, the men will take the touch of 
 elbows lightly to the left. 
 
 188. If the guide of the second platoon should lose his distance, 
 or the line. of direction, he will conform to the principles herein 
 prescribed, Nos. 202 and 203. 
 
 189. If the company be marching in line to the front, the in- 
 structor will cause it to break by platoon to the right by the same 
 commands. At the command march, the platoons will wheel in the 
 manner already explained ; the man on the pivot will take cai-e to 
 mark time in his place, without advancing or rece(?ling ; the in- 
 structor, the chiefs of platoon, and the guides, will conform tO' 
 what ha« been prescribed Kos. 184 and following. 
 
 190. The company may be broken by platoons to the left, ac- 
 cording to the same princijDles, and by inverse mean^, the instructor 
 giving the commands prescribed Nos. 183 and 185, substituting 
 left for right, and reciprocally. 
 
 191. The movements explained in Nos. 183 and If 9 will only be 
 executed after the company has become well established in the 
 principles of the march in column, Articles Second and Third. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 192. The instructor, placed in front of the company, will observe 
 whether the movement be executed according to the principles pi-e- 
 scribed above ; whether the platoons, after breaking into column, 
 are perpendicular to the line of battle just occupied ; and whether 
 the guide, who placed himself where the marching flank of his 
 platoon had to rest, has left, between himself and the front rank man 
 on the right (or left), the space necessary to contain the front of 
 the platoon. 
 
 193. After the platoons have broken, if the rearmost guard should 
 not accurately cover the leading one, he will not seek to correct 
 his position till the column be put in march, unless the instructor 
 wishing to wheel immediately into line, should think it necessary 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 67 
 
 to rectify the direction of the guides, which would be executed as 
 will be hereinafter explained in Article Fifth of this Lesson. 
 
 194. The instructor will obsei've, that the man on the right (or 
 left) of each platoon, who, at the command anarch, faces to the 
 right (or left) being the true pivot of the wheel, the front rank 
 man next to him ought to gain a little ground to the front in wheel- 
 ing, 80 as clear the pivot-man. 
 
 Article II. — To march in column. 
 
 195. The company having broken by platoon, right {oy left) in 
 front, the instructor, wishing to cause the column to march, will 
 throw himself twenty-five or tdiirty paces in front, face to the 
 guides, place himself correctly, on their direction, and caution the 
 leading guide to take points on the ground. 
 
 196. The instructor being thus placed, the guide of the leading 
 platoon will take two points on the ground in the straight line 
 passing between his own and the heels of the instructor. ^ 
 
 197. These dispositions being made, the instructor will step aside 
 and command : 
 
 1. Column ^ forward. 2. Guide left (or right). 3. March. 
 
 198. At the command march, promptly repeated by the chiets of 
 platoon, they, as well as the guides, will lead off, by a decided step, 
 their respective platoons, in order that the wliole may move 
 smartly, and at the same moment. 
 
 199. The men will each fi-el lightly the elbow of his neighbor 
 toward the guide, and conform himself, in marching, to the prin- 
 ciples prescribed in the school of the soldier, No. 327. The man 
 next to the guide, in each platoon, will take care never \o pass 
 him. and also to march alwaj's about six inches to the right (or 
 lefl) from him, in order not to push him out of the direction. 
 
 200. The leading guide will observe, with the greatest precision, 
 the length and cadence of the stvp, and maintain the direction of 
 his march by the means prescribed No. 89. 
 
 201. The following guide will march exactly in the trace of the 
 leading one, preserving between the latter and himself a distance 
 precisely equal to the front of his platoon, and marching in the 
 same step with the leading guide. 
 
 202. If the followi?ig guide lose his distance from the one lead- 
 ing, "(which can only liap}ten by his own fault,) he will correct 
 himself by slightly' lengthening or shortening a few stejts, in or- 
 der that there may not be sudden quickenings or slackenings in 
 the march of his platoon. 
 
 203. If the same guide, having neglected to march exactly in 
 the trace of the preceding one, find himself sensibly out of the di- 
 rection, ho will remedy tiiis fault by advancing more or less the 
 shoulder opposite to the true direction,^and thus, in a few steps, in- 
 sensibly regain it, without the inconvenience of the oblique step, 
 which would cause a loss of distiince. In all cases, each chief of 
 platoon will c.au8e it to conform to the movements of its guide. 
 
68 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 Remarks on the viarch in column. 
 
 204. If the chiefs and guides of subdivisions neglect to lead off 
 and to decide the march from the first step, the march will be be- 
 gun in uncertainty, which will cause waverings, a loss of step and 
 a loss of distance. 
 
 205. If the leading guide take unequal steps, the march of his 
 subdivision, and that which follows will be uncertain; there will 
 be undulations, quickenings, and slackenings in the march. 
 
 206. If the same guide be not habituated to prolong a given di- 
 rection, without deviation, he will describe a ci-ooked line, and the 
 column must wind to conform itself to such line. 
 
 207. If the following guide be not habituated to march in the 
 trace of the preceding one, he will lose his distance at every mo- 
 ment in endeavors to regain the trace, the preservation of which 
 is the most important principle in the march in column. 
 
 208. The guide of each subdivision in column will be responsi- 
 ble for the direction, distance and step; the chief of the subdivi- 
 sion, for the order and conformity of his subdivision with the 
 movements of the guide. Accordingly, the chief will frequently 
 turn, in the march, to observe his subdivision. 
 
 209. The instructor, placed on the flank of the guides, will watch 
 over the execution of all the j)i'inciples prescribed ; he will, also, 
 sometimes place himself in the rear, align himself on the guides, 
 and halt, pending some thirty paces together, to verify the accu- 
 racy of the guides. 
 
 210. In column, chiefs of subdivision will always repeat, with 
 the greatest promptitude, the commands march and halt, no chief 
 waiting for another, but each repeating the command the moment 
 he catches it from the instructor. They will repeat no other com- 
 mand given by him; but will explain, if necessary, to their subdi- 
 visions, in an under tone of voice, what they will have to execute, 
 as indicated by the commands of caution. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 69 
 
 Article III. — To change direction. 
 
 211. Tlio changes of direclion of a column while marching, will 
 be executed according to the principles prescribed for wheeling on 
 the march. AVlienever, therefore, a column is to diange direction, 
 the inntructor will change the guide, if not already there, to the 
 flank opposite the nide to which the change is to be made. 
 
 212. The column being in march right in front, if it be the wish 
 of the instructor to change direction to the right, he will give the 
 order to the chief of tlie first platoon, and immediately go himBclf, 
 or send a marker to the point at which the change of direction is 
 to bo made ; the instructor, or marker, will place himself on the 
 direction of the guides, so as to present the breast to that flank of 
 the column. 
 
 213. The leading guide will direct hie march on tliat person, so 
 that, in passing. Ins left arm may just graze his breast. When the 
 leading guide shall have approached near to the marker, the chief 
 of his platoon will command : 
 
70 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 1. Bight wheel. 2. March. 
 
 214. The first command will be given when the platoon is at the 
 distance of four paces from the marker. 
 
 215. At the command march, which will bo pronounced at the 
 instant the guide shall have arrived opposite the marker, the pla- 
 toon will wheel to the right, conforming to what is prescribed in 
 the school of the soldier, No. 396. 
 
 216. The wheel being finished, the chief of each platoon will 
 command : 
 
 3. Forward. 4. March. 
 
 217. These commands will be pronounced and executed a,s is 
 prescribed in the school of the soldier, Nos. 398 and 399. The 
 guide of the first platoon will take points on the ground in the new 
 direction, in order the bettor to regulate the march. 
 
 218. The second platoon will continue to march straight forward 
 till up with the marker, when it will wheel to the right, and 
 retake the direct march by the same commands and the same 
 means which governed the first platoon. 
 
 219. The column being in march right in front, if the instriictor 
 should wish to change direction to the left, he will command, guide 
 right. At this command, the two guides will move rapidly to the 
 right of their respective jjlatoons, each passing in front of his 
 subdivision ; the men will take the touch of elbows to the right ; 
 the instructor will afterwards conform to what is proscribed No. 
 212. 
 
 220. The change of direction to the left will then be executed 
 according to the same principles as the change of direction to the 
 right, but by inverse ineans. 
 
 221. When the change of direction is completed, the instructor 
 will command, guide left. 
 
 222. The changes of direction in a column, left in front, will be 
 executed according to the same principles. 
 
 223. In changes of direction in double quick time, the platoons 
 will wheel according to the principles prescribed in the school of 
 the soldier, No. 404. 
 
 224. In order to prepare the men for those formations in line, 
 which can be executed only by turning to the right or the left, the 
 instructor will sometimes cause the column to change direction to 
 the side of the. guide. In this case, the chief of the leading 
 platoon will command : Left (or right) turn, instead of left (or 
 right) wheel. The subdivisions wnll each turn, in succession, con- 
 forming to what is prescribed in the school of the soldier. No. 402. 
 The leading guide, as soon as ho has turned, will take points on 
 the ground, the better to regulate the direction of the march. 
 
 225. It is highly important, in order to preserve distances and 
 the direction, that all the subdivisions of the column should change 
 direction precisely at the point where the leading subdivision 
 changed ; it is for this reason that that point ought to be marked 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. . 71 
 
 in advance, and that it is prescribed that the guides direct their 
 march on the marker, also that each chief of subdivision shall not 
 cause the change to commence till the guide of liis subdivision has ■ 
 grazed the breast of this marker. 
 
 226. Each chief will take care that his subdivision arrives at the 
 point of change in a square with the line of direction ; with this 
 view, he will face to his su])division when the one which precedes 
 has commenced to turn or to wheel, and he will be watchful that it 
 continues to march squarely until it arrives at the point where 
 the change of direction is to commence. 
 
 227. If, in changes of direction, the pivot of the subdivision which 
 wheels should not clear the wheeling point, the next subdivision 
 would be arrested and distances lost; for the guide who conducta 
 the marching flank having to describe an arc, in length about a 
 half greater than the front of the subdivision, the second subdi- 
 vision would be already up with the wheeling point, whilst the 
 first which wheels has yet the half of its front to execute, and 
 hence would be obliged to mark time until that half be executed. 
 It is therefore prescribed, that the pivot of each subdivision should 
 take steps of nine or eleven inches in length, according to the 
 swiftness of the gait, in oi'der not to arrest the march of the next 
 subdivision. The chiefs of subdivision will look well to the step 
 of the pivot, and cause his step to be lengthened or shortened as 
 may be judged necessary. By the nature of this movement, the 
 center of each subdivision will bend a little to the rear. 
 
 228. The guides will never alter the length or the cadence of the 
 step, whether the change of direction be to the side of the guide or 
 to the opposite side. 
 
 229. The marker, placed at the wheeling point, will always pre- 
 sent his breast to the flank of the column. The instructor will 
 take the greatest pains in causing the prescribed principles to be 
 observed; he will see that each subdivision only commences the 
 change of direction when the guide, grazing the breast of the 
 marker, has nearly passed him, and, that the marching flank does 
 not describe the arc of too large a circle, in order that it may not 
 be thrown beyond the new dii«cction. 
 
 230. In change of direction by wheel, the guide of the wheeling 
 flank will cast his eyes over the ground at the moment of com- 
 mencing the wheel, and will describe an arc of a circle whose 
 radius is equal to the front of the subdivision. 
 
 Article IV. — To holi the column. 
 
 231. The column being in march, when the ini?tructor shall wish 
 to halt it, he will command : 
 
 1. Column. 2. Halt. 
 
 232. At the second command, promptly repeated by the chie& 
 of platoon, the column will halt; the guides will also stand fa«t, 
 although they may have lost both distance and direction. 
 
^ 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 233. If the command halt^ be not repeated with the greatest 
 vivacity,, and executed at the same instant, distances will be lost. 
 
 234. If a guide, having lost his distance, seek to recover it after 
 that command, he will only throw his fault on the following guide, 
 who, if he have marched well, will no longer be at his proper 
 distance ; and if the latter regain what he has thus lost, the move- 
 ment will be propagated to the rear of the column. 
 
 Article V. — Being in column by platoon, to form to the right or 
 left into line of battle, either at a halt or on the march. 
 
 235. The instructor having halted the column, right in fi-ont, 
 and wishing to form it into line of battle, will place himself at 
 platoon distance in front of the leading guide, face to him, and 
 rectify, if necessary, the position of the guide beyond ; which 
 being executed, he will command : 
 
 Left — Dress. 
 
 236. At this command, which will not be repeated by the chiefs 
 of platoon, each of them will place himself briskly two paces out- 
 side of his guide, and direct the alignment of the platoon perpen- 
 dicularly to the direction of the column. 
 
 237. Each chief having aligned his platoon, will command 
 Front, and retui'n quickly to his place in column. 
 
 238. This disposition being made, the instructor will command i 
 
 1. Left into line, wheel. 2. March. 
 
 239. At the command march, briskly repeated by the chiefs of 
 platoon, the front rank man on the left of each platoon will face to 
 the left, and place his bi-east lightly against the arm of the guide 
 by his side, who stands fast ; the platoons will wheel to the left on 
 the principle of wheels from a halt, and in conformity to what is 
 prescribed No. 194. Each chief will turn to his platoon, to observe 
 its movement, and when the marching flank has approached near 
 the line of battle, he will command : 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 
 
 240. The command halt, will be given when the marching flanlr 
 of the platoon is three paces from the line of battle. 
 
 241. The chief of the second platoon, having halted it, will 
 return to his place as a file closer, passing around the left of his 
 subdivision. 
 
 242. The captain having halted the first platoon, will move rap- 
 idly to the point at which the right of the company will rest in 
 line of battle, and command : 
 
 Bight — Dress. 
 
 243. At this command, the two platoons will dress up on the 
 alignment ; the front rank man on the right of the leading pla- 
 toon, who finds himself opposite the instructor established on the 
 direction of the guides, will place his breast lightly against the 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 73 
 
 left arm of this officer. Tlie captain will direct the alignment 
 from the right on the man on the opposite flank of the company. 
 
 244. The company being aligned, the captain will command : 
 
 Front. 
 
 245. The inBtructor, seeing the company in line of battle, will 
 command : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 246. At this command, the covering sergeant will cover the 
 captain, and the left guide will return to his place as a tile closer. 
 
 247. If the column be left in front, and the instructor should 
 wish to form it to the right into line of battle, he will place him- 
 Belf at platoon distance in front of the leading guide, face to him, 
 and rectify, if necessary, the position of the guide bej'ond ; which 
 being executed, he will command : 
 
 1. Right into line, wheel. 2. March. 
 
 248. At the command march, the front rank man on the right of 
 each platoon will face to the right and place his breast lightly 
 against the left arm of the guide by his side, who stands fast; each 
 platoon will wheel to the right, and wnll bo halted by its chief, 
 when the marching flank has approached near the line of battle; 
 for this purpose, the chief of each platoon will command : 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 
 
 249. The command halt, will be given when the marching flank 
 of the platoon is three paces from the line of battle. The chief of 
 the second platoon having halted his platoon, will resume his place 
 in the rank of file closers. 
 
 250. The captain having halted the first i:»latoon, will move 
 briskly to the point at whifh the left of the company will rest, and 
 command : 
 
 Left — Dress. 
 
 251. At this command, the two platoons will dress up on the 
 alignment; the man on the left of the second platoon, opposite the 
 instructor, will place his breast lightly against the right arm of 
 this officer, and the captain will irtirectthe alignnient from the left 
 on the man on the opposite flank of the company. 
 
 252. The company being aligned, the captsiin will command : 
 
 Front. 
 
 253. The instructor will afterwards command : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 254. At this w^mniand, the captain will move to the right of his 
 company, the covering sergeant will cover him and the left guide 
 will return to his place as a file closer. 
 
 255. The instructor may omit the com^nand left or right dress, 
 previous to commanding left or right into line, wheel, unless, after 
 
74 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 rectifying the position of the guides, it should become necessary to 
 dre.ssthe platoons, or one of them, laterally to the right or left. 
 
 256. The instructor, before the commaud left (or right) into line, 
 icheel, will assure himself that the rearmost platoon is at its exact 
 wheeling distance from the one in front. This attention is impor- 
 tant, in order to detect negligence on the part of guides in this es- 
 sential point. 
 
 257. If the column be marching right in fi'ont, and the instructor 
 should wish to form it into line without halting the column, he will 
 give the commands pi'cscribed No. 238, and move rapidly to pla- 
 toon distance in front of the leading guide. 
 
 258. At the command march, briskly repeated by the chiefs of 
 platoon, the left guides will halt short, the instructor, the chiefs of 
 platoon, and the platoons, will conform to what is j^rescribed No. 
 239 and following. 
 
 259. If the column be in march left in front, this formation will 
 be made according to the same principles, and by inverse means.- 
 
 260. If the column be marching right in front, and the instructor 
 should wish to form it into line without halting the column, andto 
 march the company in line to the front, he will command : 
 
 1. By platoons left wheel. 2. March. 
 
 261. At the command march, briskly repeated by the chiefs Qf 
 platoon, the left guides will halt ; the man next to the left guide in 
 each platoon will mark time; the platoons will wheel to the left, 
 conforming to the principles of a wheel on a fixed pivot. When 
 the right of the platoons shall arrive near the line of battle, the in- 
 structor will command : 
 
 . 3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide right (or left). 
 
 262. At the fourth command, given at the instant the wheel is 
 completed, all the men of the company will move off together with 
 the step of twenty-eight inches ; the captain, the chief of the sec- 
 ond platoon, the covering sergeant, and the left guide will take their 
 positions as in line of battle. 
 
 263. At the fifth command, which will be given immediately 
 after the fourth, the captain and covering sergeant, if not already 
 there, will move briskly to the side on which the guide is designa- 
 ted. The non-commissioned officer charged with the direction will 
 move rapidly in front of the guide, and will be assured in his line 
 of march by the insti-uctor, as is prescribed No. 104. That non- 
 commissioned officer will immediately take points on the ground 
 as indicated in the same number. The men will take the touch of 
 elbows to the side of the guide, conforming themselves to the 
 principles of the march in line. 
 
 20 {. The same principles are applicable to a column left in front. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 75 
 
 LESSON SIXTH. 
 Article I. — To break the company into platoon.":, and to reform the 
 
 company. 
 
 ^ j 
 
 ii MIL «■& 
 
 □ 
 
 ID 
 
 ^ --r 
 
 4 
 
 J D 
 
 J 
 
 HI 
 
 ^ IP 
 
 P" 
 
 D^ 
 
 I HI 
 
 3 ^ 
 
 J 
 
 i 
 
 r 
 
 To break the company into platoons. 
 
 265. The c-ompany marching in the eadeneed step, and suppoecd 
 td'make part of a coliunn, right in front, Avhen the instructor shall 
 wish to cause it to break b}- platoon, he will give the order to the 
 captain, who will command : 1. Break into platoons, and immedi- 
 ately place himself before the center of the first platoon. 
 
 266. At the command break into platoons, the first lieutenant will 
 pass quickly around the left to the center of hisplantoou, and give 
 the caution : Mark time. 
 
 267. The captain will then command: 2. March. 
 
 268. The first platoon will continue to march straight forward ; 
 the covering sergeant will move rapidly to the left flank of this 
 platoon (pa.ssing by the front rank) as soon as the flank shall be 
 disengaged. 
 
 269. At the command march, given by the captain, the second 
 platoon will begin to mark time ; its chief will immediately add : 
 1. Rigfit oblique. 2. March. The last command will be given so 
 that this platoon may commence obliquing the instant the rear rank 
 of the first platoon shall have passed. The men will shorten the 
 step in' obliquing, so that when the command forvard march is 
 given, the platoon may have its exact distance. 
 
 270. The guide of the second platoon being near the direction of 
 the guide of the first, the chief of the second will command For- 
 ward, and add March, the instant that the guide of his platoon 
 shall cover the guide of the first. 
 
 271. In a column, lefl in front, the company will break into pla- 
 toons by inverse means, applying to the first platoon' all that haa 
 been proscribed for the second, and reciprocally. 
 
 272. In this case, the left guide of the company will shif\ to the 
 
76 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 right flank of the second phitoon, and the covering sergeant will 
 remain on the right of the first. 
 
 To re-fonn the company. 
 
 273. The cohimn, by platoon, being in march, right in fi-ont, 
 when the instructor shall wish to cause it to form company, he will 
 give order to the captain, who will command : Form company. 
 
 274. Having given this command, the captain will immediately 
 add: 1. First platoon. 2. Right oblique. 
 
 275. The chief of the second platoon will caution it to continue 
 to march straight forward. 
 
 276. The captain will then command : 3. March. 
 
 277. At this command, repeated by the chief of the second, the 
 first platoon will oblique to the right, in order to unmask the sec- 
 ond ; the covering sergeant, on the left of the first platoon, will re- 
 turn to the right of the company, passing by the front rank. 
 
 278. When the first platoon shall have neai-ly unmasked the sec- 
 ond, the captain will command : 1. Mark time, and at the instant 
 the unmasking shall be complete, he will add : 2. March. The 
 first platoon will then cease to oblique, and mark time. 
 
 279. In the mean time the second platoon will have continued to 
 march straight forward, and when it shall be nearly up with the 
 first, the captain will command Forward, and at the instant the two 
 platoons shall unite, add March ; the first platoon will then cease 
 to mark time. 
 
 280. In a column, left in front, the same movement will be exe- 
 cuted by inverse means, the chief of the second platoon giving the 
 command Forward, and the captain adding 4he command March, 
 when the platoons are united. 
 
 281. The guide of the second platoon, on its right, will pass to 
 its left flank the moment the platoons begin to oblique ; the guide 
 of the first, on its right, remaining on that flank of the platoon. 
 
 282. The instructor will also sometimes cause the company to 
 break and reform, by platoon, by his own direct commands. In 
 this case, he will give the general commands prescribed for the 
 captain above: 1. Break into platoons; 2. March; and 1. Form 
 company; 2. March. 
 
 283. If, in breaking the company into platoons, the subdivision 
 that breaks oft' should mark time too long, it might, in a column 
 of many subdivisions, arrest the march of the following one, 
 which would cause a lengthening of the column, and a loss of 
 distances. 
 
 284. In bi-eaking into platoons, it is necessary that the platoons 
 which oblique should not shorten the step too much, in order not 
 to lose distance in column, and not to arrest the march of the fol- 
 lowing subdivision. 
 
 285. If a platoon obliques too far to a flank, it would be obliged 
 to oblique again to the opposite flank, to regain the direction, and 
 by the double movement arrest, probably, the march of the follow- 
 ing subdivision. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPAN'Y. 
 
 77 
 
 286. Tho chiefs of those platoons which oblique will face to 
 their platoons, in order to enforce the observance of the foregoing 
 principles. 
 
 287. When, in a column of several coinj)anic8,' they break in 
 succession, it is of the greatest importance that each company 
 should continue to march in the same step, without shorten- 
 ing or slackening, whilst that which precedes breaks, although the 
 following company shouUl close up on the preceding one. This 
 attention is essential to guard against an elongation of the column. 
 
 288. Faults of but little moment, in a column of a few compa- 
 nies, would be serious inconveniences in a genei'al column of many 
 battalions. Hence tho instructor will give the greatest care in 
 causing all the prescribed principles to be strictly observed. To 
 this end, he will hold himself on the directing flank, the better to 
 observe all the movements. 
 
 Article II. — Behig in cohimn, to break files to the rear, and to cause 
 them to re-enter into line. 
 beinir 
 
 289. The company ueing m 
 march, and supposed to consti- 
 tute a subdivision of a column, 
 right (or left) in front, when the 
 instructor shall wish to cause 
 files to break off he will give 
 the order to tho captain, who 
 will immediately turn to his 
 company, and command : 
 
 I. Two files from, left {or right) 
 to rear. 2. March. 
 
 290. At the command march, 
 the two files on the left (or 
 right) of the company, will 
 mark time, the others will con- 
 tinue to march straight for- 
 ward ; the two rear rank men 
 of these files will, as soon as 
 the roar rank of tho company 
 shall clear them, movo to the 
 right by advancing tho outer 
 shoulder; the odd number will 
 place himself behind the thir<l 
 file from that flank, the even 
 number behind the fourth, y)asH- 
 ing for this purpose behind the 
 odd numbor ; the two front rank 
 men will, in like manner, move 
 to the right when tho roar rank 
 of the company sliall clear 
 them, the odd number will 
 
 i 
 
 TT 
 XX 
 
 n 
 
 TT. 
 
 B m on 
 
 TTT 
 
 I... I. I.I ; n 
 
 TT 
 
 "a 
 
78 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 place himself behind the first file, the even number behind 
 the second file, passing for this purpose behind the odd num- 
 ber. If the files are broken from the right, the men will 
 move to the left,- advancing the outer shoulder, the even number 
 of the rear rank will place himself behind the third file, the odd 
 number of the same rank behind the fourth ; the even number of 
 the front rank behind the first file, the odd number of the same 
 rank behind the sec<3nd, the odd numbers for this purpose passing 
 behind the even numbers. The men will be careful not to lose 
 their distances and to keep aligned. 
 
 291. If the instructor should still wish to break two tiles from 
 the same side, he will give the order to the captain, who will pro- 
 ceed as above directed. 
 
 292. At the command march, given by the captain, the files 
 already broken, advancing a little the outer shoulder, will gain the 
 space of two files to the right, if the files are broken from the left, 
 and to the left, if the files are broken from the right, shortening, 
 at the same time, the step, in order to make room between them- 
 selves and the reai* rank of the company for the files last ordered 
 to the rear; the latter will break by the same commands and in 
 the same manner as the first. The men who double should 
 increase the length of the step in order to prevent distances from 
 being lost. 
 
 293. The instructor may thus diminish the front of a company 
 by breaking otf successive groups of two files, but the new files 
 must always be broken from th'e same side. 
 
 294. The instructor, wishing to cause files broken otf to return 
 into line, will give the order to the captain, who will immediately 
 command : 
 
 1. Two files into line. 2. March. 
 
 295. At the command march, the first two files of those marching 
 by the flank will return briskly into line, and the others will gain 
 the space of two files by advancing the inner shoulder towards the 
 flank to which they belong. 
 
 296. The captain will turn to his company, to watch the observ- 
 ance.of the principles which have just been 2>rascribed. 
 
 297. The instructor having caused groups of two files to break 
 one after another,- and to return again into line, will afterwards 
 cause two or three groups to break together, and for this purpose, 
 will command : Four or six files from left (or iight) to rear; March. •" 
 The files designated will mark time ; each rank Avill advance a 
 little the outer shoulder as soon as the rear rank of the company 
 shall cleai" it, will oblique at once, and each greirp will place itself 
 behind the four neighboring files, and in the same manner, as if 
 the movement had been executed group by group, taking care that 
 the distances are preserved. 
 
 298. The instructor will next order the captain to cause two or 
 three groups to be brought into line at once, who turning to the 
 company, will command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 79 
 
 Four or six file into line — March. 
 
 299. At the commiind march, the files desiifnated will advanc-e 
 the inner slioulder, move up and form on the flank ol' the com- 
 pany by the shortest lines. 
 
 300. As often as files nhall break oft' to the rear, the guide on 
 that flank will gradually close on the nearest front rank man 
 remaining in line, and ho will also open out to make room for files 
 ordered into line. 
 
 301. The files which march in the rear are disposed in the fol- 
 lowing order : the left files as if the company was marching bj' the 
 right flank, and the right files a.s if the com])any was marching 
 by the loft flank. Consequently, whenever there is on the right 
 or left of a subdivision, a file wliich does not belong to a group, it 
 will be broken singly. 
 
 I 302. It is necessary to the ]>rcservation of distances in column 
 that the men should be habituated in the schools of detail to exe- 
 cute the movements of this ai'ticle with precision. 
 
 303. If ntw files broken oft" do not step well to the left or right 
 in obliquing ; if, when files are ordered into line, they do not move 
 up with promptitude and precision, in either case the following 
 files will be arrested in their march, and thereby cause the column 
 to be lengthened out. 
 
 304. The instructor will place himself on the flank from which 
 the files are broken, to assure himself of the exact observance of 
 the principles. 
 
 305. File^ will only be broken off from the side of direction, 
 in order that the whole company may easily pasw from the front 
 to the flank march. 
 
 Article III. — To nwrch the column in route, and to execute the move- 
 ments in/iiJent thereto. 
 
 30G. The swiftness of the route step will be one hundred and 
 ten 8t<jp8 in a minute ; this swiftness will bo habitually maintained 
 in columns in route, when the roads and ground may permit. 
 
 307. The company being at a halt, and supposed to constitute a 
 subdivision of a column, when the instructor shall wish to cause it 
 to march in the route st<^p ho will command : 
 
 1. Column, fonivjrd. 2. GMiJc left (or right.) 3. Route step. 
 
 4. March. 
 
 308. At the command march., repeated by the captain, the two 
 ranks will step off together; the rear rank will take, in mai-ching, 
 by shortening a few steps, a distance of one pace (twenty-eight 
 inches) from the rank preceding, which distance will be computed 
 from the brcaHt,s of the men in the rear i-ank, to the knapsacks of 
 the men in the fi*ont lank. The men, without further command, 
 will immediately carry their arms at uill, as indicated in the 
 School of the Soldier, No. 219. They will no longer bo required 
 to maCt-ch in the cadenced pace, or with the same foot, or to remain 
 
80 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 silent. The files will Biarcli at ease ; but care will be taken to 
 prevent the ranks from intermixing, the front rank from getting 
 in advance of the guide, and the rear rank from opening to too 
 great a distance. 
 
 309. The company marching in the route step, the instructor 
 w^ill cause it to change direction, which will be executed without 
 formal commands, on a simple caution from the captain ; the rear 
 rank will come up to change direction in the same manner as the 
 front rank. Each rank will conform itself, although in the route 
 ste}), to the principles which have been prescribed for the change 
 in closed ranks, with this difference only, that the pivot man, in- 
 stead of taking steps of nine, will take ste^js of fourteen inches, 
 in order to clear tlie wheeling point. 
 
 310. The company marching in the route step, to cause it to 
 pass to the cadenced step, the instructor will first order pieces 
 to be brought to the right shoulder, and then command : 
 
 1. Quick time. 2. March. 
 
 311. At the command march, the men will resume the cadenced 
 step, and w^ill close so as to leave a distance of sixteen inches be- 
 tween each rank. 
 
 312. The company marching in the cadenced pace, the instruc- 
 tor, to cause it to take the route step will command : 
 
 1. Route step. 2. March. 
 
 313. At the command march, the front rank will continue the 
 step of twenty-eight inches; the rear rank will take, by gradually 
 shortening the step, the distance of twenty-eight inches from the 
 front rank ; the men will carry their arms at will. 
 
 314. If the company be marching in the route step, and the in- 
 structor should suppose the necessity of marching by the flank in 
 the same direction, he will command ; 
 
 1. Company by the right (or left) flank. 2. By file left (or right.) 
 
 3. March. 
 
 315. At the command march, the company will face to the right 
 (or left) in marching, the captain will place himself by the side of 
 the guide who conducts the leading flank; this guide will wheel 
 immediately to the 'left or right ; all the files will come in succes- 
 sion to wheel on the same spot as the guide ; if there be files bro- 
 ken off" to the rear, they will, by wheeling, regain their respective 
 places, and follow the movement of the company. 
 
 316. The instructor having caused the company to be again 
 formed into lino, will exercise it in increasing and diminishing 
 front, by platoon, which will be executed by the same commands 
 and the same means, as if the company were marching in the ca- 
 denced step. When the company breaks into platoons, the chief 
 of each will move to the flank of his platoon, and will take the 
 place of the guide, who will step back into the rear rank. 
 
 317. The company being in column by platoon, and supposed to 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 81 
 
 inarch in the route Btep, the instructor pan cause the front to be 
 diminished and increased, by section, if the platoons have a.-front 
 of twelve files or more. 
 
 318. The movenieuts of diminishing and increasiug front, by 
 section, will be executed according to tlie principles indicated for 
 the same movements by platoon. The right sections of platoons 
 will be commanded by the captain and first lieutenant, respectively; 
 the left sections by the two next su,balterns in rank, or, in their 
 absence, by sergeants. 
 
 319. The instructor wishing to diminish by section, will give the 
 order to the captain, who will command : 
 
 1. Break into sections. 2. March. 
 
 320. As soon aa the platoons shall bo broken, each chief of sec- 
 tion will place himself on its directing flank in the front rank ; 
 the guides who will be thus displaced, will fall back into the rear 
 rank ; the file closers will close up to within one pace of this rank. 
 
 321. Platoons will be broken into sections only in the column in 
 route ; the movement will never be executed in the manoeuvres, 
 whatever may be the front of the company. 
 
 322. When the instructor shall wish to reform platoons, he will 
 give the order to the captain, who will command : 
 
 1. Form 2-)lntoons. 2. March. 
 
 323. At the first command, each chief of sections will place him- 
 self before its center, and the guides will pass into the front rank. 
 At the command march, the movement will be executed as has 
 been prescribed for forming company. The moment the platoons 
 are formed, the chiefs of the left sections will return to their places 
 as file closers. 
 
 324. The instructor will also cauSe to be executed the diminish- 
 ing and increasing front by tiles, as prescribed in the precedin 
 article, and in the same manner, as if marching in the cadence 
 step. When the company is broken into sections, the subdivisions 
 must not be reduced to a front of less than six files, not counting 
 the chief of the section. 
 
 325. The company being broken by platoon or by section, the 
 instructor will cause it, marching in the route step, to mai-ch by 
 the flank in the same direction, b}' the commands and the means 
 indicated, Nos. 314 and 315. The moment the subdivisions shall 
 face to the right (or left,) the first file of each will wheel to the left 
 (or right.) in marching, to prolong the direction, and to unite with 
 the rear file of the subdivision immediately preceding. The file 
 closers will take their habitual 'plat^es in the march by the flank, 
 before the union of the subdivisions. 
 
 32f). If the company bo marching by the right flank, and the 
 instructor should wish to undouble the files, which might some- 
 times be found necessary, he will inform the captain, who, aftor 
 causing the cadenced step to be resumed, and arms tojbe shoul- 
 derod or supported, will command : 
 6 
 
82 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 1. In two rankSyUndouble files. 2. March. 
 
 327/ At the second command, the odd numbers will continue to 
 inarch straight forward, the even numbers will shorten the step, 
 and obliquing to the left will place themselves promptly behind 
 the odd numbers ; the rear rank will gain a step to the left, so as 
 to retake the touch of elbows on the side of the front rank. 
 
 228. If the company be marching hy the left flank, it will be the 
 even numbers who will continue to march forward, and the odd 
 numbers who will undouble. 
 
 329. If the instructor should wish to double the files, he will 
 give the order to the captain, who will command : 
 
 1. In four ranks, double files. 2. March. 
 
 330. At the command march, the files will double in the manner 
 as explained, when the company faces by the right or the left flank. 
 The instructor will afterwards cause the route step to be resumed. 
 
 331. The various movements prescribed in this lesson may be 
 executed in double quick time. The men will be brought, by de- 
 grees, to pass over at this gait about eleven hundred yards in seven 
 minutes. 
 
 332. When the company marching in the route step shall halt, 
 the rear rank will close up at the command fuilf, and the whole 
 will shoulder arms. 
 
 333. Marching in the route step, the men will be permitted to 
 carry their pieces in the manner they shall find most convenient, 
 paying attention only to holding the muzzles up, so as to avoid ac- 
 cidents. 
 
 Article IV. — Countermarch. 
 
 334. The company being at a halt, and supposed to constitute 
 part of a column, right in front, when the instructor shall wish to 
 fjause it to countermarch, he will command : 
 
 (- 
 
 1. Countermarch. 2. Company, right — Face. 3. By file left. 
 4. March. 
 
 335. At the second command the company will face to the right, 
 the two guides to the right about ; the captain will go to the right 
 of his company and cause two files to break to the rear, and then 
 place himself by the side of the front rank man, to conduct him. 
 
 336. At the command m.arch, both guides will stand fast; the 
 company will step off" smartly; the first file conducted by the cap- 
 tain, will wheel around the right guide, and direct its march along 
 the front rank so as to arrive behind, and two paces fi'om the left 
 guide; each file will come in sufccession to wheel on the same 
 ground around the right guide • the leading file having arrived at 
 A point opposite to the left guide, the captain will command: 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Jiight — Dress. 
 
 337. The first command will be given at four paces from the 
 joint where the leading file is to rest. 
 
SCHOOL o^ tSe cOm^a^y". 
 
 83 
 
 338. At tho second command, the company will halt. 
 
 339. At tho third, it will face to the front.' 
 
 340. At the I'ourth, the company will dress by the right ; the 
 captain will step two paces outRide of the left .i^uide, now on the 
 right, and direct the alignment, eo that the front rank may be en- 
 closed between the two guides ; the company being aligned, he 
 will command Front, and place himself before tho center of the 
 compaily as if in column ; the guides, passing along the front 
 rank, will shift to their proper places, on the right and left of that 
 rank. 
 
 341. In a column, by platoon, the countern\arch will bo executed 
 by the same commands, and according to the same principles ; the 
 guide of each platoon will face about, and its chief will place him- 
 self by the side of the file on the right, to conduct it. 
 
 342. In a column, left in front, the countermarch Avill be exe- 
 cuted by inverse commands and means, but according to the same 
 principles. Thus, the movement will be made by the right flank 
 of subdivisions, if the right be in front, and by the left flank, if 
 the left be in front; in both cases the subdivisions will wheel by 
 file to the side of the front rank. 
 
 Article V. — Being in column by platoon, to form on the right (or 
 left) into line of battle. 
 
 IB 
 
 i 
 
 •9: 
 
 <HD 
 
 d 
 
 D 
 
 C! 
 
 343. The column by platoon, right in front, being in march, the 
 instructor, wishing to form it on the right into lino of battle, will 
 command : 
 
 1. On the right into line. 2. Guide right. 
 
 344. At tlio second command, tlic guide of each platoon will 
 ahifl quickly to its right flank, and the men will touch elbows to 
 the right ; the column will continuo to march straight forward. 
 
 345. The instructor having given tho second command, will 
 move briskly to the po'nt at which the right of the company ought 
 to rest in line, and place himself facing the point of direction to 
 the left which he will chooee. 
 
84 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 
 346. The line of battle ought to be so chosen that the guide of 
 each platoon, after having turned to the right, may have, at least, 
 ten paces to take before arriving upon that line. 
 
 347. The head of the column being nearly opposite to the in- 
 structor, the chief of the first platoon will command : 1. Right 
 turn ; and when exactly opposite to that point, he will add : 
 
 2. March. 
 
 348. At the command anarch, the first platoon will turn to the 
 right, in conformity with the principles prescribed in the school 
 of the soldier, No. 402. Its guide will so direct his march as to 
 bring the front rank man, next on his left, opposite to the instruct- 
 or ; the chief of the platoon will march before its center ; and 
 Avhen its guide shall be near the line of battle, he will command : 
 
 1. Platoon. 2. Halt. 
 
 349. At the command halt, which will be given at the instant the 
 right of the platoon shall arrive at the distance of three paces from 
 the line of battle, the platoon will halt; the files, not jet in line, 
 will come up promptly. The guide will throw himself on the line 
 of battle, opposite to one of the three left files of his platoon ; he 
 will face to the instructor, who Avill align him on the point of di- 
 rection to the left. The chief of platoon having, at the same time, 
 gone to the point where the right of the company is to rest, will, 
 as soon as he sees all the files of the platoon in line, command : 
 
 Right — Dress. 
 
 350. At this, the first platoon will align itself; the front rank 
 man, who finds himself opposite to the guide, will rest his breast 
 lightly against the right arm of this guide, and the chief of the 
 platoon, from the right, will direct the alignment on this man. 
 
 351. The second platoon will continue to march straight for- 
 ward, until its guide shall arrive opposite to the left file of the 
 fii'st ; it will then turn to the right at the command of its chief, and 
 march towards the line of battle, its guide directing himself on the 
 left file of the first platoon. 
 
 352. The guide having arrived at the distance of three paces 
 from the line of battle, this platoon will be halted, as prescribed 
 for the first; at the instant it halts, its guide will spring on the 
 line of battle, opposite to one of the three left files of his platoon, 
 and will be assured in his position by the instructor. 
 
 353. The chief of the second platoon, seeing all its files in line, 
 and its guide established on the direction, will command : 
 
 Right — Dress. 
 
 354. Having given this command, he will return to his place as 
 a file closer, passing around the left ; the second platoon will dress 
 up on the alignment of the first, and, when established, the cap- 
 tain will command : 
 
 Front. 
 
 355. The movement ended, the instructor will command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. S5 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 35G. At this (.'ommand, the two guides will return to their j)! aces 
 in lino of battle. 
 
 357. A column, hy platoon, left in front, will form on the left into 
 line of battle, according to the same principles, and, by inverse 
 means, applying to the second platoon what is prescribed for thie 
 first, and reciprocally. The chief of the second platoon having 
 aligned it, from the point of appui, (the left,) will retire to his 
 place as a file closer. The captain having halted the first platoon 
 three paces behind the lino of battle, will go to the same point to 
 align this platoon, and then command : Front. At the command, 
 guides — posts, given by the instructor, the captain will shift to his 
 proper flank, and the guides take their places in the line of battle. 
 
 358. When the companies of a regiment are to be exercised, at 
 the same time, in the school of the company, the colonel will indi- 
 cate the lesson or lessons they are severally to execute. The whole 
 will commence by a bugle signal, and terminate in like manner. 
 
 Formation of a company from two I'anfis into single rani:, and re- 
 
 ciprocaUy. 
 
 359. The company being formed into two ranks, in the manner 
 indicated No. 8, school of the soldier, and supposed to make jiart 
 of a column, right or left in front, when the instructor shall wish 
 to form it into single rank, he will command : 
 
 1. In one rank, form company. 2. March, 
 
 360. At the first command, the right guide will face to the 
 right. 
 
 361. At the conimand march, the right guide will st<?p off and 
 march in the prolongation of the front rank. 
 
 362. The first file will step ofi" at the same time with the guide; 
 the front rank man will turn to the right at the first step, follow 
 the guide, and be himself followed by the rear rank man of his 
 file, who will come to turn on the same spot where he had turned. 
 The second file, and successivelj' all the other files, will step oif as 
 has been prescribed for the first, the front rank man of each file 
 following immediately the rear rank man of the file next on his 
 right. The captain will superintend the movement, and when the 
 last man shall have stepped off, he will halt the company, and face 
 it to the front. 
 
 363. The file closers will take their places in the line of battle, 
 two paces in the rear of the rank. 
 
 364. The company' being in single rank, when the instructor 
 shall wish to form it into two ranks, he will command : 
 
 1. In two ranks, form company. 2. Company, right — Face^ 
 3. March. 
 
 365. At the second command, the company will face to the right; 
 the right guide and the man on the right will remain faced to 
 the front. 
 
86 SCHOOL OF TH^ COMPANY. 
 
 366. At the command march, the men who have faced to the 
 right, will step off, and form fileB in the following manner : the 
 second man in the rank will place himself behind the first to form 
 the first file ; the third will place himself by the side of the first 
 in the front rank ; the fourth behind the third in the rear rank. 
 All the others will, in like manner, place themselves, alternately, 
 in the front and rear rank, and will thus form files of two men, on 
 the left of those already formed. 
 
 367. The formations above described will be habitually executed 
 by the right of companies ; but when the instructor shall wish to 
 have them executed by the left, he will face the company about, 
 and jjost the guides in the rear rank. 
 
 368. The formation will then be executed by the same commands 
 and according to the same principles as by the front rank ; the move- 
 ment commencing with the left file, now become the right, and in 
 each file by the rear rank man. now become the front ; the left 
 guide will confoi'm to what has been prescribed for the right. 
 
 369. The formation ended, the instructor will face the company 
 to its proper front. 
 
 370. When a battalion in line has to execute either of the for- 
 mations above described, the colonel will cause it to break to the 
 rear by the right or left of companies, and will then give the com- 
 mands just prescribed for the instructor. Bach company will ex- 
 ecute the movement as if acting singly. 
 
 Formation of a company from two ranks into four, and reciprocally, at 
 a halt, and in march. 
 
 371. The company being formed in two ranks, at a halt, and 
 supposed to form part of a column right in front, when the in- 
 structor shall wish to form it into four ranks, he will command : 
 
 1. 
 
 In four ranks, form company. 2. Compayiy left — Face. 3. Maech 
 (or double quick — March). 
 
 372. At the second command, the loft guide will remain faced to 
 the front, the company will face to the left ; the rear rank will gain 
 the distance of one pace from the front rank by a side step to the 
 left and rear, and the men will form into four ranks as prescribed 
 in the school of the soldier. 
 
 373. At the command march, the first file of four men will reface 
 to the front without imdoubling. All the other files of four will 
 step off, and closing successively to about five inches of the prece- 
 ding file, will halt, and immediately fiice to the front, the men re- 
 maining doubled. 
 
 374. The file closers will take their new places in line of battle, 
 at two paces in rear of the fourth rank. 
 
 375. The captain will superintend the movement. 
 
 376. The company being in four ranks, when the instructor shall 
 wish to form it into two ranks, he will command : 
 
SCHOOL OP THE COMPANY. 87 
 
 1. In tico ranks, form company. 2. Company right — Face. 3. Mabch 
 (or double quick — March). 
 
 377. At the second command the left guide will stand fast, the 
 company will face to the right. 
 
 378. At the command march, the right guide will step off and 
 march in the prolongation of the front rank. The leading file of 
 four men will step off at the same time, the other files standing 
 fast; the second file will step off when there shall be between it 
 and the first space sufficient to form into two ranks. The follow- 
 ing files will execute successively what has been prescribed for the 
 second. As soon as the last file shall have its distance, the in- 
 structor will command : 
 
 1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 379. At the command /ron^, the company will face to the front 
 and the files will undouble. 
 
 380. The company being formed in two ranks, and marching to 
 the front, when the instructor shall wish to form it into four ranks 
 he will command : 
 
 1. In four ranks, form company. 2. By the left double files. 3. March 
 (or double quick — March). 
 
 381 . At the command march, the left guide and the left file of the 
 company will continue to march straight to the front; the com- 
 pany will make a half face to the left, the odd numbers placing 
 themselves behind the even numbers. The even numbers of the 
 rear rank will shorten their steps a little, to permit the odd num- 
 bers of the front rank to get between them and the even numbers 
 of that rank. The files thus formed of fours, except the left file, 
 will continue to march obliquely, lengthening their steps slightly, 
 80 as to keep constantly abreast of the guide ; each file will close 
 successively on the file next on its left, and when at the proper 
 distance from that file, will face to the front by a half face to the 
 right, and take the touch of elbows to the left. 
 
 382. The company being in march to the front in four ranks, 
 when the instructr)r shall wish to form it into two ranks, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. In two ranks, form company. 2. By thr right, undouble files. 3. 
 March (or double quick March). 
 
 383. At the command march, the left guide and the left file of the 
 company will continue to march straight to the front; the com- 
 
 f)any will make a half face to the right and march obliquely, 
 engthcning the step a little, in order to keep, as near as possible, 
 abreast of the guide. As soon as the second file from the left shall 
 have gained to the right the interval necessary for the left file to 
 form into two ranks, the second file will face to the front by a half 
 face to the left and march straight forward ; the left file will im- 
 mediatelv form into two ranks, and take the touch of elbows to 
 
88 SCHOOL OF ;?HE COMPANY. 
 
 the left. Bach file will execute successively, what has just been 
 prescribed for the file next to the left, and each file will form into 
 two ranks when the file next on its right has obliqued the required 
 distance and faced to the front. 
 
 384. If the company be supposed to make part of a column, left 
 in front, these different movements will be executed according to 
 the same principles and by inverse means, substituting the indica- 
 tion left for right. \^^ 
 
 END OF THE SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. , 
 
 
 y ■ 
 
 
 -ttii li 
 
HARDEE'S TACTICS. 
 
 VOL. II. 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION- 
 
T')/T m'imf^ 
 
 .iIOT 
 
 * '■»'*! 
 
RIFLE AND LIGHT INFANTRY TACTICS. 
 
 TITLE FOUETH. 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 Formation of the Battalion. 
 
 * 1. Every colonel will labor to habituate his battalion to form 
 line of battle, by night as Avell as by day, with the greatest posai- 
 ble proratitude. 
 
 2. The color-company will generally be designated as the di- 
 recting company. That, as soon as formed, will be placed on the 
 direction the colonel may have determined for the line of battle. The 
 other companies will form on it, to the right and left, on the prin- 
 ciples of successive formations which will be herein prescribed. 
 
 3. The color-bearer may have received the color from the hands 
 of the colonel ; but if there be daylight, and time, the color will 
 be produced with due solemnity. ' 
 
 Composition and march of the color-escort. 
 
 4. When the battalion turns out under arms, and the color is 
 wanted, a company, other than that of the color, will ,be put in 
 march to receive and escort it. 
 
 5. The march will be in the following order, in quick time, and 
 without music : the field music, followed by the band; the escort in 
 column by platoon, right in front, with arms on the right shoulder 
 and the color-bearer between the platoons. 
 
 6. Arrived in front of the tent or quarters of the colonel, the ee- 
 oort will form line, the field music and band on the right, and 
 armsVill be brought to a shoulder. 
 
 7. The moment the escort is in line, the color-bearer, preceded 
 by the first lieutenant, and followed by a sergeant of the escort, 
 will go to receive the color. 
 
 8. When the color-bearer shall come out, followed by tlie lieu- 
 tenant and sergeant, he will halt before the entrance; the t«c*rt 
 will present arms, and the field music will sound to the color. 
 
 9. AfLcr some twont}- seconds, the captain will cause the aound 
 to ooasc, arms to be shouldered, and then break by platoon into 
 column ; the color-bearer will place himself between the platoons, 
 and the lieutenant and sergeant will resume their posts. 
 
 10. The escort will march back to the battalion to the sound of 
 music, in quick time, and in the same order as above, the guide on 
 tho right. The march will be so conducted that when the escort 
 
92 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 , arrives at one hundred and fifty paces in front of the right of the 
 the battalion, the direction of the march will be parallel to 
 it8 front, and when the color arrives nearly opposite its place in 
 line, the column will change direction to the left, and the right 
 guide will direct himself on the center of the battalion. 
 
 Honors paid to the color. 
 
 11. Arrived at the distance of twenty paces from the battalion, 
 the escort will halt, and the music cease; the colonel will place 
 himself six paces before the center of the battalion, the color- 
 bearer will approach the colonel, by the front, in quick time ; when 
 at the distance of ten paces, he will halt, the colonel will cause 
 arms to be presented, and to the color to be sounded, which being 
 executed, the color-bearer will take his place in the front rank of 
 the color-guard, and the battalion, by command, shoulder arms. 
 
 12. The escort, field music, and band, will return in quick time 
 to their several places in line of battle, marching by the rear of 
 the battalion. 
 
 13. The color will be escorted back to the colonel's tent or quar- 
 ters in the above order. . ■■> ,!■)■, li 
 
 General Rules and Division of the School of the Battalion.'' . ■ 
 
 14. This school has for its object the instruction of battalions 
 singly, and thus to prepare them for manoeuvres in line. The 
 harmony so indispensable in the movements of many battalions, 
 can only be attained by the use of the same commands, the same 
 principles, and the same means of execution. Hence, all colonels, 
 and actual commanders of battalions will conform themselves, 
 without addition or curtailment, to what will herein be prescribed. 
 
 15. When a battalion instructed in this drill shall manoeuvre in 
 line, the colonel will regulate its movements, as prescribed in the 
 third volume of the Tactics for heavy infantry. ' '^^ 
 
 16. The school of the battalion will be divided into five parts.' " 
 
 17. The first will comprehend opening and closing ranks, and 
 the execution of the different fires. 
 
 18. The second, the different modes of passing from the order 
 in battle, to the order in column. 
 
 19. The third, the march in column, and the other movements 
 incident thereto. 
 
 20. The fourth, the different modes of passing from the order in 
 column to the order in battle. 
 
 21. The fifth will comprehend the march in line of battle, in 
 advance and in retreat; the passage of defiles in retreat; the 
 march by the flank ; the formation by file into line of battle ; the 
 change of front ; the column doubled on the center ; dispositions 
 against cavaby ; the rally, and rules for manoeuvring by thp i:ear 
 rank, ':y' ^*" 
 
 ri 
 
 tn 
 
 .•>•;, '^rf/* 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 93 
 
 PAET FIRST. 
 
 Opening and dosing ranks, and the execution of the different fires. 
 Article I. — To open and close ra7iks. 
 
 22. The colonel, wishing the ranks to bo opened, will comraandr 
 
 1. Prepare to open ranks. 
 
 23. At this command, the lieutenant-colonel and 7najor will place 
 thempclves on the right of the battalion, the first on the flank of 
 the file closers, and the second four paces from the front rank of 
 the battalion. 
 
 24. These dispositions being made, the colonel will command : 
 
 2. To the rear, open order. 3. ]\Iarcu. 
 
 25. At the second command, the covering sergeants, and the 
 sergeant on the left of the battalion, will place themselves four 
 paces in the rear of the front rank, and opposite their places in 
 lino of battle, in order to mark the new alignment of the rear 
 rank ; they will be aligned by the major on the left sergeant of the 
 battalion, who Avill be careful to place himself exactly four paces 
 in rear of the front rank, and to hold his piece between the eyefl, 
 erect and inverted, the better to indicate to the major the direction 
 tQ be given to the covering sergeants. 
 
 26. At the command inarch, the rear rank and the file closers 
 will btep to the rear without counting steps ; the men will pass a 
 little in rear of the line traced for this rank, halt, and dress for- 
 ward on the covering sergeants, who will align correctly the men 
 of their respective companies. 
 
 27. The file closers will fall back and preserve the distance of 
 two paces from the rear rank, glancing eyes to the right; the 
 lieutenant-colonel will from the right, align them on the file closer 
 of the left, who. having placed himself accurately two paces from 
 the rear rank, will invert his piece, and hold it up erect between 
 his eyes, the better to be seen b3- the lieutenant-colonel. 
 
 28. The colonel, seeing the ranks aligned, will command: 
 
 4. Front. 
 At this command, the lieutenant -colonel, major, and the left 
 serjreant, will retake their places in line of battle. 
 
 29. The colonel will can-*e the ranks to bo closed by the com- 
 mands prescribed for the instructor in the School of the Company, 
 Jfo. 2P. 
 
 Article II. — Manual of Anns. 
 
 30. The ranks being closed, the colonel will cause the following 
 timo-j .md pauses to be executed : 
 
 Present arnvi. (tlien) Shoulder arms. 
 
 Order arms. Shoulder arm-f. 
 
 Support arm3. Shoulder arms. 
 
 Fir bayonet. . Shoulder arms. 
 
 Charge bayonet. . Shoulder arms. 
 
 th.fis. bavond. Shoulder arms. 
 
94 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 Article III. — Loading at xoill and the Firings. 
 
 31. The colonel will next cause to be executed loading at will, 
 by the commands prescribed in the School of the Company No. 
 45; the officers and sergeants in the ranks will half face to the 
 right with the men at the eighth time of loading, and will face to 
 the front when the men next to them come to a shoulder. 
 
 32. The colonel will cause to be executed the fire by company, 
 the fire by wing, the fire by battalion, the fire by file, and the fire 
 by rank, by the commands to be herein indicated. 
 
 33. The fire by company and the fire by file will always be 
 direct ; the fire by battalion, the fire by wing, and the fire by rank, 
 may be either direct or oblique. 
 
 34. When the fire ought to be oblique, the colonel will give, at 
 every round, the caution right (or left) oblique, between the oom- 
 raands ready and aim. 
 
 35. The fire by company will be executed alternately by th« 
 right and left companies of each division, as if the division were- 
 alone. The right company will fire fii'st ; the ca])tain of the left 
 will not give his first command till he shall see one or two pieces 
 at a ready in the right company ; the captain of the latter, after 
 the first discharge, will obsei've the same rule in respect to the left 
 company ; and the fire will thus be continued alternately. 
 
 36. The colonel will obsei've the same rule in the firing by wingv 
 
 37. The fire by file will commence in all the companies at once, 
 and will be executed as has been prescribed in the School of the 
 Company No. 55 and following. The fire by rank will be executed 
 by each rank alternately, as has been prescribed in the School of 
 the Company No. 58 and following. 
 
 38. The color-guard will not fire, but reserve itself for th«- 
 defense of the color. 
 
 The fire by company. 
 
 39. The colonel, wishing the fire by company to be executed, 
 will command : 
 
 1. Fire by company. 2. Com.mence firing. 
 
 40. At the first command, the captains and covering sergeants 
 will take the positions indicated in the school of the company, 
 No. 49. 
 
 41. The color and its guard will step back at the same time', so 
 as to bring the front rank of the guard in a line with the rear rank 
 of the battalion. This ride is general for all the different firings. 
 
 42. At the second command, the odd numbered companies will 
 commence to fire ; their captains will each give the commands 
 prescribed in the school of the company, No. 50, observing to pre- 
 cede the command company by that of first, third, fifth, or seventh, 
 according to the number of each. 
 
 43. The captains of the even numbered companies will give, in 
 their turn, the same commands, observing to precede them by the 
 number of their respective companies. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 95- 
 
 44. In order that tho odd numbered companies may not all firo 
 at once, their captains will observe, but only for the first discharge, 
 to give the command fire one after another ; thus, the captain of 
 the third company will not give the command fire until ho has 
 heai'd the fire of the first company; the captain of the fifth will 
 observe the same rule Avith respect to the third, and the captain of 
 the seventh the same rule with respect to the fifth. 
 
 45. The colonel will cause the fii-e to cease by the sound to cease- 
 firing ; at this sound, the men will execute what is prescribed in 
 the school of the company', No. G3 ; at the sound, for officere to 
 take their places after firing, the captains, covering sergeants, and 
 color-guard, will promptly resume their places in line of battle : 
 this rule is general/or all the firings. 
 
 The fire by wing. 
 
 46. When the colonel shall wish this fire to be executed, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. Fire by iving. 2. Right wing. 8. Ready. 4. Aim. 5. Fire. 
 
 6. Load. 
 
 47. The colonel will cause the wings to fire alternately, and he 
 will recommence the fire by the commands: 1. Eight wing ; 2. Aim; 
 3. Fire; 4. Load. L Left wing ; 2. Aim; 3. Fire; 4. Load; in 
 conforming to what is prescribed No. 35. 
 
 The fire by battalion. 
 
 48. The colonel will cause this fire lo be executed by the com- 
 mands last prescribed, substituting for the first two, 1. Fire by bat- 
 talion. 2. Battalion. 
 
 The fire by file. 
 
 49. To cause this to be executed, the colonel will command : 
 1. Fire by file. 2. Battalion. 3. Ready. 4. Commence firing. 
 
 50. At the fonrth command, the fire will commence on the right 
 of each company, as proscribed in the school of the company, No. 
 57. The colonel may, if he thinks proper, cause the tiro to com- 
 mence on the right of each platoon. 
 
 The fire by rank. 
 
 51. To cause this fire to be executed, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Fire by rank. 2. Battalion. 3. Ready. 4. Rear rank. 5. Aiif. 
 6. Fire. 7. Load. 
 
 52. This fire will bo executed as has boon explained in the school 
 of the company, No. 59, in following the progression proscribed 
 for the two ranks which shou'd fire alternately. 
 
 To fire by the rear rank. 
 63. When the colonel shall wish tho battalion to firo to the rem-, 
 he will command : 
 
96 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 f>-it\V. Face by the rear rank. 2. Battalion. 3. About — Face. ' i 
 
 54. At the fii'st command, the captains, covering sergeants, and 
 file closers will execute what has been prescribed in the school of 
 the company, No. 69 ; the color-bearer will pass into the rear 
 rank, and for this purpose, the corporal of his file will step before 
 the corporal next on his right to let the color-bearer pass, and will 
 then take his place in the front rank ; the lieutenant colonel, ad- 
 jutant, major, sergeant major, and the music will place themselves 
 before the front rank, and face to the rear, each opposite his place" 
 in the line of battle — the first two passing around the right, and 
 the others around the left of the battalion. 
 
 55. At the third command, the battalion will face about ; the 
 captains and covering sergeants observing what is prescribed in 
 the school of the company, No. 70. 
 
 . 56. The battalion facing thus by the rear rank, the colonel will 
 cause it to execute the diff'erent fires by the same commands as if 
 it were faced by the front rank. 
 
 57. The right and left wings will retain the same designations, 
 although faced about ; the companies also will preserve their 
 former designations, as first, second, third, etc. 
 
 58. The tire by file will commence on the left of each company, 
 now become the right. 
 
 59. The fire by rank will commence by the front rank, now be- 
 come the rear Sank. This rank will preserve its denomination. 
 
 60. The captains, covering sergeants, and color-guard will, at 
 the first command given by the colonel, take the places prescribed 
 for them in the fires, with the front rank leading. 
 
 61. The colonel, after firing to the rear, wishing to face the bat- 
 talion to its i^roper front, will command : 
 
 1. Face by the front rank. 2. Battalion. 3. About — Face, 
 
 62. At these commands, the battalion will return to its proper 
 front by the means prescribed Nos. 54 and 55. 
 
 63. The fire by file being that most used in war, the colonel will 
 give it the preference in the preparatory exercises, in order that 
 the battalion may be brought to execute it with the greatest possi- 
 ble regularity. 
 
 64. When the colonel may wish to give some relaxation to the 
 battalion, without breaking the ranks, he will execute what has 
 been prescribed in the school of the company, Nos. 37 and 38, or 
 Nosv 39 and 40. 
 
 65. When the colonel shall wish to cause arms to be stacked, he 
 will bring the battalion to ordered arms, and then command : 
 
 1. Stack — Arms. 2. Break ranks. 3, MaSch. 
 
 66. The colonel wishing the men to return to the ranks, will 
 cause attention to be sounded, at which the battalion will re-form 
 behind the stacks of arms. The sound being finished, the colonel,, 
 after causing the stacks to be broken, will command : ' ^^ 
 
SCHOOL oy THE BATTALION. 97 
 
 Battalion. 
 
 67. At this command, the men will fix their attontion, and re- 
 main immovable. 
 
 PART SECOND. 
 
 Different modes of passijig from the order in battle to the order in 
 
 column. 
 Article I. — To break to the right or the left into column. 
 
 68. Linos of hattlo will habitually break into column by com- 
 pany ; tho}^ may also break by division or by i)latoon. 
 
 61). It is hero supposed that the colonel wishes to break by com- 
 pany to the riglit ; he will command : 
 
 1. By company, right tcheel. 2. Marcu (or double quick — March). 
 
 70. At the first command, each captain will place himself rapid-^*': 
 ly before the ccntor of his company, and caution it that it has to' '' 
 wheel to the right ; each covering' sergeant will replace his cap- 
 tain in the front rank. 
 
 71. At the command march, each captaiR will break to the right, 
 according to the prinw]iles prescribed in the school of the company 
 No. 173; each captain will conform himself to what is prescribed" ' 
 for the chiefs of platoon ; the left guide, as soon as he can pass," ' 
 will place himself on the left of the front rank,^to cenduct the 
 marching flank, and when ho shall have approached near to the^ ' 
 ])erpcndicular, the captain Avill command: 1. Such company. 2.' " 
 Halt. 
 
 72. At the second command. whi<'h will be given at the instant 
 the left guide shall be at the distance of three paces from the per- 
 pendicular, the company will halt; the guide will advance and 
 place his left arm lightly against the l)reast of the captain, who 
 will establish him wi the alignment of the man M'ho has fiiced to 
 the right ; the covering sergeant will place himself correctly on the 
 alignment on the right t)f that man; which being executed, the 
 captain will align his company by the loft, command F'ront, and 
 place himself two paces before its center. 
 
 73. The captains having conimandod Front, the guides, althougk 
 some of them may not be in the direction of the preceding guides, 
 will stan<l fast, in order that the error of a company that has 
 wheeled too much or too little may not be projiagatcd ; the guides 
 not in tlie direction will readily come into it when the column is 
 put in march. 
 
 74. A battalion in line of battle will break intd column by com- 
 pany to the loft, according tt) the same principles, and by invorso 
 means; the covering sergeant of each company will conduct the 
 marching flank, and the left guide will place himself on the left of 
 the front rank at the moment tlx- company halts. 
 
 75. "When the battalion break.-:, by division, the indication divi- 
 •non will be substituted in the commands for thiit of company ; th« 
 chief of each division (the senior captain) will conform himself to 
 
98 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 what is prescribed for the chief of company, and will place himself 
 two paces before the center of his division ; the junior captain, if 
 not already there, will place himself in the interval between the 
 two ccmpanies in the front rank, and be covered by the covering 
 sergeant of the left company in the rear rank. The right guide of 
 the right company will be the right guide, and the left guide of 
 the left company, the left guide of the division. 
 
 76. When the battalion shall break by platoon to the right or to 
 the left, each first lieutenant will pass around to the left of his 
 company to place himself in front of the second platoon, and for 
 this purpose, each covering sergeant, except the one of the right 
 company, will step, for the moment, in rear of the right file of his 
 company. 
 
 77. When the battalion breaks by division to the right, and 
 there is an odd company, the captain of this company, (the left), 
 after wheeling into column, will cause it to oblique to the left, halt 
 it at company distance from the preceding division, place his left 
 guide on the direction of the column, and then align his company 
 by the left. AVhen the line breaks by division to the left, the odd 
 company will be in front; its captain, having wheeled it into col- 
 umn, will cause it to oblique to the right, halt it at division distance 
 from the division next in the rear, place his right guide on the 
 direction of the other guides, and align the company by the right. 
 
 78. The battalion being in column, the lieutenant colonel and 
 major will place themselves on the directing flank, the first abre«st 
 with the leading subdivision, and the other abreast with the last, 
 and both six paces from the flank. The adjutant will be near the 
 lieutenant-colonel, and the sergeant-major near the major. 
 
 79. The colonel will have no fixed place as the instructor of his 
 battalion ; but in columns composed of many battalions, he will 
 place himself habitually on the directing flank fifteen or twenty 
 paces from the guides, and abreast with the center of his battalion. 
 
 80. When the colonel shall wish to move the column forward 
 without halting it, he will caution the battalion to that eftect, and 
 command : 
 
 1. By company^ right wheel. 2. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 81. At the first command, the captains of companies will exe- 
 cute what is prescribed for breaking into a column from a halt. 
 
 82. At the second command, they will remain in tront of their 
 comlfcinies to superintend the movement; the companies will wheel 
 to the right on fixed pivots as indicated in the School of the Com- 
 pany No. 185 ; the lett guides will conform to what is prescribed 
 above ; when they shall arrive near the perpendicular, the colonel 
 will command : 
 
 3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Q-uide left. 
 
 83. At the third command, each covering sergeant will place 
 himself by the right side of the man on the right of the front rank 
 of his company. At the fourth command, which will be given at 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 99 
 
 the instant the wheel is coinplctod, the companies will cease to 
 wheel and march Ptraight forward. At the fitlli, the men will take 
 the toiich of elbows to the left. The leadiiiiu;; guide will march in 
 the direction indicated to him by the lieutenant-colonel. Th* 
 guides will immediately conform themselves to the principles of 
 the march in column, School of the Company No. 200, and fol- 
 lowing. 
 
 84. If the battalion be marching in line of battle, the colonel 
 will cause it to wheel to the right or left, by the same commands 
 and the same means; but he should previous]}' caution the battal- 
 ion that it is to continue the march. 
 
 85. A battalion in line of battle will break into column by 
 company to the left, according to the same principles, by inverse 
 means; the covering sergeant of each company will conduct the 
 marching flank, and the left guides will ])lace themselves on the 
 left of their respective companies at the command forward. 
 
 86. When a battalion has to prolong itself in column towards 
 the right or left, or has to direct its march in column perpendicu- 
 larly or diagonally in front, or in rear of either flank, the colonel 
 will cause it to break by company to the right or left, as has just 
 been prescribed ; but when the line breaks to the rij^ht. in 6rder 
 to march towards the left, or the reverse, the colontd will com- 
 mand : Break to the right to march to the left, or break to the left to 
 march 4o the right, before giving the command, hy company, right (or 
 left) xihecl. As soon as the battalion is broken, the lieutenant 
 colonel will place a marker abreast with the right guide of the 
 leading company. The instant the column is put in motion, ^his 
 company will wheel to the left (or right) march ten paces to the 
 front without changing the guide, and wheel again to the left (or 
 right). The second wheel being completed, the captain will imme- 
 diately command guide left (or right.) The guide of this company 
 will march in a dire<;tion parallel to the guides of the column. 
 The licutcnant-colonid will be careful to place a second marker at 
 tUo point where the first company is to change direction the 
 second time. 
 
 Arttclk ir. — To break to the rear, hy the right or left, into column, 
 and to advance or retire by t/ie rigfU or Left of companies. 
 
 i 
 
100 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 87. When the colonel shall wish to cause the battalion to break 
 to the rear, bj the right, into coluinn. by company, he will 
 command: ' •,:\'''"''^'^^ ^'^ ""■"■' ^ ' 
 
 1. JBy the right of companies to the' rear inio' column. 2. Battalion 
 right — Face. 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 88. At the first command, each captain will place himself before 
 the center of his company, and caution it to face to the right; the 
 covering sergeants will step into the front rank. 
 
 89. At the second command, the battalion will face to the right; 
 each captain will hasten to the right of the company, and break 
 two files to the rear ; the first file will break the whole depth of 
 the two ranks; the second file less; which being executed, the 
 captain will place himself so that his breast ma}' touch lightly the 
 left arm of the front rank man of the last file in the company next 
 on the right of his own. The captain of the right company will 
 place himself as if there were a company on his right, and will 
 align himself on the other captains. The covering sergeant of 
 each company will break to the rear with the right files, and place 
 himself before the front rank of the first file, to conduct him. 
 
 90. At the command march, the first file of each company will 
 wheel to the right ; the covering sergeant, placed before this file, 
 will conduct it perpendicularly to the rear. The other files will 
 come successively to wheel on the same spot. The captains will 
 stand fast, sec their companies file past, and at the instant thelkst 
 file shall have wheeled, each captain will command : 
 
 '^X^ Such company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Xe/f— Dress. 
 
 91. At the instant the company faces to the front, its left guide 
 Avill place himself so that his left arm may touch lightly the breast 
 of his captain. 
 
 92. At the fourth command, the company will align itself on its 
 left guide, .the captain so directing it, that the new alignment may 
 be perpendicular to that which the company had occupied in line 
 of battle, and, the better to judge this, he will step back two paces )• 
 from the flank. 
 
 93. The company being aligned, the captain will command :,j;^ 
 Front, and take his place before its center. 
 
 94. The battalion marching in line of battle, when the colonel 
 shall wish to break into column by company, to the rear, by the 
 right, he will command : 
 
 1. By the right of companies to the rear into column. 2. Battalion, by 
 the right flank. 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 95. At the first command, each captain will step briskly in front 
 of the center of his company, and caution it to face by the right 
 flank. 
 
 96. At the command march, the battalion will face to the right ; 
 each captain will move rapidly to the right of his company, and 
 cause it to break to the right ; the first file of each company will 
 
 \ 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 101 
 
 wheel to the right, and the cov^eriug sergeant, placed in front of 
 thin file, will conduct it jicrpcndicularly to the roar; the other files- 
 will wheel successively ut the same place as the first. The cap- 
 tains will sec their companies file past them; when the last files 
 have wheeled, the colonel will command : 
 
 3. Battalion, by the. left flank — March. 4. Guide left. 
 
 97. At the command march, the companies will face to the left, 
 and march in column in the new direction. The captains will 
 place themselves in front of the centers of their respective com- 
 panies. At the fourth command, the guides will conform to the 
 principles of the march in column; the leading one will move in 
 the direction indicated to him by the lieutenant-colonel. The men 
 will take the touch of elbows to the left. 
 
 98. To break to the rear by the left, the colonel will give the 
 same commands as in the case of breaking to the rear by the 
 ^ight, substituting the indication icft for that of right. 
 
 99. The movement will be executed according to the same prin- 
 ciples. Each captain will hasten to the left of his company, cause 
 the first two files to break to the rear, and then place his breast 
 against the right file of the company next to the left of his own, 
 in the manner prescnbed above. 
 
 100. As soon as the two files break to the rear, the left guide of 
 each company will place himself before the front rank man of the 
 headmost file, to conduct him. 
 
 101. The instant the companies face to the front, the right guide 
 of each will place himself so that hip right arm may lightly touch 
 the breast of his captain. '. 
 
 102. The battalion ma^'^ be broken fcy divisions to the rear, by 
 the right or left, in like manner ; in this case the indication divi- 
 sions will be substituted, in the first command, for that of cojnpanics; 
 the chiefs of division will conform themselves to what is prescribed 
 for the chiefs of company. The junior captain in each division will 
 place himself, when t4ic division faces to a flank, by the side of a 
 covering sergeant of the left company, who steps into the front 
 rank. 
 
 103. If there bo an odd number c»f companies, and the battalion 
 breaks by division to the rear, whether b^' the right or left, the cap- 
 tain of the left company will^onform to what is prescribed No. 77. 
 
 104. This manner of breaking into column being at once the 
 most prompt and regular, will be preferred on actual service, un- 
 less there be some particular reason for breaking to the front. 
 
 10,5. If the battalion be in line and at a halt, and the colonel 
 shoultl wish to a<lvancc or retire by the right of companies, he will 
 command : 
 1. By the right of companie.^ to the front (or rear), 2. Battalion, right 
 
 Face. 3. March (or double quick— ^i Av^rn) . 4. Guide right, 
 
 (left) or (center). 
 
 IOC. At the first command, each captain will move rapidly two 
 
102 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 paces in front of the center of his company, and caution it to face to 
 the right ; the covering sergeants will replace the captains in the 
 front rank. 
 
 107. At the second command, the battalion will face to the right, 
 and each captain moving quickly to the right of his company will 
 cause files to break to the front, according to the principles indica- 
 ted No. 89. 
 
 108. At the command inarch, each captain, placing himself on 
 the left of his leading guide, will conduct his companj'^ perpendicu- 
 larly to the original line. At the fourth command, the guide of 
 each company will dress to the right, left, or center, according to 
 the indication given, taking care to preserve accurately his distance. 
 
 109. If the colonel should wish to move to the front, or rear, by 
 the left of companies, the movement will be executed by the same 
 means and the same commands, substituting left for 7ight. 
 
 110. If the battalion be in march, and the colonel should wish to 
 advance or retire by the right of companies, he will command : 
 
 1. By the right of coynpanies to the front (or j'ear). 2. Battalion, by 
 the right flank. 3. Ma-rch (or double quick — March). 4. Guide 
 right (left) or (center); 
 
 111. "Which will be executed according to the principles and 
 means prescribed Kos. 95 and following, and 106 and following. 
 At the first command, the color and general guides will take their 
 places as in column. 
 
 112. If the colonel should wish to advance or retire by the left 
 of companies, the movement will be executed by the same means 
 and the same commands, substituting left for right. 
 
 113. If the battalion be advancing by the right or left of com- 
 panies, and the colonel should wish to form line to the front, he 
 will comniand : 
 
 1. By companies into line. 2. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 3. Guide center. 
 
 114. At the command march, briskly rejieated by the captains, 
 each company will bo formed into ling, as prescribed in the school 
 of the company, No. 154. 
 
 115. At the third command, the color and geoieral guides will 
 move rapidly to their places in line, as will be hereinafter pre- 
 scribed No. 405. * 
 
 116. If the battalion be retiring by the right or left of compa- 
 nies, and the colonel should wish to form line facing the enemy, he 
 will first cause the companies to face about Avhile marching, and im- 
 mediately form in line by the commands and means prescribed 
 No. 113, and following. 
 
 iijuq^^ 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 103 
 
 Article III. — To ploy the battalion into close column. 
 
 
 3: 
 
 "'«:::=3 
 
 ll!lllMllfWWl!iiMi)liy 
 
 iilifiHiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii iiiiiF 
 lllillliir 
 
 '^lilli)lllI]Ii)lllllDlfflllM'lll■!!'le' 
 
 Iig.2 
 
 fg;mmmf;MMBM^j}' 
 
 %3 
 
 S 
 
 %,. 
 
 ::^^ - ■ :! 'e=:Trr=j^ 
 
 Ml 
 
 117. This movement may be executed by company or by divi- 
 sion, on the right or left subdivision, rifjbt or left in front. 
 
 118. The examples in this school will suppose the presence of 
 four divisions, with directions for an odd company ; but what will 
 be prescribed for four will serve equally for two, three or five di- 
 visions. 
 
 lin. To plo3' the battalion into close column by division in rear 
 of the first, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Clo.<^e column, by dii'ision. 2. On the first division, jight in front. 
 3. Batfolion, right — Fack. 4. Kauch (or double quick — March). 
 
 120. At the second command, all the chiefnof divisif>n will place 
 themselves before the centers of their divisicms; the chief of the 
 first will cnution it to stand fast ; the chiefs of the three others will 
 remind thcjn that they wiil have to face t^o the right, and the cov- 
 ering sergeant of the right cf^mipany of each division will replace 
 his captjiin in the front rank, as soon as the latter steps out. 
 
 121. At the third command, the last three divinions will face to 
 the right ; the chief*of each division will hasten to its right, and 
 
104 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 cause files to be broken to the rear, as indicated No. 89 ; the right 
 guide will break at the same time, and place himself before the 
 front rank man of the first file, to conduct him, and each chief 
 of division will place himself by the side of this guide. 
 
 122. The moment these divisions face to the right, the junior 
 captain in each will place himself on the left of the covering ser- 
 geant of the left company, who will place himself in the front rank. 
 This rule is cjeneralfor all the ployments by division. 
 
 123. At the command mart'A, the chief of the first division will 
 a.dd, guide left ; at this, its left guide will place himself on its left, 
 as soon as the movement of the second division may permit, and 
 the file closers will advance one pacdupon the rear rank. 
 
 124. All the other divisions, each conducted by its chief, will 
 step off together, to take their places in the column ; the second 
 will gain, in wheeling by file to the rear, the space of six paces, 
 which ought to separate its guide from the guide of the first divi- 
 sion, and so direct its march as to enter the column on a line par- 
 allel to this division ; the third and fourth divisions will direct 
 themselves diagonally towards, but a little in rear of, the points at 
 which they ought, respectively, to enter the column ; at six paces 
 from the left flank of the column, the head of each of these divi- 
 sions will incline a little to the left, in order to enter the column 
 as has just been prescribed for the second, taking care also to leave 
 the distance of six paces between its guide and the guide of the 
 preceding division. At the moment the divisions put themselves 
 in march to enter the column, the file closersof each will incline to 
 the left, so as to bring themselves to the distance of a pace from 
 the rear rank. 
 
 125. Each chief of these three divisions will conduct hisdivision 
 till he' shall be up with the guide of the directing one ; the chief 
 will then himself halt, see his division file pass, and halt it the in- 
 stant the last file shall have passed, commanding : 1. Such division; 
 2. Halt ; 3. Front ; 4. ie/!:— Dress. 
 
 126. At the second command, the division will halt; the left 
 guide will place himself promptly on the direction, six paces from 
 the guide which precedes him,- in order that, the column being 
 formed, the divisions may be separated the distance of four paces. 
 
 127. At the third command, the division will face to the front ; 
 at the fourth, it will be aligned by its chief,, who will pl^ee himself 
 two paces outside of his guide, and direct the alignment bo that 
 his division may be parallel to that which precedes — which being 
 done, he will coiiimaiid. Front, and place himself before the cen- 
 ter of his division. 
 
 128. If any division, after the command front, be not at its pro- 
 per distance, and this can only happen through the negligence of 
 its chief, such division will remain in its place, in order that the 
 fault may not be propagated. 
 
 129. The colonel will superintend the execution of the move- 
 ment, and cause the prescribed principles to be observed. 
 
. SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 106 
 
 180. The lieutenant-colonel, placing himself in succession in rear 
 of the left guides, will assure tlicra on the direction as they arrive, 
 and then move to his place outside of the left flank of the column 
 eix paces from, and abreast with, the first division. In assuring 
 the guides on the direction, ho will be a mere observer, unless one 
 or more should fail to cover exactly the guide or guides already 
 established. This rule is general. 
 
 131. The major will follow the movement abreast Avith the left 
 of the fourth division, and afterwards take his position outside 
 of the left flank of the column, six paces from, and abreast with, 
 this division. 
 
 132. To ploy the battalion in front of the first division, the colo- 
 nel will give the "same commands, substituting the indication left 
 for that of right in front. 
 
 133. At the second and third commands, the chiefs of division 
 and the junior captains will conform themselves to what is pre- 
 scribed, Xos. 120, 121, 122 ; but the chiefs of the last three divi- 
 sions, instead of causing the first two files to break to the rear, 
 will cause them to break to the front. 
 
 134. At the fourth command, the chief of the first division Avill 
 add : Guide right. 
 
 135. The three other divisions will step oflf together to take their 
 places in the column in front of the directing division ; each will 
 direct itself as prescribed, ISTo. 124, and will enter in such manner 
 that, when halted, its guide may find himself six paces from the 
 guide of the division next previously oetablishcd in the column. 
 
 136. Each chief of these divisions will conduct his division, till 
 his right guide shall be nearly up with the guide of the directing 
 one; he will then halt his division, and cause it to face to the front ; 
 at the instant it halts, its right guide will face to the rear, place 
 himself six paces from the preceding guide, and cover him exact- 
 ly — which being done, the chief will align his division by the 
 right. 
 
 137. The lieutenant-colonel, placed in front of the right guide 
 of the first division, Avill assure the guides on the direction as they 
 Buccessivoly arrive, and then move outside of the right flank of the 
 column, to a point six paces from, and abreast with, the fourth divi- 
 sion, now in front. 
 
 138. The major will conform himself to what is prescribed, No. 
 131, and then move outside of the right flank of the column, six 
 paces from, and abreast with, the first division, now in the rear. 
 
 139. The movement being ended, tho colonel will command : 
 
 Chiides, about — Face. 
 
 140. At tiu^. ihu guides, who arc faced to tiie rcaj-. will face to 
 the front. 
 
 141. To jtloy the battalion in rear, or in front of Uic fourth divi- 
 sion, the colonel will command : 
 
106 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 1. Close column by division. 2. On the fourth division^ left (or right) 
 in front. 3. Battalion, left — Pace. 4. March, (ov double quick — 
 March). 
 
 142. These movements will be executed according to the prin- 
 ciples of those which precede, but by inverse means : the fourth 
 division on which the battalion ploys will stand fast ; the instant 
 the movement commences, its chief will command, guide right (or 
 left). 
 
 143. The foregoing examples embrace all the principles : thus, 
 when the colonel shall wish to ploy the battalion on an interior di- 
 vision, he will command : 
 
 1. Close column by division. 2. On such division, right (or left) in 
 front. 3. Battalion inwards. — Face. 4. March {or double quick — 
 March). 
 
 144. The instant the movement commences, the chief of the di- 
 recting division will command, guide left (or right). 
 
 145. The divisions which, in the order in battle, are to the right 
 of the directing division, will face to the left ; those which are to 
 the left, will face to the right. 
 
 146. If the right is to bo in front, the right divisions will ploy 
 in front of the directing division, and the left in its rear; the re- 
 verse, if the left is to be in front. And in all the foregoing suppo- 
 sitions, the division or divisions contiguous to the directing one, 
 in wheeling by frlo to the front or rear, will gain the space of six 
 paces, which ought to separate their guides from the guide of the 
 directing division. * 
 
 147. In all the ployments on an interior division, the lieutenant- 
 colonel will assure the positions of the guides in front, and the ma- 
 jor those in rear of the directing division. 
 
 148. If the battalion be in march, instead of at a halt, the 
 movement will be executed by combining the two gaits of quick 
 and double quick time, and always in rear of one of the flank di- 
 visions. 
 
 149. The battalion being in march, to ploy it in rear of the first 
 division, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Close column by division. 2. On the first division. 3. Battalion — 
 by the right flank. 4. Double quick — March. 
 
 150. At the second command, each chief of division will move 
 rapidly before the center of his division and caution it to face to 
 the right. 
 
 151. The chief of the first division will caution it to continue to 
 march to the front, and he will command : Quick march. 
 
 152. At the command march, the chief of the first division will 
 command : Guide left. At this, the left guide will move to the left 
 flank of the division and direct himself on the point indicated. 
 
 153. The three other divisions will face to the right and move ofi" 
 in double quick time, breaking to the right to take their places in 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 107 
 
 <x)himn ; each chief of division will move rapidly to tho right of 
 his division in order to conduct it. The files will be careful to pro- 
 serve their distances, and to march with a uniform and decideii 
 step. The cc»lor-bearer and general guides will retake their places 
 in the ranks. 
 
 154. The second division will immediately enter the column, 
 marching parallel to the first division; its chief will allow it to file 
 past him. and when the last file is abreast of him, will command : 
 1. Second division, hy the left /ianii — March. 2. (rwuf^ /c/^, and place 
 himself in front of the center of his division. 
 
 155. At the command march, the division will face to the left; 
 at the second command, the left guide will march in the trace of 
 of the left guiue oTthe first division ; the men will take the touch 
 of elbows to the left. When the second division has closed to its 
 proper distance, its chief will command : Quick time — March. This 
 division will then change its step to quick time. 
 
 156. The chiefs of the third and fourth divisions will execute 
 their movements according to the same principles, taking care to 
 gain as much ground as possible toward the head of the column. 
 
 157. If the battalion has been previously marching in line at 
 double quick time, when the fourth division shall have gained \is 
 distance, the colonel will command : Double quick — March. 
 
 15S. In this movement, the lieutenant-colonel will move rapidly 
 to the side of the leading guide, give him a point of direction, and 
 then follow the movements of the first division. The major will 
 follow the movement abreast with the left of tho fourth division. 
 
 Bemarks on ploying, the Battalion into column. 
 
 L50. The battalion may be ployed into column at full, or half 
 distance, on the same principles, and by the same commands, sub- 
 stituting for the first command: Column at full (or half) distance, 
 by division. 
 
 160. In the ployments and movements in column, when the sub- 
 divisions execute the movements successively, such as — to take or 
 close distances ; tp change direction by the flank of subdivisions, 
 each chief of subdivision will cause his men to support arms after 
 having aligned it and commanded, Front. 
 
108 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 PART THIRD. 
 
 Article I. — To march in column at full distance. 
 
 Bg2 
 
 zn 
 
 
 ■qr« 
 
 M P 
 
 M H 
 
 .M_ r 
 
 •-d T3 
 
 1^3. 
 
 161. When the colonel shall Avisli to put the colnmn in march, 
 he will indicate to the leadini^ guide two distinct objects in front 
 on the line which the guide ought to follow. This guide will im- 
 mediately put his shoulders in a square with that line, take the 
 more distant object as the point of direction, and the nearer one 
 as the intermediate point. ' 
 
 162. If only a single prominent object present itself in the direc- 
 tion the guide has to follow, he will face to it as before, and imme- 
 diately endeavor to catch on the ground some intermediate point, 
 by which to give steadiness to his march on the point of direction. 
 
 163. There being no prominent object to serve as the point of 
 direction, the colonel will dispatch the lieutenant-colonel or adju- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 109 
 
 tant to place himself forty paces in advance, facing the column, 
 and by a sign of the Hword establish him on the direction ho may 
 wish to give to the leading guide ; that officer being thu8 placed, 
 thia guide Avill take him as the point of direction, conforming him- 
 self fo what is prescribed in the school of the compan}-, No. 87. 
 
 164. These dispositions being made, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Colwnn forward. 2. Guide left (or right.) 3. March, (or double 
 quick — March.) 
 
 165. At the command anarch, briskly repeated by the chiefs of 
 subdivision, the column will put itself in march, conforming to 
 what is prescribed in the school of the company No. 200 and fol- 
 lowing. 
 
 16G. The leading guide may always maintain himself correctly 
 on the direction by keo])ing steadily in view the two pointa indi- 
 cated to him, or chosen by himself; if these points have a certain 
 olovation, he may be assured he is on the true direction, when 
 the nearer masks the more distant point. 
 
 107. The following guides will preserve with exactness both step 
 and distance; each will march in the trace of the guide who im- 
 mediately precedes him, without occupying himsell' with the gen- 
 eral dii-ection. 
 
 168. The lieutenant-colonel will hold himself, habitually, abreast 
 with the leading guide, to see that he does not deviate from the 
 direction, and will observe, also, that the next guide marched ex- 
 actly in the trace of the first. 
 
 1G9. The major will generally be abreast with the lust subdivis- 
 ion ; he will see that each guide marches exactly in the trace of 
 the one immediately preceding ; if either deviate from the direc- 
 tion, the major will promptly rectify the error, and prevent itfl 
 being ]-)ropagated ; but he need not interfere, in this way, imless 
 the deviation has become sensible, or material. 
 
 170. The column being in march, the colonel will frequently 
 cause the a^ou/ to be executed while marching; to this eft'ect, he 
 will command : 
 
 1. Batf(dioH, right about. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 
 
 171. At the second command, the companies will face to the right 
 abou't, and the column will then nvnrch forward in an opposite di- 
 rection ; the chiefs of subdivision will remain behind the front rank, 
 the file closers in front of the rear rank, and the guides will ])lace 
 themselves in the same rank. The lieutenant-colonel will remain 
 abreast of the first division, now in rear; the major will give a 
 point of direction to the leading guide, and march abreast of him. 
 
 172. The colonel avIII hold liimself habitually on the directing 
 flank ; he will look to the step and to the distances, ami seo that 
 all the principlca prescribed for the mardi in column, school of the 
 company, arc observed. 
 
 17;^. These means, which the practice in that school ought tX) 
 liavo rendered familiar, will give sufficient exactness to the dircc- 
 
110 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 tion of the column, and also enable it to fovra. forward or faced to 
 the rear, on the right, or 07i the left, into line of battle, and to dose iii 
 ma^s. 
 
 174. But when a column, arriving in front, or in rear of the line 
 of battle, or, rather, on one of the extremities of that line, has to 
 prolong itself on it, in order to form to the left or to the right into 
 line of battle, then, as it is essential, to prevent the columns from 
 cutting the line, or sensibly deviating from it, other means, as fol- 
 lows, will be employed: 
 
 The column arriving in froi^t of the line of battle, to 'prolong it on this 
 
 line. 
 
 175. If the column right in front arrive in front of the line of 
 battle, as it should cross it and find itself four paces beyond it 
 after having changed direction, the colonel will cause to be placed, 
 in advance, a marker on the Hue to indicate the point at which 
 the column ought to cross it, and another marker to indicate the 
 poifit where the first subdivision should commence to wheel ; he 
 will be so placed that when the wheel is executed, the left guide 
 will find himself four paces witliin the line of battle. The chief 
 of the leading subdivision, when the head of the column shall 
 have arrived near the lino, will take the guide to the right, and 
 this guide will immediately direct himself on the second marker. 
 On arriving abreast of him, this subdivision will be wheeled to the 
 left, and when the Avheel is completed, the guide will be changed 
 again to the left ; this guide will then march parallel to the line 
 of battle by the means to be hereinafter indicated. 
 
 176. The instant the first subdivision wheels, the right general 
 guide, who, by a caution from the lieutenant-colonel, will before 
 have placed himself on the line of battle at the point where the 
 column crosses it, and who will have faced to the two points of di- 
 rection in his front, indicated by the colonel, will march forward 
 correctly on the prolongation of those points. 
 
 177. The color-bearer will j^lace himself in like manner on the 
 line of battle, and, at the instant the color subdivision wheels, he 
 will prolong his march on that line, abreast with this subdivision, 
 taking care to carry the color lance beforj the center of his per- 
 son, and to maintain himself exacfly in the direction of the gene- 
 ral guide who precedes him, and the point of direction in front 
 Avhich will have been indicated to him. 
 
 178. Finally, the left guide will place himself in the same man- 
 ner on the line of battle ; and, at the instant the last subdivision 
 of the battalion wheels, he will march correctly in the direction of 
 the color-bearer and the other general guide. 
 
 179. The guide of the first subdivision will march steadily \\f^ 
 abreast with the right general guide, and about four paces to his.^.j 
 right; each of the guides of the following subdivisions will marchf 
 in the trace of the guide who immediately precedes him, as pre-v«jl 
 scribed, No. "107. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. ' 111 
 
 180. The colonel, placed outside of the general guides, Avill see 
 that the column marches nearly parallel to, ami about lour paces 
 within these guides. 
 
 181. The lie\itenanc-colonel and major will look to the direction 
 of the general guides, and to this end, place themselves sometimes 
 in rear of the color-hearer, or the left general guide. 
 
 182. If the column be composed of several battalions, the gene- 
 ral guides of each will successively place themselves on the line of 
 battle to prolong their march on this line, as the leading subdivi- 
 Bion, that of the color, and the one in the rear of their battalion, 
 shall wheel into the new direction ; these guides Avill confoi-m 
 themselves respccth-ely, as will also the colonel, lieutenant-colonel 
 and major, to what is prescribed above for those of the leading 
 battalion. 
 
 183. In the case of several battalions, tlie lieutenant-colonel of 
 each will maintain steadily the guide of his leading subdivision 
 about four paces within the line of general guides, even should the 
 last subdivisions of the battalion immediately preceding deviate 
 from the parallelism, in order that the false direction of one batta- 
 lion may not influence that of the battalions which follow. 
 
 The column arriving behind the line of battle^ to prolong it on this line. 
 
 184. If the column, right in front, arrive behind the line of bat- 
 tle, as it ought to tind itself four paces within this line, after having 
 changed direction, the colonel will cause a marker to be ])Iaccd at 
 the point where, according to that condition, the first subdivision 
 ought to commence wheeling. Another marker will be established 
 on the line of battle, t-o indicate the point at which the general 
 guides ought, in succession, to begin to prolong themselves on that 
 line; he will be so placed that each subdivision, having finished it« 
 wheel, may find itself nearly in a line with this marker. 
 
 185. At the instant the first subdivision, after having wheeled to 
 the right, begins to prolong itself parallelly to the line of battle, 
 the leading general guide, placed in advance on that line, will 
 direct himself on the two points taken in his front; the color- 
 bearer and the other general guide will successively place them- 
 selves on the same line the instant that their renpective subdiviBionii 
 fihall have finished their wheel. 
 
 186. If the column bo composed <jf several battalions, the gen- 
 eral guides of the following battalions will euccesKivcly execute 
 what has been just prescribed for those of the leading battalion, 
 and the whole will conform themselves, as well as the guides of 
 8ubdivisionf», and the field officers of the several battalions, to what 
 i" 'ndicaled above for a column arriving in front of the line of 
 battle. 
 
 1«7. In a column, left in tVoiit. arriving in iVoiit or in rear of 
 the lino of battle, theeio movenKut<j will bo executed on the sjime 
 principloe, and by ioTcrse means. 
 
112 
 
 SCHOOL or THE BATTALION. 
 
 The column arriving on the right or the left of the line of battle, to 
 prolong it on this line. 
 188. If the column, instead of arriving in front or in rear of the 
 line of battle, arrive on its right or left, and if it have to prolong 
 itself on that line, in order afterwards to form to the left or right 
 into line of battle, the colonel will bring the color and general 
 o-uides on the flank of the column by the command color and general 
 guides on the line; and these guides will proiong themselves on 
 the line of battle, conforming to what is prescribed abovb. 
 
 Article III. — To change direction in column at full distance. 
 
 1 
 
 ■■s^lHijjjgiiiijiiiiJ 
 
 
 
 -ff- 
 
 231. The column being in march in the cadenced step, when the 
 colonel shall wish to cause it to change direction, he will go to the -j 
 point at which the change ought to be commenced, and establish a:.iJO 
 marker there, presenting the breast to the flank of the column ; no 
 this marker, no matter to which side the change of direction is to ""2, 
 be made, will be posted on the opposite side, and he will remain in 
 position till the last subdivision of the battalion shall have passed. 
 The leading subdivision being within a few paces of the marker,^ 
 the colonel will command : ,Ai 
 
 i. Head of column to the left (or right). "^ 
 
 232. At this, the chief of the leading subdivision, will immedi- 
 ately take the guide on the side opposite the change of direction, 
 if not already there. This guide will direct himself so as to graze 
 the breast of the marker ; arrived at this point, the chief will 
 cause his subdivision to change direction by the commands and..,^ 
 according to the principles prescribed in the School of the Com- ' 
 pany. When the Avheel is completed, the chief of this subdivision 
 ■will retake the guide, if changed, on the side of the primitive 
 ■direction. 
 
 233. The chief of each succeeding subdivision, as well as theA j 
 guides, will conform to what has just been explained for the lead- 
 ing subdivision. 
 
 235. The colonel will carefully see that the guide of each subdi 
 
 od3 
 
 vision, in wheeling, does not throw himself without or within, but''*^' 
 
SCHOOL. OF THE BATTALION. 113 
 
 paescH over all the points of the are of the circle, wliieh he ought 
 to describe. 
 
 233. As often as no distinct object jjresents itself in the new 
 direction, the lieutenant -colonel will place himself upon it in 
 advance, at the distance of thirty or forty paces fi-oni the marker, 
 and be assured in this direction by the colonel ; the leading guide 
 will take, the moment he shall have changed direction, two points 
 on the ground in the straight line which, drawn from himself, 
 would pass between the heels of the lieutenant-colonel, taking, 
 afterwards, new points as he advances. 
 
 23(). The major will see that the guides direct themselves on the 
 marker, posted at the ])oint of change, so as to graze his breast. 
 
 237. If the column be composed of several battalions, the lieu- 
 tenant-colonel of the second, will cause the n\arker of the first 
 battalion, to be' replaced as soon as the last subdivision of this bat- 
 talion shall have passed ; this disposition will be observed fey bat- 
 talion after battalion, to the reiu" of the column. 
 
 AuTicLE IV. — To halt the column. 
 
 239. The cohimn being in marr-h. when the colonel shall wish to 
 halt it. he will command : 
 
 1. Columv. 2. Halt. 
 
 240. At the second command, briskly repeated by the captains, 
 the column will halt; no guide will stir, though he may have lost 
 his distance, or be out of the. direction of the preceding guides. 
 
 241. The column being in march, in double quick time, will bo 
 kalted by the same commands. At the command halt^ the men 
 will halt in their places, and will themselves rectify their positions 
 in the ranks. 
 
 242. The column being halted, when the colonel shall wish to 
 form it into line of battle, he will move a little in front of the 
 leading guide, and face to him ; this guide and the following one 
 will fix their eyes on the colonel, in order promptly to conform 
 themselves to his directions. 
 
 243. If the colonel judge it not necessary to give a general 
 direction to the guides, he will limit himself to rectifying the posi- 
 tion of such as may be without, or witliin the direction, by tiie 
 command guiik of (such) company, or yuiJcs of (such) companies^ to 
 thcrirjht, {or to the left;) at this command, the guides designated 
 will place themselves on the direction ; the others will stand fast. 
 
 244. If on the contrary, the colonel judge it necessary to give a 
 general direct i<jn to the guides of the column, he will place the 
 fii>t t\v(i (III ilic (lir.'ctiun he shall have chosen, and fimmand : 
 
 Guides., cover. 
 24.J. At tlii>, tlic lulhjwiiig gui<les will ]»romptly j)lace themselves 
 on the direction covering the first two in tile, and each precisely at 
 a distance e<jual t<» the front ot' his company, from the guide im- 
 rae<l lately preceding ; the lieutenant -colonel will asHun.' them in 
 ll>e direction, and the colom-l will command : 
 
114 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 Left (or right) — Dress. 
 
 248. At this command, the f^uide of each comimu}- of the di- 
 recting flank will step promjjtly into the direction of the general 
 guides, and face to the front. The lieutenant-colonel, placed in 
 front of, and facing to, the leading general guide, and the major, 
 placed in rear of the rearmost one, will promptly align the com- 
 pany guides. 
 
 249. The colonel, having verified the direction of the guides, Avill 
 command : • 
 
 Left (or right) — Dress. 
 
 250. This will be executed as prescribed, No. 246. 
 Article V. — To close the column to half distance, or in mass. 
 
 252. A column by company being at full distance right in front, 
 and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to cause it to close to 
 half distance, on the leading company, he will command : 
 
 1. To half distance, close column. 2. March (or double quick — 
 ', March"). 
 
 253. At the first command, the captain of tlie leading company 
 will caution it to stand fast. 
 
 254. At the command march, which will be repeated by all the 
 captains, except the captain of the leading company, this company 
 will stand fast, and its chief will align it by the left; the file clo- 
 sers will close one pace upon the rear rank. 
 
 255. All the other companies will continue to march, and as each 
 in succession arrives at platoon distance from the one which pre- 
 cedes, its captain will halt it. 
 
 256. At the instant that each company halts, its guide will place 
 himself on the direction of the guides who precede, and the cap- 
 tain will align the company by the left ; the file closers will close 
 one pace upon the rear rank. 
 
 257. No particular attention need be given to the general direc- 
 tion of the guides before they respectively halt ; it will suffice if 
 each follow in the trace of the one who precedes him. 
 
 258. The colonel, on the side of the guides, will superintend the 
 execution of the movement, observing that the captains halt their 
 companies exactly at platoon distance the one from the other. 
 
 259. The lieutenant-colonel, a few paces in front, will fiice to the 
 leading guide and assure the positions of the following guides as 
 they successively place themselves on the direction. 
 
 260. The major will follow the movement abreast with the last 
 guide. 
 
 261. If the column be in march, the colonel will cause it to close 
 by the same commands. 
 
 262. If the column be marching in double quick time, at the 
 first command, the captain of the leading company will command 
 qxdck time; the chiefs of the other companies will caution them to 
 continue their march. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALOIN. 
 
 115 
 
 :" r 
 
 263. At the command march, the leading company will march in 
 quick, and the other companies in double quick time ; and as each 
 arrives at platoon distance from the preceding one, its chief will 
 cause it to march in quick time. 
 
 264. Wlien the rearmost company shall have gained its distance, 
 the colonel will command : 
 
 Bonhlc quick — March. 
 To close the column on the eighth, or rearmost company. 
 
 Pi 
 
 
 L 
 
 L p 
 
 L 
 
 - 
 
 i 
 
 n r ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 -^ 
 
 -> 
 
 -V 
 
 -> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ri E 
 
 r b 
 
 r 
 
 H 
 
 r... 
 
 LLu.. 
 
 ^ 
 
 I ■ 
 
 267. The column being at a halt, if instead of causing it to close 
 to half distance on the iirst company, the colonel should wish to 
 ciuse it to close on the eighth, he will command : 
 
 Battalion^ 
 5. 31arcu 
 
 1. On the eighth company, to half distance close column. 2 
 about — Face. 3. Column fonrar'l. 4. Ouide right. 
 (or double quick — March). 
 
 268. At the second command, all the companies, except the 
 ♦•ighth, will face about, and their guides will remain in the front 
 rank, now the rear. 
 
 2r>n. At the fourth command, all the captains will jtlace them- 
 selves two ]ia(cs outside of their companies on the directing flank. 
 
 270. At the command march, the eighth company will stand fast, 
 :ind its captain will align it by the Icll, the other companies will 
 put themselves in march, and, as each arrives at j)latoon distance 
 from the one established before it, it-j captain will halt it and face 
 it to the front. At the moment that each company halts, the left 
 guide, remaining faced to the rear, will place himself promptly on 
 the direction of the guides already established. Immediately after 
 the captain will align his compaify' by the left, and the file closers 
 will close one j)ace on the rear rank. If this movement be execu- 
 ted in double quick time, each captain, in turn, will halt, and com- 
 
116 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 mand : Such company, right ahoui — Halt. At this command, the, 
 company designated will face to the right about and halt. 
 
 271. All the ciompanies being aligned, the colonel will cause the 
 guides, who stand faced to the rear, to face about. 
 
 272. The lieutenant-colonel, placing himself behind the rear- 
 most guide, will assiire successively the positions of the other guide* 
 as prescribed No. 259 ; the major will remain abreast with the 
 rearmost company. 
 
 273. The column being in march, when the colonel shall wi&h to 
 close it on the eighth company, he Will command : 
 
 1. On the eighth company, to half distance, close column. 2. Battalion 
 right about. 3. March (or double quick — March). 4. Chiide 
 right. 
 
 274. At the first command, the captain of the eighth company 
 will caution his company that it will remain faced to the front ; 
 the captains of the other companies will caution their companies' 
 that they will have to foce about. 
 
 275. At the command march, the captain of the eighth company 
 will halt his company and align it by the left; the file closers will 
 close one pace upon the rear i-ank. 
 
 276. The captains of the other companies, at the same command, 
 will place themselves on the flank of the column; the subdivisions 
 will face about, and as each arrives at platoon distance from the 
 company immediately preceding it, its chief will face it to the front 
 and halt it as prescribed No. 270. The instant each company halts, 
 the guide on the directing flank, remaining faced to the rear, will 
 quickly place himself on the direction of the guides already estab- 
 lished. After which, the captain will align the company by the 
 left, and the file closers will close one pace upon the rear rank. 
 
 277. The lieutenant-colonel will follow the movement abreast of 
 the first company. The major will place himself a few paces in 
 rear of the guide of the eighth company, and will assure succes- 
 sively the position of the other guides. 
 
 Article VI. — To march in column at half distance, or closed in mass.. 
 
 281. A column at half distance or in mass, being at a halt, the 
 colonel will put it in march by the commands prescribed for a col- 
 umn at full distance. 
 
 282. The means of direction will also be the same for a column 
 at half distance or in mass, as for a column at full distance, except 
 that the general guides will not step out. 
 
 283. Acolumn, at half distance or in mass, being in march, when 
 the colonel shall wish to halt it, he will give the commands pre- 
 scribed for halting a column at full distance, and if, afterwards, he 
 judge it necessary to give a general direction to the guides of the 
 column, he will emplo}^ to this end, ^he commands and means in- 
 dicated No. 244, and following. 
 
 284. In columns at half distance or closed in mass, ciliiefs of sub- 
 
SCHOOL dF T^Hft BATTALION. 117 
 
 divisions^ will repeat the commands warch and halt, as in columns 
 at full distance. 
 
 285. The colonel will often march the column to the rear, by the 
 means and the commands prescribed Nos. 170 and 171. 
 
 286. A column, by division or company, whether at full or half 
 distance or closed in mass, at a halt or marching, can be faced to 
 the right or left, and marched off in the new direction. 
 
 Article VII. — To change direction in cohimn ot half distance. 
 
 287. A column at half distance, being in march, will change di- 
 rection by the same eommands and according to thfe same princi- 
 ples as a column at full distance ; but as the distance between the 
 subdivisions is less, the pivot man in each subdivision ■still take 
 steps of fourteen inches instead of nine, and of seventeen inches 
 instead of eleven according to the gait, in order to clear, in time, 
 the wheeling point, and the marching flank will describe the arc of 
 a larger circle, the better to facilitate the movement. 
 
 Article YIII. — To change direction in cohimn closed in mass. 
 
 1st. To change direction in marching. 
 
 288. A column by division, closed in mass, being in march, will 
 change direction by the fi'ont of subdivisions. 
 
 289. Whether the change be made to the reverse, or to the pivot 
 flank, it will always be executed on the principle of wheeling in 
 marching; to this end, the colonel will firscause the battalion to 
 take the guide on the flank opposite to the intended change of direc- 
 tion, if it be not already on that flank. 
 
 290. A column by division, closed in mass, right in front, having 
 to change direction to the right, the colonel, after having caused a 
 marker to be placed at the point where the change ought to com- 
 mence, will command : 
 
118 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 1. Battalion, right wheel. 2. March. 
 
 
 \ \ \ 
 
 \ V V 
 
 ^ \ \ 
 
 s \ V ^ \ \ I 
 ^ ^ \ \ ^ 1 I 
 
 
 T= 
 
 291. At the command march, the leading division will wheel as 
 if it were part of a column at half distance. 
 
 292. The instant that this division commences the wheel, all the 
 others will, at once, conform themselves to its movement ; to this 
 end, the left gnide of each, advancing slightly the left shoulder, 
 and lengthening a little the step, w411 incline to the left, and will 
 observe, at the same time, to gain so much ground to the front that 
 there may constantly be an interval of four paces between his di- 
 vision and that which precedes it ; and as soon as he shall cover 
 the preceding guide, he will cease to incline and then march ex- 
 actly in his trace. 
 
 293. Each division wuU conform itself to the movement of its 
 guide ; the men will feel lightly the elbow toward him and advance 
 a little the left shoulder the ingtant the movement commences ; 
 each file, in inclining, will gain so much the less ground to the front, 
 as the file shall be nearer to the pivot, and the right guide will 
 gain only so much as may be necessary to maintain between his 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 119 
 
 own and tlio prccedin£j division the same distance which separates 
 their marching flanks. 
 
 294. Each chief of division, turning to it, will regulate its raarcli, 
 and see that it remains constantly included between its guides, 
 that its alignment continues nearly parallel to that of the prece- 
 ding division, and that the center bends only a little to the rear. 
 
 295. The colonel will superintend the movement, and cause the 
 pivot of the leading division to lengthen or to shorten the step, 
 conforming to the principle established, school of the company, 
 No. 227 — if cither be necessary to facilitate the movement of the 
 other divisions. 
 
 296. The lieutenant-colonel, placed near the left guide of the 
 leading division, will regulate his march, and take care, above all, 
 that he docs not throw liimself xcithin the arc he ought to describe. 
 
 297. The major, placed in the rear of the guides, will see that 
 the last three conform themselves, each by slight degrees, to the 
 movement of the guide immediately preceding, and that neither 
 inclines too much in the endeavor to cover too ]>romptly the guide 
 in liis front : he will rectify any serious fault that may be com- 
 mitted in cither of those particulars. 
 
 298. The colonel, seeing the wheel nearly ended, will command 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 299. At the second command, which will be given at the instant 
 the leading division completes its wheel, it will resume the direct 
 march ; the other divisions will conform themselves to this move- 
 ment ; and if any guide find himself not covering his immediate 
 leader, he will, b}- slight degrees, bring himself on the trace of that 
 guide, by advancing the right shoulder. 
 
 300. If the colunin. right in front, has to change direction to the 
 left, the colonel will first cause it to take the guide to the right, 
 and then command : 
 
 1. Battalion Jcft wheel. 2. March. 
 
 301. At the command march, the battalion will change direction 
 to the left, according to the principles just prescribed, and by in- 
 verse means. 
 
 302. When the l)attalion shall have rcflumed the dii'cct march, 
 the colonel will change the guide to the left, on seeing the last 
 three guides nearly in the dircctif)n of the one in front. 
 
 303. The foregoing changes in direction will be executed accord- 
 ing to the same principles in a column, left in front. 
 
 304. A column by company, dosed in mass, will change direc- 
 tion in marching, by the commands and means indicated for a col- 
 umn by division. 
 
 305. The guide who is the pivot of the particular wheel, ought 
 to maintain himself at his usual distance of six pace« from the 
 guide who ])rccedes him ; if this distance be not exactly preserved 
 tlfo divisions would r.o<*.wv.<,rily become confounded, which must be 
 carefully avoided. 
 
120 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 2d. To change direction from a halt. 
 
 306. A column by company, or by division, closed in mass, being 
 at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to give it a now direction, 
 and in which it is to remain, ho will cause it to execute this move- 
 ment by the flanks of subdivisions, in the following manner : 
 
 307. The battalion having the right in front, when the colonel 
 shall wish to cause it to change direction by the right flank, he 
 will indicate to the lieutenant-colonel the point of direction to the 
 right ; this officer will immediately establish on the new direction 
 two markers, distant from each other a little less than the front of 
 the riffht file of this subdivision ; which being executed, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. Change direction by the right fiank. 2. Battalion, right — Face. 
 3. March (or double quick — March.) 
 
 308. At the second command, the column will face to the right, 
 and each chief of subdivision will place himself by the side of his 
 right guide. 
 
 309. At the command march, all the subdivisions will step off to- 
 gether ; the right guide of the leading one will direct himself from 
 the first step, parallelly to the markers placed ■ in advance on the 
 new direction ; the chief of the subdivision will not follow the 
 movement, but see it file past, and as soon as the left guide shall 
 have passed, he will command : 
 
 1. First company (ov first division.^ 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4:. Left — 
 
 DrEvSs. 
 
 ^^ M 
 
 310. At the fourth command, the subdivision will place itself 
 against the two markers, and be promptly aligned by its chief. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 121 
 
 311. Tlie riffht guide of each of tho following subdivisions will 
 conform himself to the direction of the right guide of the stibdivi- 
 Hion preceding his own in the column, so as to enter on the new 
 direction parallelly to that suhdivision. and nt the distance of four 
 paces from its rear rank. 
 
 312. Each chief of suhdivision will halt in his own person, on 
 arriving opposite to the left guides already placed on the new di- 
 rection, see his subdivision tile past, and conform himself, in halt- 
 irjg and aligning it. to what is prescribed No. 300. 
 
 313. If the change of direction be by the left flank, the colonel 
 will cause markers to be established as before, tho first in front of 
 the left file of the leading subdivision, and then give the samcconi- 
 
 ''mands. substituting the indication left for right. 
 
 314. At the second command all the subdivisions will face to the 
 left, and each chief Avill place himself by the side of his left guide. 
 
 315. At the command march^aW the subdivisions will step off to- 
 gether, each conducted by its chief 
 
 316. The guide of the leading subdivision will direct himself, 
 from the first stejt, parallelly to the markers; the subdivision will 
 be conducted by its chief; and as soon as its left guide shall have 
 passed the second marker, it will be halted and aligned as pre- 
 scribed above; and so of each of the following subdivisions. 
 
 317. The colonel "will hold himself on the designated flank, to 
 see that each subdivision enters the new direction parallelly to the 
 leading one. and at the prescribed distance from that Avhich pre- 
 cedes. 
 
 318. The lieutenant-colonel will place himself in front of and 
 facing to. the guide of the leading subdivision, and will assure the 
 positions of the following? guides, as thoy successively arrive on 
 the new direction. 
 
 310. The major will follow the movement abreast with the last 
 subdivision. 
 
 320. In order that this niovt-ment may l)c executed with facility 
 anfl precision, it is necessary that the leading subdivision should 
 entirely unmask the column ; for example, the movement being 
 made h\ the right flank, it is necessary, before halting the leading 
 subdivision, that its left guide, shall, at least, have arrived at the 
 place previously occupied by its right gui<le, in order that each 
 follc»wing subdivisi(m which has to pass over a space at least equal 
 to its front to ])ut itself in the new direction, and whose left ought 
 to pass the point at which the right had rested, may, at the com- 
 mand halt, find itself, in its whole front, parallel to the leading sub- 
 division. 
 
 321. By this method then' is no direction that may not be given 
 to a column in mass. 
 
 Article TX. — Bring in rolumn cf half di/itanrr. or rjoxed in ?nnss, to 
 
 takr dvitnncea. 
 S22. A column at half distance will take full distances by the 
 head of the column when it has to prolong it«elf on the line of bat - 
 
122 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 tie. If, on the contrary, it has to form itself in line of battle on 
 the ground it occupies, it will take distances on the leading or on 
 the rearmost subdivision, according as the one or other may find 
 itself at the point where the right or left of the battalion ought to 
 rest in line of battle. 
 
 1st. To take distances by the head of the column. 
 
 323. The column being by company at half distance and at a 
 halt, when the colonel shall wish to cause it to take full distances 
 by the head, he will command : 
 
 By the head of cohmin, take wlieeUng distance. 
 
 324. At this command the captain of the leading company will i 
 put it on march ; to this end, he will command : 
 
 1. First company, forward. 2. Guide left. 3. March (or double 
 
 fjuick—MARCU.) 
 
 325. When the second shall have nearly its wheeling distance, 
 its captain will command : 
 
 1. Second company, forward. 2. Guide left. 3. March (or double 
 
 quick — March.) 
 
 326. At the command march, which will be pronounced at the 
 instant that this company shall have its wheeling distance, it will 
 step oft' smartly, taking the step from the preceding company. 
 Each of the other companies will successively execute what has 
 just been prescribed for the second. 
 
 327. The colonel will see that each company puts itself in march 
 at the instant it has its distance. 
 
 328. The lieutenant-colonel will h*ld himself at the head of the 
 column, and direct the march of the leading guide. 
 
 329. The major will hold himself abreast with the rearmost 
 guide. 
 
 330. If the column, instead of being at a halt, be in march, the 
 colonel will give the same commands, and add : 
 
 March (or double quick — March.) 
 
 331. If the column be marching in quick l^me, at the command 
 march, the captain of the leading company will cause double quick 
 time to be taken ; which will also be done by the other captains as 
 the companies successively attain their proper wheeling distance. 
 
 232. If the column be marching in double quick time, the leading 
 company will continue to march at the same gait. The captains 
 of the other companies will cause quick time to be taken, and as 
 each company gains its jiroper distance, its captain will cause it to 
 retake the double quick step. 
 
 2d. To take distances on the rear of the column. 
 
 333. If the colonel wish to take distances on the rearmost com- 
 pany, he Avill establish two markers on the direction he shall wish 
 to give to the line of battle, the first opposite to the rearmost com- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE I5ATTALI0N, 
 
 123 
 
 pany, the second marker towards the head of the column, at com- 
 pany distance from the lir.st, and both facing to the rear ; at the 
 8ame time, the right general guide, on an intimation from the 
 lieutenant-colonel, will move rapidly a little bej-ond the point to 
 which the head of the column will extend, and place himself cor- 
 rectly on the prolongation of the two markers. These dispositions 
 being made, the colonel M'ill command : 
 
 1. On the eighth company^ take wheeling distance. 2. Column forward. 
 3. Guide left. 4. March (or double quick — March.) 
 
 ihj- 
 
 "1 f1 rl f 
 
 y kj y "x 
 
 -D 
 
 J3 J3 .Xj J 
 
 y y y 4 
 
 rl 
 
 334. At the t^lird command, the captains will place themselves 
 two paces outside of the directing flank ; the captain of the eighth 
 company will caution it to stand fast. 
 
 335. At the command march, repeated by all the captains, except 
 the captain of the eighth company, this latter company will stand 
 fast; its chief will align it on the left by the first marker, who is 
 opposite to this company, and place himself before its center, after 
 commanding Front. At this command the marker will retire, and 
 the lefl guide will take his place. 
 
 33G. All the other companies will put themselves in march, the 
 guide of the leading one directing himself a little within the right 
 general guide ; when the seventh company has arrived opposite 
 the second marker, its captain will jialt, and align it on this marker, 
 in the manner prescribed for the eighth company. 
 
 337. When the captain of the sixth company shall see that there 
 is, between his comj)any and the seventh, the necessary space for 
 wheeling into line, ho will halt his company; the guide facing to 
 the rear will place himself j)rojnjitly on the direction, and the mo- 
 ment he shall bo assured in his position, the captain will align 
 the company by the lefl, and then place himself two paces before 
 
124 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 its center; the other companies will successively conform them- 
 selves to what has just been prescribed for the sixth company, 
 
 338. The colonel Avill follow the movement, and see that each 
 company halts at the prescribed distance ; he will promptlj^^ 
 remedy any fault that may bo committed, and, as soon as all the 
 companies shall be aligned, he will cause the guides, who are faced 
 to the rear, to face about. 
 
 339. The lieutenant-colonel will successivelj' assure the left 
 guides on the direction, placing himself in their rear, as they 
 arrive. 
 
 340. The major will hold himself at the head of the column, and 
 Avill direct the march of the leading guide. 
 
 3d. To take distances on the head of the column. 
 
 341. The colonel, wishing to take distanpces on the leading com- 
 pany, will establish two markers in the manner just prescribed, 
 one abreast with this company, and the other at company distance 
 in rear of the first, biit both facing to the front ; the left general 
 guide, on an intimation from the lieutenant-colonel, will move 
 rapidly to the rear, and place himself correctly on the prolonga- 
 tion of the two markers, a little beyond the point to which the 
 rear of the column will extend ; these dispositions being made, the 
 colonel will command : 
 
 1. On the first company, take wheeling distance. 2. Battalion, about — 
 Face. 3. Column, forward. 4. Gtiide right. 5. March (or 
 double quick — March). 
 
 342. At the second command, all the companies, except the one 
 designated, will face about, the guides remaining in the front rank 
 now become the rear. 
 
 343. At the fourth command, the eajitains will place themselves 
 outside of their guides. 
 
 344. At the command march, the captain of the designated com- 
 pany will align it, as prescribed. No. 335, on the marker placed by 
 its side. 
 
 345. The remaining companies will put themselves in march, the 
 guide of the rearmost one will direct himself a little within the 
 left general guide ; when the second company shall have arrived 
 opposite the second max-ker, its captain will face it about, conform- 
 ing to what is prescribed, No. 270, and align it, as has just been 
 prescribed for the first company. 
 
 346. The instant that the third company shall have its wheeling- 
 distance, its captain will halt it, facing it about, as prescribed, No. 
 270, and, align it by the left; the captains of the remaining com- 
 panies will each, in succession, conform himself to what has just 
 loeen prescribed for the captain of the third. 
 
 347. The colonel will follow the movement, as indicated No. 
 338 ; the lieutenant-colonel and major Avill conform themselves to 
 what is prescribed, Nos. 339 and 340. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE JtATTALION. 
 
 125 
 
 348. These variouH moveiueiitH will he executed according to the 
 flame principles in a culumn with the left in front. 
 
 349. They will be executed in like manner in a column closed in 
 mass; but, if it be the wish of the colonel to open out the column 
 to half, instead of full distance, he will substitute, in the com- 
 mands, the indication half, for that of icheeling distance. 
 
 350. In a column by division, distances will be taken accordiiii; 
 to the same princijjle.s. 
 
 Arttct.k X. — foujifrrmarrh of a rohnnn >tf full or half distaufie. 
 
 h 
 
 ^ /> 
 
 y 
 
 351. In a column ai full or half distance, the countermarch will 
 be executed by the moans indicated, School of the Company; to 
 this end, the colonel will command: 
 
 1. Countermarch. 2. Battalion right (ov left) — Fack. 3. By file left 
 (or right). 4. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 To countermarch a column closed in mass. 
 
 352. If the column be closed in mass, the countermarch will be 
 executed by the commands and means su1)ioined. 
 
 353. The column bein^ supposed formed by division, right in 
 front, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Countermarch. 2. Battalion, right and left — Fack. 3. By file left 
 and right. 4. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 354. At the first command, the chiefs of the odd numbere<l 
 divisions will caution them to face the right, and the chiefs of the 
 others to face to the lef\. 
 
 355. At the second command, the odd divisions will face to the 
 right, and the even to the left ; the right and left guides of all the 
 divisions will face about ; the chiefs of odd divisions will Inisten 
 to their right and cause two files to break to the rear, and each 
 chief place himself on the left of the lea<ling front rank man of 
 his division; the eliiefs of even divisions will hasten to their left, 
 and cause two fihs to break to the rear, and each chief place him- 
 self on the right oi' his leading front lank man. 
 
 35G. At the command rtuirch, all the divisions, each conducted 
 by its chief, will step off nmartly, the guiijes standing fast; each 
 odd division will wheul by file to IJio lefl around its right i^uide , 
 each even divitiion will wheel by file to the right around its left 
 guide, each divisioirso Uiiiecting its march as to arrive behind iti^ 
 
126 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 opposite guide, and when its head shall be up with this guide, the 
 chief will halt the division, and cause it to face to the front. 
 
 357. Each division, on facing to the front, will be aligned by its 
 chief by the right ; to this end, the chiefs of the even divisions 
 will move rapidly to the right of their respective divisions. 
 
 358. The divisions being aligned, each chief will command, 
 Front ; at this, the guides will shift to their proper flanks. 
 
 359. In a column with the left in front, the countermarch will 
 be executed by the same commands and means ; but all the divi- 
 sions will be aligned by the left ; to this end, the chiefs of the odd 
 divisions will hasten to the left of their respective divisions as soon 
 as the latter shall have been faced to the front. . 
 
 360. The colonel, placed on the directing flank, will supcrintendJ 
 the general movement. ' • i 
 
 361. The countermarch being ended, the lieutenant-colonel will- 
 always place himself abreast with the leading, and the major^ 
 abreast with the rearmost division. 
 
 362. In a column by company, closed in mass, the countermarch 
 will be executed by the same means and commands, applying to 
 companies what is prescribed for divisions. 
 
 363. The countermarch will always take place fi'om a halt, 
 whether the column be closed in mass, or at full, or half distance. 
 
 Article XI. — Being in column by company, closed in mass, to forin 
 
 divisions. 
 
 i i 
 
 s 
 
 ■ I 
 
 y 4py 4Pti4py hf 
 
 1-^3 
 
 r^ 
 
 364. The column being closed in mass, right in front, and at a 
 halt, when the colonel shall wish to form divisions, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Form divisions. 2. Left companies, left — Face. 3. March (or 
 double quick — March.) 
 
 365. At the first command, the captains of the left companies 
 will caution them to face to the left. 
 
 366. At the second command, the left companies will face to the 
 left, and their captains will place themselves by the side of their 
 respective left guides. 
 
 367. The right companies, and their captains, will stand fast ; 
 but the right and left guides of each of these companies will place 
 themselves respectively before the right and left ^les of the com- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 127 
 
 pauy, both guides facing to the right, and eac-li resting his right 
 arm gently against tl\e breast of the front rank man of the tile, in 
 order to mark the direction. 
 
 368. At the command 7?uta7(, tlie left eonipanies onl}- will put 
 themselves in march, their captains standing fast ; as each shall 
 see that his company, filing ])as1, has nearly fleared the column, 
 he will command : 
 
 1. Such company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 369. The firist command will be given when the company shall 
 yet have four pa(;es to march ; the second at the instant it shall 
 have cleared its right company : and the third immediately after 
 tbo second. 
 
 370. The company having faced to the front, the files,. if there be 
 intervals between them, Avill promptly incline to the right; the 
 captain will place himself on the loft of the right company of the 
 
 ^division, and align himself con-ectly on the fronk rank of that 
 company. 
 
 371. The left gui<U' will ))lace himself at the same time before 
 one of the three left file.'? of his cojiipany, face to the right, and 
 cover correctly the guides of the right company ; the moment his 
 oaptain sees him established on the direction, he Avill command : 
 
 liight — Dre.ss. 
 
 372. At this, the left company will dress forward on the alignment 
 of the right company ; the front rank man. who may find himself 
 opposite the left guide, will, without preceding his rank, rest light- 
 ly his breast against the right arm of this guide ; the captain of 
 the left company will direct its alignment on this man, and the 
 alignment being a^^surcd. he will command. Front ; but not quit 
 his position. 
 
 373. The colonel, seeing the divisions formed. Avill command : 
 
 Guides — PosT.s. 
 
 374. At this, the guides who have marked the fronts of divi- 
 sions will return to their places in column, the left guide of each 
 right company jiassing through the interval in the center of the 
 .division, and tlie captains will jilacc themselves as prescribed, 
 No. 75. 
 
 375. The colonel, from the directing flank of the column, will 
 superintend the general execution of the movement. 
 
 376. If the column be in march, in.stead of at a halt, when the 
 colonel shall wish to form divisions, he will command : 
 
 1. Form div won s. 2. Left companies^ by the left flank. 3. March 
 (or double quick — Mahcu). 
 
 377. At the first command, the captains of the right companies 
 will command, ^f^lrl: time, the eajitains of the left companies will 
 OAiUion their companies \.o fare by the left flank. 
 
 378. At the third command, the right companies will mark 
 time, the loft e^mpanios will {nco to the U-ft ; Uie captainn of the 
 
128 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 left companies will each see his company tile past him, and wher> 
 it has cleared the column, will command : 
 
 Such company by the rujht flank — March. 
 
 As soon as the divisions are formed, the colonel will com- 
 mand : 
 
 4. Forxcard. 5. March. 
 
 379. At the fifth command, the column will resume the gait ;*« 
 which it was marching previeus to the commencement of the 
 movement. The guides of each division will remain on the right 
 and left of their respective companies ; the left guide of the right 
 company will pass into the line of file closers, before the two com- 
 panies are united ; the right guide of the left company will step 
 into the rear rank. The captains will place themselves as pre- 
 scribed, No. 75. 
 
 Being in column at full or half distance to form dicisions. 
 
 h y 
 
 h 
 
 =n 
 
 o y 
 
 g 
 
 .380. If the column be at a halt, and, instead of being closed in 
 mass, is at full or half distance, divisions will be formed in the 
 same manner ; but the captains of the left companies, if the move- 
 ment be made in quick time, after commanding Front, will each 
 place himself before the center of his company, and command: 1. 
 Such company, forward. 2. Guide right. 3. March. If the move- 
 ment be made in double quick time, each will command as soon as 
 his company has cleared the column : 
 
 1. Such company by the right Jlank. 2. March. 
 
 381. The right guide of each left company will so direct his 
 march as to arrive by the side of the man on the left of the right 
 company. The left company being neai'ly up with the rear rank 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 12^ 
 
 of the right company, its captain will halt it, and the movenaent 
 will be finished as prescribed, No. 371, and follovving. 
 
 382. If the left be in front, the movement will be executed by 
 inverse means : the right companies will conform themselves to 
 what is proscribed above for the lett companies : and the two guides, 
 placed respectively, before the right and left files of each left com- 
 pany, will face to the left. At the command, Guides^ posts, given 
 by the colonel, the guides, who have marked the front of divisions, 
 and the captains, will quickly retake their places in the col- 
 umn. 
 
 383. If the column be marching at full distance, the divisions 
 will be formed as prescribed, No. 196. If it be marching at half 
 distance, the formation will take place by the commands and ac- 
 cording to the principles indicated No. 376; if the column be 
 marching in double quick time, the companies which should mark 
 time will march in quick time by the command of their captains. 
 
 TART FOURTH. 
 
 Article II. — Different modes of passing from column at full dis- 
 tance into line of battle. 
 
 1. To the left (or right) ^ 
 
 2. On the ri<j:ht (or left) t * r ^ i ♦*.! 
 
 „ -K, J *' ^ (■ Into line of battle. 
 
 3. Forward, | 
 
 4. Faced to the rear, J 
 
 1. Column at full distance., right in front, to the left into line of 
 
 battle. 
 300. A column, right in front, being at a halt, when the colonel 
 shall wish to form it to the left into line, he will assure the posi- 
 tions of the gufdes by the means previously indicated, and then 
 command : 
 
 1. Left into line, wheel. 2. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 391. At the first command, the right guide of the leading com- 
 pany will hasten to place himself on the direction of the left 
 guides of the column, face to them, and place himself so as to be 
 opposite to one of the three right files of his company, when they 
 shall be in line : he will be assured in this position by the lieuten- 
 ant-colonel. 
 
 392. At the command march, briskly repeated by the captains, 
 the left front rank man of each company will face to the left, and 
 rest his breast lightly against the right arm of his guide ; the com- 
 panies will wheel to the left on the principle of wheeling from a 
 halt, conforming themselves to what is prescribed, school of the 
 company. No. 239: each captain will turn to his company, to ob- 
 serve the execution of the movement, and. when the right of the 
 company shall arrive at three paces from the line of battle, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. Such company. 2. ITait. 
 
 393. The company being halted, the captain will place himself 
 9 
 
 )^'«a7>^i^. ...,, wr<r*.'7r* 
 
130 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 on the line by the side of the left front rank man of the company 
 next on the right, align himself correctly, and command : 
 
 3. Right — Dress. 
 
 394. At this command, the company Avill dress np between the 
 captain and the front rank man on its left, the captain directing 
 the alignment on that man ; the front rank man on the right of the 
 right company, who finds himself opposite to its right guide, 
 will lightly rest his breast against the left arm of this guide. 
 
 395. Each captain, having aligned his company, will command. 
 Front, and the colonel will add : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 396. At this command, the guides will return to their places in 
 line of battle, each passing through the nearest captain's interval ; 
 to permit him to pass, the captain will momentarily step before 
 the first file of his company, and the covering sergeant behind the 
 same file. Tliis rule is general for all the formations into line of bat- 
 tle. 
 
 397. When comj^anies form line of battle, file closers will always 
 place themselves exactly two paces from the rear rank, which will 
 sufficiently assure their alligumont, 
 
 398. The battalion being correctly aligned, the colonel, lieuten- 
 ant-colonel, and major, as well as the adjutant and sergeant-ma- 
 jor, will return to their respective places in line of battle. This 
 rule is general for all the formations into line of battle ; nevertheless, 
 the battalion being in the school of elementary instruction, the 
 colonel will go to any point he may deem necessary. 
 
 399. A column, with the left in front, will form itself to the right 
 into line of battle, according to the same principles ; the left guide 
 of the left company will ])lace himself, at the first command, on 
 the direction of the right guides, in a manner corresponding to 
 what is prescribed. No. 371, for the right guide of the right com- 
 pany. 
 
 400. At the command guides, posts, the captains will take their 
 places in line of battle as well as the guides. This rule is general 
 for all formations into line of battle in xcldch the companies are aligned 
 by the left. 
 
 401. A column by division may form itself into line of battle by 
 the same commands, and means, but observing what follows : if 
 the right be in front, at the command lialt, given by the chiefs of 
 division, the left guide of each right company will place himself 
 on the alignment opposite to one of the three files on the left of 
 his company; the left guide of the first company will be assured 
 on the direction by the lieutenant-colonel ; the left guides of the 
 other right companies will align themselves correctly on the divi- 
 sion guides ; to this end, the division guides (on the alignment) 
 will invert, and hold their pieces up perpendicularly before the 
 center of their bodies, at the command left into line, wheel. If the 
 column by division be with the left in front, the right guides of 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 131 
 
 left companies will conform themselves to what has just been pro- 
 scribed for the left guides of right companies, and place them- 
 selves on the line opposite to one of the three right files of their 
 respective companies. 
 
 402. A column in march will be formed into line, without halt- 
 ing, by the same commands and means. At the command march, 
 the guides will halt in their places, and the licutcnant-colonol will 
 promptly rectify their positions. 
 
 403. If, in forming the column into line, tiie colonel should wish 
 to move forward, without halting, he will command : 
 
 1. By companies^ left xcliecl. 2. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 404. At the command march, briskly repeated by the captains, 
 ©ach company will Avhcel to the left on a fixed pivot, as prescribed 
 in the school of the company, No. 2(51 ; the left guides Avill step 
 back into the rank of file closers before the wheel is completed, 
 and when the right of the companies shall arrive near the line, 
 the colonel will con\mand : 
 
 3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide center. 
 
 405. At the fourth command, given at the instant the wheel is 
 completed, the companies will march directly to tlie front. At 
 the fifth command, the color and the general guides will move ra- 
 pidly six paces to the front. The colonel will assure the direction 
 of the color ; the captains of companies and the men will, at once, 
 conform themselves to the principles of the march in line of bat- 
 Mo, to be hereinafter indicated. No. 587, and following. 
 
 406. The same principles are applicable to a column Ictl in 
 front. 
 
 Column at full distance, on the right (or on the left), into line of 
 
 battle. 
 
 414. A column by company, at full distance and right in front, 
 having to form itself on the right into line of battle, the colonel 
 will indicate to the lieutenant-colonel a little in advance, the point 
 of oppiii, or rest, for the right, as well as the point of direction to 
 tlie left; the lieutenant-colonel will hasten with two markers, and 
 establish them in the following manner on the direction indi- 
 cated. 
 
 415. The first marker will be phu-ed at the point ofappui for the 
 right front rank man of the lea^ling company ; the second will in- 
 dicate the point where one of the three left files of the same corn- 
 pan}' will rest when in line ; they will be placed so as to present 
 the right shoulder to the btttalion when formed. 
 
 41 n. These dispositions being made, the eolonel will command : 
 
132 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 1. On the right, into line. 2. Battalion, guide right. 
 
 ^miMJiiii/jiiiHiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiij 
 
 417. At the second command, the right will becomo the direct- 
 ing flank, and the touch of the elbow will be to that side ; the 
 right guide of the leading company will march straight forward 
 until up with the turning point, and each following guide will 
 march in the trace of the one immediately preceding. 
 
 418. The leading company being nearly up with the first mark- 
 er, its captain will command : 1. Right turn, and when the compan}^ 
 is precisely up with this marker, he will add : 2. March. 
 
 419. At the command march, the company will tui-n to the right; 
 the right guide will so direct himself as to bring the man next to 
 him opposite to the right marker, and when at three paces from 
 him, the captain will command : 
 
 1. First company. 2. Halt. 
 
 420. At the second command, the company will halt ; the files, 
 not yet in line, will form promptly; the left guide will retire as a 
 file closer ; and the captain will then command : 
 
 3. Right — Dress. 
 
 421. At this command, the company will align itself; the two 
 men who find themselves opposite to the two markers, will each 
 lightly rest his breast against the right arm of his marker ; the 
 captain, passing to the right of the front rank, will direct the 
 alignment on these two men. These rules are general for all succes- 
 sive formations. 
 
 422. The second company will continue to march straight for- 
 ward ; when arrived opposite to the left flank of the preceding 
 company, it will turn to the right, and bo formed on the line of 
 battle, as has just been prescribed ; the right guide will direct 
 himself so as to come upon that line by the side of the man on the 
 left of the first company. 
 
 423. At the distance of three paces from the b'ne of battle, the 
 company will be halted by its captain, who will place himself 
 briskly by the side of the man on the left of the preceding com- 
 pany, and align himself correctly on its front rank. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 133 
 
 424. The left guide will, at the same time, place himself before 
 one of the three left files of hie company, and, facing to the right, 
 he will place himself accurately on the direction of the two mark- 
 ers of the preceding compan}''. 
 
 425. The captain will then command : 
 
 Right — Dress. 
 
 426. At this command, the second company will dress forward 
 on the line : the captain will direct its alignment on the front rank 
 man who has rested his breast against the left guide of the com- 
 pany. 
 
 427. The following companies will thus come successively to 
 form themselves on the line of battle, each conforming itself to 
 what has just been prescribed for the one next to the right ; and 
 when they shall all be established, the colonel will command : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 428. At this command, the guides will take their places in line 
 of battle, and the markers placed before the right company will 
 retire. 
 
 429. If the column be marching in quick time, and the colonel 
 should wish to cause the movement to be executed in double quick 
 time, he will add the command : Double quick — March. At the 
 command march, all the companies will take the double quickstep, 
 and the movement will be executed as prescribed, No. 417, and 
 following. 
 
 430. The colonel Avill follow up the formation, passing along the 
 front, and being always opposite to the company about to turn : it 
 is thus that he will be the better able to sec and to correct the er- 
 ror that would result from a conimand given too soon or too late to 
 the preceding company. 
 
 431. The lieutenant-colonel will, with the greatest care, assure 
 the direction of the guides; to this end, the instant that the mark- 
 ers arc estal)lished for the leading company, he will move a little 
 beyond the point at which the left of the next company will rest, 
 establish himself correctly on the prolongation of the two mark- 
 ers, and asssure the guide of the second company on this direction ; 
 this guide being assured, the lieutenant-colonel will place himself 
 farther to the rear, in order to assiire, in like manner, the guide of 
 the third company, and so on successively, to the left of the bat- 
 talion. In assuring the guides in their positions on the line of 
 battle, he will take care to let them tirst place themselves, and con- 
 fine himself to rectifying their ))OHitionH if (hey do not cover accu- 
 rately, and at the proper distance, the preceding guides or mark- 
 ers. This rule is general for all surressive format iotis. 
 
 432. A column, left in fronl, will form itself on the left into line 
 of battle according to the same principles ; the captains will go to 
 the left of their respective companies to align them, and shift af- 
 terwards to their proper flanks, as proscribed No. 40(>. 
 
134 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION, 
 
 Colmnn at full distance, forward into line of battle. 
 
 \ \ \ \ yy 
 
 
 440. A coluinn being by company, at fall distance, right in front, 
 and at a halt, M^hen the colonel shall wish to form it forward into 
 line, he will conform to what is prescribed Nos. 414 and 415, and 
 then command : 
 
 1. Forward into line. 2. By company, left half wheel. 3. March 
 (or double quick — March). 
 
 441. At the first command, the captain of the leading company 
 will add — guide right, put the company in march, halt it three paces 
 from the markers, and align it against the latter by the right. 
 
 442. At the command march, all the other companies will wheel 
 to the left on fixed pivots ; and, at the instant the colonel shall 
 judge, according to the direction of the line of battle, that the com- 
 i^anies have sufficiently wheeled, he will command : 
 
 4. Forward. 5. March. 6. Guide right. 
 
 443. At the fifth command, the companies, ceasing to wheel, will 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 135 
 
 march strai£ijlit forward ; and at the sixth, the men will touch el- 
 bows toward the rij^ht. The ri<:;ht guide of the second company, 
 who is nearest to tlie line of battle, Avill march straight forward ; 
 each succeeding right guide will follow the file inimediately before 
 him at the cessation of the wheel. 
 
 444. The second comj^aii}- having arrived opposite to the left 
 file of the first, its captain will cause it to turn to the right, in or- 
 der to approach the line of battle ; and when its right guide shall 
 be at three paces from that line, the captain will command : 
 
 1. Second company. 2. Halt. 
 
 455. At the second command, the company will halt; the files 
 not yet in line with the guide ^y\\\ como into it promptly, the left 
 guide will place himself on the line of battle, so as to be opposite 
 to one of the three files on the left of the company; and, as soon 
 as he is assured on the direction by the lieutenant-colonel, the cap- 
 tain, having placed himself accurately on the line of battle, will 
 command : 
 
 3. Eight — Dress. 
 
 446. At the instant that the guide of the second company begins 
 to turn to the right, the guide of the third, ceasing to follow the 
 file inimcdiatoly before him, will march straight forward ; and, 
 when he shall arrive opposite to the left of the second, his captain 
 will cause the company to turn to the right, in order to approach 
 the line of battle, halt it at three paces from that line, and align it 
 by the right, as prescribed for the second company. 
 
 447. Each following company will execute what has just been pre- 
 scribed for the third, as the preceding company shall turn to the 
 right, in order to approach the line of battle. 
 
 448. The formation ended, the colonel will command : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 449. The colonel and lieutenant-colonel Avill observe, in this for- 
 mation, what is prescribed for them on the right into line. 
 
 450. A column left in front, Avill fi)rm itself forward into line of 
 battle, according to the same jjrinoiples, and by inverse means. 
 
 451. "When a column by company at full distance, right in front, 
 and in march, shall arrive behind the right of the line on which it 
 is to form into battle, the colonel and lieutenant-colonel will con- 
 form themselves to what is prescribed Nos. 414 and 415. 
 
 452. The head of the column having arrived at company dis- 
 tance from the two markers csta1>lishe<l on the line, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 1. Forward vii<> Imr. 2. Ihj rowpdny^ left half irhtrl. 3. Makch 
 (or double quick — March). 
 
 453. At the first command, the captain of the first company will 
 command. Guide right, and caution it to march directly to the 
 front; the captains of the other companies will caution them to 
 wheel to the left. 
 
136 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 454. At the command march, briskly repeated by the captains, 
 the first company will continue to march to the front, taking the 
 touch of elbows to the right. Its chief will halt it at three paces 
 from the markers, and align it by the right. The other compan- 
 ies will wheel to the left on fixed pivots, and at the instant the col- 
 onel shall judge that they have wheeled sufficiently, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 4. Forward. 5. March. 6. Guide right. 
 
 455. At the fifth command, the companies will cease to wheel 
 and move forward. At the sixth, they will take the touch of el- 
 bows to the right. The movement will be executed as jJreviously 
 explained. 
 
 456. If the colonel should wish to form the column forward into 
 line, and to continue to march in this order, he will not cause 
 markers to be established ; the movement will be executed in 
 double quick time, by the same commands and means, but with the 
 following modifications. 
 
 457. At the first command, the captain of the first company 
 yviU. add quick time after the command guide right. At the second 
 command, the first company will continue to march in quick time, 
 and will take the touch of elbows to the right ; its chief will im- 
 mediately place himself on its right, and to assure the march, will 
 take points of direction to the front. The captain of the second 
 company will cause his company to take the same gait as soon as 
 it shall arrive on a line with the first, and will also move to the 
 right of his company ; the captains of the third and fourth com- 
 panies will execute successively what has just been prescribed for 
 the second. The companies will preserve the touch of elbows to 
 the right, until the command, guide center. 
 
 458. When the color company shall have entered the line, the 
 colonel will command, guide center. At this command, the color- 
 bearer and the right general guide will move rapidly six paces in 
 advance of the line. The colonel will assure the direction of the 
 color-bearer. The lieutenant-colonel and the right companies will 
 immediately conform themselves to the princijjles of the march in 
 line of battle. The left companies and the left general guide, as 
 they arrive on the line, will also conform to the same principles. 
 If the column be marching in double quick time, when the last 
 company shall have arrived on the line, the colonel will cause the 
 double quick to be resumed. 
 
 459. It is not necessary that the movement be entirely comple- 
 ted, before halting the battalion. As soon as the part of the bat- 
 talion already formed shall have arrived on the line of battle, the 
 colonel will halt the battalion ; the companies not in line will each 
 complete the movement. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 137 
 
 Column at full distance^ faced to the rear, into line of battle. 
 
 «1 — 
 
 --P / 
 
 / 
 / 
 
 / . 
 
 ■? ! 
 
 
 M 
 
 / / 
 
 1 
 
 ¥ / / / 
 
 /■I- ■/. -'■/ 
 
 t: 
 
 466. A column bein^ by company, at full distance, right in front, 
 and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to form it into line faced 
 to the rear, he anrl the lieutenant-colonel will conform themselves 
 to what is prescribed Nos. 414 and 41.5. and the colonel will then 
 command : 
 
 1. Jnio line, faced to the rear. 2. Battalion, right — Face. 3. March 
 (or double quick — March). 
 
 467. At the first command, the captain of the leading company 
 will cause it to face to the right, and put it in march, catising it to 
 "wheel by file to the left, and direct its march towards the line of 
 battle which it will pass in rear of the left marker; the first file 
 having passed three paces lnyond the line, the company wmII wheel 
 again by file to the left, in order to place itself in rear of the two 
 markers ; being in this position, its captain will halt it, face it to 
 the front, and align it by the right against the markers. 
 
 468. At the second command, all the other conip.Tnies will face 
 
138 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 to the right, each captain placing himself by the side of his right 
 guide. 
 
 469. At the command march, the companies will put themselves 
 in movement ; the left guide of the second, who is nearest to the 
 line of battle, will hasten in advance to mark that line ; he will 
 place himself on it as prescribed above for successive formations, 
 and thus indicate to his captain the point at which he ought to 
 pass the lino of battle, by three paces, in order to wheel by file to 
 the left, and then to direct his company parallelly to that line. 
 
 470. As soon as the first file of this company shall have arrived 
 near the left file of the preceding one already on the line of battle, 
 its captain will command : 
 
 1. Second company . 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Right — Dress. 
 
 471. The first command will be given when the company shall 
 yet have four paces to take to reach the halting point. 
 
 472. At the second command, the company will halt. 
 
 473. At the third, the comj)any will face to the front, and if 
 there be openings between the files, the latter will promptly close 
 to the right; the captain will immediatel}^ place himself by the 
 side of the man on the loft of the preceding company, and align 
 himself on its front rank. 
 
 474. The fourth command will be executed as prescribed, No. 
 426. 
 
 475. The following companies will be conducted and established 
 on the line of battle as just prescribed for the second, each regu- 
 lating itself by the one that precedes it ; the left guides will detach 
 themselves in time to precede their respective companies on the 
 line by twelve or fifteen paces, and each place himself so as to be 
 opposite to one of the three left files of his company, when in line. 
 If the movement be executed in double quick time, the moment it 
 is commenced, all the left guides will detach themselves at the 
 same time from the column, and will move at a run, to establish 
 themselves on the line of battle. 
 
 476. The formation ended, the colonel will command : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 477. The colonel and lieutenant-colonel, in this formation, will 
 each observe what is prescribed for him in that of on the right, into 
 line of battle. 
 
 478. A column, left in front, will form itself faced to the rear 
 into line of battle according to the same jjrinciples and by inverse 
 means. 
 
 479. If the column be in march, and should arrive in front of 
 the right of the line on w^hich it is to form into battle, the colonel 
 and lieutenant-colonel will conform to what is prescribed, Nos. 
 414 and 415. 
 
 480. When the head of the column shall be nearly at company 
 distance from the two markers established on the line, the colonel 
 will command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 139 
 
 1. Into \ine^ faced to the rear. 2. Battalion, by the riqht flanh. 3. 
 Maucu (or donhle quick — ]\[ARcn). 
 
 481. At the first command, the captains \\\\\ caution tlicir com- 
 panies to face hy tlie riglit flank. 
 
 482. At the command march. I>riskly repeated by the captainR of 
 companief=i, all the companies will face to the right; the first com- 
 pany ^vill then wheel by file to the left, and be directed by its 
 captain a little to the rear of the left marker; then pass three 
 paces beyond the line, and wheel again by file to the left; having 
 arrived on the line, the captain will halt the company, and align 
 it by the right. The remaining part of the movement will be 
 executed as heretofore explained. 
 
 483. The foregoing j-^rinciples are applicable to a column, left in 
 fi'ont. 
 
 484. As the companies approach the line of battle, it is neces- 
 sary that their captains should so direct the march as to cross that 
 line a little in rear of their respective guides, who are faced to the 
 basis of the formation ; hence each guide ought to detach himself 
 in time to find himself correctly established on the direction 
 before his company shall come up with him. 
 
 Article III. — Formation in line of battle by tmo movements. 
 
 485. If a column by company, right in front, and at a halt, find 
 itself in part on the line of battle, and the colonel should think 
 proper to form line of battle before all the companies enter the 
 new direction, the formation will be executed in the following 
 manner : 
 
 486. It will be supposed that the column has arrived behind the 
 line of l)attle, and that five companies have entered the new direc- 
 tion. The colonel having assured the guides of the first five com- 
 panies on the direction, will command : 
 
 1. Left into line, icliccl. 2. Jliree rear companies, foruard into line. 
 
 487. At the .second command, the chief of each of the rear 
 companies will command : By company, left half wheel ; and the 
 colonel will add : 
 
 3. 31 ARCH (or double quick — March.) 
 
 488. At this command, briskly repeated, the first five companies 
 will form themselves to the left, into line of battk, and the three la«t 
 forxcard, into line of battle, by the means prescriln-d for these 
 respective formations ; each captain of the three rear companies 
 will, when his company shall have sufficiently wheeled, command: 
 
 1. Foruard. 2. March. 3. Guide right. 
 
 489. If the column be in march, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. To the left, and forward into line. 2. March (or double quick — 
 
 March.) 
 
 490. At the first command, the captAins of those companies 
 which have not entered on the new direction, will cf>mmand : By 
 

 140 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 company, left half ivheel. At the command inarch, briskly repeated, 
 the first five companies will form left into line, and the last three 
 forward into line, as prescribed for these respective formations. 
 Those captains who form their companies forward into line will 
 conform to what is prescribed, No. 488. ^ 
 
 491. If the colonel should wish, in forming the battalion into s!!^ 
 line, to march it immediately forward, he will command : 
 
 1. By company to the left, and forward into line. 2. March. 
 
 ^, 492. At the first command, each captain, Avhose company is not 
 yet in the new direction, will command: 1. By company, left half ^ -^ 
 wheel; 2. Double quick. At the command jnarcA, briskly repeated ^ - 
 by the captains, the companies not in the new direction will exe- 't^^ 
 cute what is prescribed above for forming forward into line while 
 marching; each of the other companies will wheel to the left on < 
 a fixed pivot, and when the right of these companies shall arrive \-^ 
 on the line, the colonel Avill command : ""^ 
 
 3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide center. '" "' 
 
 493. The fifth command will be given when the color-bearer 
 arrives on the line, if not already there. v 
 
 494. If the battalion be marching in double quick time, the -^ 
 colonel will cause quick time to bo taken before commencing the S 
 movement. -r\ 
 
 495. If, instead of arriving behind, the column should arrive 
 before the line of battle, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Left into line, ivheel. 2. Three rear companies into line, faced to^^ 
 
 the rear. a 
 
 496. At the second command, the captain of each of the three ^ 
 rear companies will command : 1. Such company ; 2. Bight — Face. 
 The colonel will then add : 
 
 3. March (or double quick — March.) ■ ^ 
 
 497. At this command, briskly repeated, the first five companies 
 will form themselves to the left, into line of battle, and the three last 
 faced to the rear, into line of battle, by the means prescribed for 
 these respective formations. 
 
 498. If the column bo in march, the colonel will command: 
 
 1. To the left, and into line faced to the rear. 2. March (or double 
 
 quick — March.) 
 
 499. The movement will be executed as prescribed Nos. 391, 480, 
 and following. 
 
 500. These several movements in a column, left in front, will be 
 executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means 
 
 ■^\ 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. l^k ' 
 
 _/ .. : „— r-^ ■ *-, ■ 
 
 Article IV. — Different modes of passing from column at hfllf distance, 
 into line of battle. 
 
 1. To the left (or riirht) '] 
 
 2 On the right (or loft) [.^^^^ jj,,^ of battle. 
 
 3, Porwurd, by deployment. 
 
 4. Faced to the rear, J 
 
 Ist. Column at half distance, to the left (or right) into line of battle. ^ 
 
 501. A column at half distance having to form itself to the lefl 
 (or right) into lijic of battle, the colonel will cause it to take dis- 
 tances by one of the means prescribed. Article IX, Part Third, of 
 this school; which being executed, he will form the column into 
 line of battle, as has been indicated, No. 390, and following. 
 
 502. If a column by company, at half distance, be in march, and 
 it be necessary to form rapidly into line of battle, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 1. By the rear of column left (or rigfit) into line, icheel. 2. March 
 (or double quick — March.) 
 
 50o. At the first command, the right general guide will move 
 rapidly to the front, and place himself a little bej-ond the point 
 where the head of the column will rest, and on the prolongation of 
 the guides. The captain of the eighth company will command : 
 Left info line, udiecl ; the other captains will caution their compa- 
 nies to continue to march to the front. 
 
 504. At the command inarch, briskly repeated by the captain of 
 the eighth company, the guide of this company- will halt short, and 
 the company will wheel to the left, conforming to the principles 
 prescribed for wheeling from a halt; when its right shall arrive 
 near the line, the captain will halt the comjiany and align it by the 
 left. The other captains will place themselves briskly on the flank 
 of the column ; when the captain of the seventh sees there is suf- 
 ficient distance bctAveen his company and the eighth to form the 
 latter into line, he will command: Left into line, ivhecl — March; 
 the left guide will halt short, and facing to the rear, will place 
 himself on the line ; the company will wheel to the left, the man 
 on the left of the front rank will face to the left, and place his 
 breast against the left arm of the guide ; the captain will halt the 
 company when it< right shall arrive near the line, and will align it 
 by tne loA. The other companies will conform successively to 
 what has just been prescribed for the seventh. 
 
 505. Each captain will direct the alignment of his company on 
 the left man in the front rank of the company next on his right. 
 
 506. The lieutenant-colonel will be watchful that the leading 
 guide marches accurately on the prolongation of the line of battle, 
 and directs himself on the right general guide. The major, placed 
 in the rear of the left guide of the eighth company, will, as soon 
 as the guide of the seventh company is established on the direc- 
 tion, hasten in rear of the guides of the other companies, ho as to 
 a'isure each of them in succession on the line. 
 
142 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 2d. Coluiiiti at half distance, on the right (or left) into line of battle. 
 
 507. A column at half distance will form itself on the right (or 
 left) into line of battle, as prescribed for a column at full distance. 
 
 3d. Column at half distance, forward, into line of battle. 
 
 508. If it be wished to form a column at half distance, forward 
 into line of battle, the colonel will first c;iasc it to close in mass 
 and then deploy it on the leading company. 
 
 4th. Column at half distance, faced to the rear, into line of battle. 
 
 509. A column at half distance will be formed into line of battle, 
 faced to the rear, as prescribeil for a column at full distance. 
 
 Article T. — Deployment of columns closed in mass. 
 
 510. A column in mass may be formed into liric of battle; 
 
 1. Faced to the front by the deplo3'ment. 
 
 2. Faced to the rear, by the countermarch and the deploy- 
 
 ment. 
 
 3. Faced to the right and faced to the left, by a change of 
 
 direction by the flank, and the deployment. 
 
 511. When a column in mass, by division, arrives behind the 
 line on which it is intended to deplo}' it, the colonel will indicate, 
 in advance, to the lieutenant-colonel, the direction of the line of 
 battle, as well as the point on which he may wish to direct the 
 column. The lieutenant-colonel wiU immediately detatch himself, 
 with two markers, and establish them on that line, the first at the 
 point indicated, the second a littio less than the front of a division 
 from the first. 
 
 512. Deployments will always be made upon lines' parallel, and 
 lines perpendicular to the line of battle; consequently, if the head 
 of the column be near the line of battle, the colonel will commence 
 by establishing the direction of the column perpendicularly to that 
 line, if it be not already so, by one of the means indicated, No. 
 244 and following, or No. 307 and following. If the column be in 
 march, he will so direct it that it may arrive exactly behind the 
 markers, perpendicularly to the line of battle, and halt it at three 
 paces from that line. 
 
 513. The column, right in front, being halted, it is supposed that 
 the colonel wishes to deploy it on the first division ; he will ordei* 
 the left general guide to go to a j)oint on the line of battle a littio 
 beyond tliat at which the left of the battalion will rest when de- 
 ployed, and place himself correctly on the prolongation of the 
 markers established before the first divisioji. 
 
 514. These dispositions being made, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. On the first direction, deploy column. 2. Battalion, left — Face. 
 
 515. At the first command, the chief of the first division will oau- 
 sion it to standfast: tfce chiefs of the three other divisions will re- 
 mind them that they will have to face to the left. 
 
 51G. At the second command, the three last divisions Avill face 
 to the left; the chief of each division will place himself by the side 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 143 
 
 - H V 
 
 yis-.e 
 
 riyj. 
 
 Tl 
 
 ^h: 
 
144 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 of its left guide, and the junior captain by the side of the covering 
 sergeant of the left companj-, who wilt have stepped into the front 
 rank. 
 
 517. At the same command, the lieutenant-colonel will place a 
 third marker on the alignment of the two first, opposite to one of 
 the three left files of the right company, first division, and then 
 place himself on the line of battle a few paces beyond the point at 
 which the left of the second division will rest. 
 
 518. The colonel will then command : 
 
 3. March (or double quick — March.) 
 
 510. At this command, the chief of the first division will go to 
 its right, and command : 
 
 Right — Dress. 
 
 520. At this, the division will dress up against the markers; the 
 chief of the division, and its junior captain, will each align the 
 company on his left, and then command: 
 
 Front. 
 
 521. The three divisions, faced to the left, will put themselves in 
 march ; the left guide of the second will direct himself parailelly to 
 the line of battle ; the left guides of the third and fourth divisions 
 will march abreast with the guide of the second ; the guides of the 
 third and fourth, each preserving the prescribed distance between 
 himself and the guide of the division which preceded his- own in 
 the column. 
 
 522. The chief of the second division will not follow its move- 
 ment; he will see it file by him, and when its right guide shall be 
 abreast with him, he will command : 
 
 1. Second division. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 523. The first command will be given when the division shall 
 yet have seven or eight paces to march ; the second, when the 
 right guide shall be abreast with the chief of the division, and the 
 third immediately after the second. 
 
 524. At the second command, the division will halt; at the third, 
 it will face to the front, and if there be openings between the files, 
 the chief of the division will cause them to be promptly closed to 
 the right ; the left guides of both companies will step upon the 
 line of battle, face to the right, and place themselves on the direc- 
 tion of the markers established before the first division, each guide 
 opposite to one of the three left files of his company. 
 
 525. The division having faced to the front, its chief will place 
 himself accurately on the line of battle, on the left of the first di- 
 vision ; and when he shall see the guides assured on the direction, 
 he will command, Right — Dress. At this, the division will be 
 aligned by the right in the manner indicated in the first. 
 
 526. The third and fom-th divisions will continue to march : at 
 the command halt, given to the second, the chief of the third will halt 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALIOX. 146 
 
 in his own person, place himself exactly' o])po8ito to the guide of 
 the second, after this division shall have faced to the front and 
 closed its files ; he will see his division file past, and when his right 
 guide shall be abreast with him, he will command : 
 
 1. Third division. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 527. As soon as the division faces to the front, its chief will place 
 himself two paces before its center, andcdmmand : 
 
 1. Third division, fonoard. 2. Guide right. 3. March. 
 
 528. At the third command, the division will march toward the 
 line of battle; the right guide will so direct himself as to arrive 
 by the side of the man on the left of the second division, and when 
 the division is at thi*ee paces from the line of battle, its chief will 
 halt it and align it by the right. 
 
 529. The chief of the fourth division will conform himself (and 
 the chief of the fifth, if there be a fifth) to what has just been pre- 
 scribed for the third. 
 
 530. The deployment ended, the colonel will command: 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 531. At this coinmuud, the guides will resume tiicir pluees in line 
 of battle, and the markers will retire. 
 
 532. If the column be in march, and the colonel shall wish to 
 de})Joy it on the first division without hailing the column, ho will 
 make the di.spositions indicated Nus. 512 and 513, and when the 
 first division shall arrive at three paces fi'om the line, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. On the first division, deploy column. 2. Battalion by the left flank. 
 3. March (or double quick — M.\rch). 
 
 533. At the first command, the chief of the first division will 
 caution it to halt, and will command, Pirst division ; the other chiefs 
 will caution their divisions to face by the let\ flank. 
 
 534. At the command march, briskly repeated by the chiefs of 
 the rear divisions, the chief ol" the first divison will command, 
 Halt, and will align his division by the right against the markers ; 
 the other divisions will face to the left, their chiefs hastening to the 
 left of their divisions. Tiie seconcl division will conform its move- 
 ments to wliat is prescribed Xos. 522, and following. Tiie third 
 and fourth divisions will execute what is prescribed Nos. 52G, and 
 following; but tlie cliief of each division will halt in his own person 
 at the command march, given by the chief of the division which 
 precedes him, and when the right ol his division arrives abreast 
 of liim, he will command: 
 
 Such division, by the right flank — March. 
 
 535. The litutonant-colnncl will assure the position of the guides, 
 conforming to what is prescribed No. 431. The major will follow 
 tlie movement abreast with the fourth division. 
 
 10 
 
146 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 536. If the colonel shall wish to deploy the column Avithout halt- 
 ing it, and to continue the march, the markers will not be posted ; 
 the movement will be executed by the same commands and the 
 same means as the foregoing, but with the following modifications : 
 
 537. At the first command, the chief of the first division will 
 command, 1. Guide right. 2. Quick time. At the command, jDowi^e 
 quick — March, given by the colonel, the first division will march 
 in quick time and will take the touch of elbows to the right ; the 
 captains will jjlace themselves on the right of their respective com- 
 panies ; the captain on the right of the battalion will take points 
 on the ground to assure the direction of the march. The chief of 
 the second division will allow his division to file past him, and when 
 he sees its right abreast of him, he will command, 1. Second divi- 
 sion, by the right flank. 2. March. 3. Guide right, ni\d when this 
 division shall arrive on the alignment of the first, he will cause it 
 to march in quick time. The third and fourth divisions will de- 
 ploy according to the same principles as the second. 
 
 538. The colonel, lieutenant-colenel, major and color-bearer will 
 conform themselves to what is prescribed No. 458. 
 
 539. The colonel will see, pending the movement, that the prin- 
 ciples just prescribed are duly observed, and particularly that the 
 divisions, in deploying, be not halted too soon nor too late. He 
 will correct promptly and quickly the faults that may be commit- 
 ted, and prevent their propagation. This rule is general for all de- 
 ployments. 
 
 540. The column being at a halt, if, instead of deploying it on 
 the first, the colonel shall wish to deploy it on the rearmost divi- 
 sion, he will cause the dispositions to made indicated No. 511, and 
 following ; but it will be the right general guide whom he will send 
 to place himself beyond the point at which the right of the battal- 
 ion will rest when deployed. 
 
 541. The colonel will then command : 
 
 1. On the fourth (or such) division, deploy column. 2, Battalion, right 
 
 — Face. 
 
 542. At the first command, the chief of the fourth division will 
 caution it to stand fast ; the chiefs of the other divisions will cau- 
 tion them that they will have to face to the right. 
 
 543. At the second command, the first three divisions will face 
 to the right ; and the chief of each will place himself b}' the side 
 of its right guide. 
 
 544. At the same command, the lieutenant-colonel will j)lace 
 a third marker between the first two, so that this marker may be 
 opposite to one of the three right files of the left company of the 
 division ; the lieutenant-colonel will then place himself on the line 
 of battle a few paces beyond the point at which the right of the 
 third division will rest when deployed. 
 
 545. The colonel will then command : 
 
 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 147 
 
 546. At this command, the three right divisions will put them- 
 selves in march, the guide of the first so directing himself as to pass 
 three paces within the line marked by the right general guide. 
 The chief of the third division will not follow its movement; he 
 will see it file past, halt it when its left guide shall be abreast with 
 him, and cause it to fiicc to the front; and, if there be openings 
 between the files, he will cause them to be promptly closed to the 
 left. 
 
 547. The chief of the fourth division, when he sees it nearly un- 
 masked by the three others will command : 
 
 1. Fourth division^ forward. 2. Chiide left. 3. March. 
 
 548. At the command anarch, which will be given the instant the 
 fourth is unmasked, this division will approach the lino of battle, 
 and when at three paces from the markers on that line, its chief 
 will halt it, and command : 
 
 Left — Dress. 
 
 549. At this command, the division will dress forward against 
 the markers; the chief of the division and the junior captain will 
 each align the company on his right, and then command : 
 
 Front. 
 
 550. The instant that the third division is unmasked, its chief 
 will cause it to approach the line of battle, and halt it in the man- 
 ner just prescribed for the fourth. 
 
 551. The moment the division halts, its right guide and the cov- 
 ering sergeant of its left company will step on the line of battle, 
 placing themselves on the prolongation of the markers established 
 in front of the fourth division ; as soon as they shall be assured in 
 their positions, the division will be aligned as has just been pre- 
 scribed for the fourth. 
 
 552. The second and first divisions which will have continued to 
 march, will, in succession, be halted and aligned by the left, in the 
 same manner as the third ; the chiefs of these divisions will con- 
 form themselves to what is prescribed, No. 526. The second being 
 near the line of battle, the command will not be given for it to 
 move on this line but it will be dressed up to it. 
 
 553. The deployment ended, the colonel will command : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 554. At this command, the chiefs of division and the guides will 
 resume their places in line of battle, and the markers will retire. 
 
 555. The lieutenant-colonel will assure the positions of the 
 guides by the means indicated, No. 431, and the major will follow 
 the movement abreast with the fourth division. 
 
 556. If the column be in march, and the colonel shall wish to 
 deploy it on the fourth division, he will make the dispositions 
 indicated. No. 511 and following; and when the head of the col- 
 umn shall arrive within three paces of the line, he will cproni|nd: 
 
148 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 1. On the fourth division, deploy column. 2. Battalion, by the right 
 
 flank. 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 557. At the first command, the chief of the fourth division will 
 caution it to halt, and will command, Fourth division ; the chiefs of 
 the other divisions will caution their divisions to face to the right. 
 
 558. At the command march, briskly repeated by the chiefs of 
 the first three divisions, the chief of the fourth will command : 
 Halt. The first three divisions will face to the right, and be 
 directed parallelly to the line of battle. The chief of each of 
 these divisions will place himself by the side of its right guide. 
 The chief of the third division will see his division file past him, 
 and when his left guide is abreast of him, ho will halt it, and face 
 it to the front. The chief of the fourth division, when he shall see 
 it nearly unmasked, will command: 1. Fourth division, forward; 
 
 2. Guide left ; 3. March (or double quick — March). The division 
 will move towards the line of battle, and when at three paces from 
 this line, it will be halted by its chief, and aligned by the left. 
 
 559. The chief of the third division will move his division for- 
 ward, conforming to what has just been prescribed for the fourth. 
 
 560. The chiefs of the second and first divisions, after halting 
 their divisions, will conform to what is prescribed, No. 552. 
 
 561. If the colonel should wish to dej^loy on the fourth division 
 without halting the column, and to continue to march forward, he 
 will not have markers posted, and the movement will be executed 
 by the same commands and the same means, with the following 
 modifications : the fourth division, when unmasked, will be moved 
 forward in quick time, and will continue to march, instead of being 
 halted, and will take the touch of elbows to the left. The third 
 division, ©n being unmasked, will bo moved to the front in double 
 quick time, but when it arrives on the alignment of the fourth it 
 will take the quick step, and dress to the left until the command 
 Guide center, is given by the colonel. The chiefs of the second 
 and first divisions will conform to what has been prescribed for 
 the third. When the first division shall arrive on the line, the 
 colonel may cause the battalion to take the double quick step. 
 
 562. The colonel and lieutenant-colonel will conform to what has 
 been prescribed, Nos. 458 and 459. 
 
 563. To deploy the column on an interior division, the colonel 
 will cause the line to be traced b}^ the means above indicated, and 
 the general guides will move briskly on the line, as 2Drescribed, 
 Nos. 513 and 540. This being executed, the colonel will command : 
 1. On such division, deploy column. 2. Battalion outwards — Face. 
 
 3. March (or double qxdck — March). 
 
 564. Whether the column be with the right or left in front, the 
 divisions which, in the order in battle, belong to the right of the 
 directing one, will face to the right; the others, except the direct- 
 ing division, will face to the left ; the divisions in front of the 
 latter will deploy by the means indicated. No. 542, and following; 
 those in its rear will deploy as is jirescribed, No. 513, and following. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 149 
 
 565. The directing division, the instant it finds itself unmasked, 
 will approach the lino of battle, taking the guide left or right, 
 according as the right or left of the column may be in front. 
 The chief of this division will align it by the directing flank, and 
 then step back into the rear, in order momentarily to give place to 
 the chief of the next for aligning the next division. 
 
 566. The lieutcnont - colonel will assure the positions of the 
 guides of divisions, which, in the line of battle, take the right of 
 fhe directing division, and the major will assure the positions of 
 the other guides. 
 
 567. If the column be in march, the colonel will command: 
 
 1. On such dunsion, deploy column. 2. Battalion, by the riqht and 
 left flanks. 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 568. The divisions which are in front of the directing one will 
 deplo}' by the means indicated, Nos. 557, and following ; those in 
 rear, as prescribed. No. 533, and following. 
 
 569. The directing division, when unmasked, will conform to 
 what is prescribed for the fourth division, No. 558. 
 
 570. The colonel, lieutenant-colonel and major will conform to 
 what has been prescribed, Nos. 458 and 459. 
 
 571. In a column, left in front, deployments will be executed 
 according to the same principles, and by inverse means. 
 
 PART FIFTH. 
 Article II. — Oblique march in line of battle. 
 
 623. The battalion marching in line of battle, when the colonel 
 shall wish to cause it to oblique, he will command : 
 
 1. Right (or left) oblique. 2. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 624. At the first command, the major will place himself in front 
 of, and faced to the color-bearer. 
 
 625. At the command march, the whole battalion will take the 
 oblique step. The companies and captains will strictly observe 
 the principles established in the School of the Company. 
 
 626. The major in front of the color-bearer ought to maintain 
 the latter in a line with the center corporal, so that the color- 
 bearer may oblique neither more nor less than that corporal. He 
 will carefully observe also that they follow parallel directions and 
 preserve the same length of step. 
 
 627. The lieutenant-colonel will take care that the captainB and 
 the three corporals in the center keep exactly on a line and follow 
 parallel directions. 
 
 628. The colonel will see that the battalion ])reserves its paral- 
 lelism ; he will exert himself to prevent the files from opening or 
 crowding. If ho perceive the lattvr fault, he will cause the files 
 on the flank, to which the battalion obliques, to open out. 
 
 629. The colonel, wishing the direct march to be resume«i, will 
 ooramand : 
 
150 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 1. Forward. 2. March. 
 
 630. At the command march, the battalion will resume the direct 
 inarch. The major will place himself thirty paces in front of the 
 color-bearer, and face to the colonel, who will establish him, by a 
 signal of the sword, on the direction which the color -bearer ought 
 to pursue. The latter will immediately take two points on the 
 ground between himself and the major. 
 
 631. In resuming the direct march, care will be taken that the 
 men do not close the intervals which may exist between the files at 
 once;, it should be done almost insensibly. 
 
 Article III. — To halt the battalion, marching in line of battle, and 
 
 to align it. 
 
 635. The battalion, marching in the line of battle, when the 
 colonel shall wish to halt it, he will command : 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. Halt. 
 
 636. At the second command, the battalion will halt ; the color- 
 rank and the general guides will remain in front ; but if the colo- 
 nel should not wish immediately to resume the advance in line, 
 nor to give a general alignment, he will command : 
 
 Color and general guides — Posts. 
 
 637. At this command, the color-rank and general guides will 
 retake their places in line of battle, the captains in the left wing 
 will shift to the right of their companies. 
 
 638. If the colonel should then judge it necessary to rectify the 
 alignment, he will command ; 
 
 Captains, rectify the alignment. 
 
 639. The captains will immediately cast an eye towards the cen- 
 ter, align themselves accuratel}', on the basis of the alignment, 
 which the lieutenant-colonel will see well directed, and then 
 promptly dress their respective companies. The lieutenant-colo- 
 nel will admonish such captains as may not be accurately on the 
 alignment by the command : Captain of (such) company, or cap- 
 tains of (such) companies, move up or fall back. 
 
 640. But when the colonel shall wish to give the battalion a gen- 
 eral alignment, either parallel or oblique, instead of rectifying it 
 as above, he will move some paces outside of one of the general 
 guides (the right will here be supposed) and caution the right gen- 
 eral guide and the color-bearer to face him, and then establish 
 them by signal of the sword, on the direction which he may wish 
 to give to the battalion. As soon as they shall be correctly estab- 
 lished, the left general guide will place himself on their direction, 
 and be assured in his position by the major. The color-bearer 
 will carry the color-lance perpendicularly between his eyes, and the 
 two corporals of his rank will return to their places in the front 
 rank the moment he shall face to the colonel. 
 
 641. This disposition being made, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Guides — On the Line. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 151 
 
 642. At this command, the right guide of each company in the 
 right wing, and the left guide of each company in the left, will 
 each place himself on the direction of the color-bearer, and the 
 two general guides, face to the color-bearer, place himself in rear 
 of the guide who is next before him, at a distance equal to the 
 front of his company, and align himself upon the color-bcaror and 
 the general guide beyond. 
 
 643. The captains in the right wing will shift to the leftof their 
 companies, except the captain of the color-company, who will re- 
 main on its right, but step into the rear rank ; the captains in the 
 left wing will shift to the right of their companies. 
 
 644. The lieutenant colonel will promptly rectify, if necessary, 
 the i)ositions of the guides of the right wing, and the major those 
 of the other ; which being executed, the colonel will command : 
 
 2. On the center — Dress. 
 
152 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 645. At this command, the companies will move up in quick 
 time against the guides, ^yhe^e, having arrived, each captain will 
 align his company according to prescribed principles, the lieuten- 
 ant colonel aligning the color-company. 
 
 646. If the alignment be oblique, the captains will take care to 
 conform their companies to it in conducting them towards the 
 line. 
 
 647. The battalion being aligned, the colonel will command : 
 
 3. Color and guides — Posts. 
 
 648. At this command, the color-bearer, the general and com- 
 pany guides, and the captains in the right wing, will take their 
 places in the line of battle, and the color-bearer will replace the 
 heel of the color-lance against his right hip. 
 
 649. If the new direction of the line of battle be such that one 
 or more companies find themselves in advance of that line, the 
 colonel, before establishing the general guides on the line, will 
 cause such companies to be moved to the rear, either by the back 
 step, or by first facing about, according as there may be less or 
 more ground to be rej^assed to bring the companies in rear of the 
 new direction. 
 
 650. When the colonel shall wish to give a general alignment, 
 and the color and general guides are not on the line, he will cause 
 them to move out by the command : 
 
 1. Color and general guides — On the Line. 
 
 651. At this command, the color-bearer and the general guides 
 will place themselves on the line, conforming to what is prescribed, 
 m. 640. 
 
 Article TV .—^Change of direction in marching in line of battle. 
 
 652. The battalion' marching in line of battle, when the colonel 
 shall wish it to change direction to the right, he will command : 
 
 1. Change direction to the right. 2. March (or double quick — 
 
 March). 
 
 653. At the command mairh, the movement will commence ; the 
 color-rank will shorten the step to fourteen or seventeen inches, 
 and direct itself circularly to the right, taking care to advance the 
 left shoulder, but only insensibly; the major will place himself be- 
 fore the color-bearer, facing him, and so direct his march that he 
 may describe an arc of a circle neither too large nor too small ; he 
 will also see that the color-bearer takes steps of fourteen or seven- 
 teen inches, according to the gait. 
 
 654. The right general guide will wheel on the right captain of 
 the battalion as his pivot ; the left general guide will circularly 
 march in the step of twenty-eight inches or thirty-three inches, 
 according to the gait, and will align himself upon the color-bearer 
 and the right general guide. 
 
 655. The corporal placed in the center of the battalion, will 
 take steps of fourteen or seventeen inches, and will wheel to the 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 153 
 
 right by advancing insensibly the left shoulder ; the battalion will 
 conform itself to the movement of the center; to this end, the 
 captain of the color-company, and the captain of the next to the 
 left, Avill attentively regulate their march, as Avell as the direction 
 of their shoulders, on the three center corporals. All the other 
 captains will regulate the direction of their shoulders and th6 
 length of their step on this basis. 
 
 656. The men -will redouble their attention in order not to pass 
 the line of captains. 
 
 657. In the left wing, the pace will be lengthened in proportion 
 as the file is distant from the center; the captain of the eighth 
 company who closes the left flank of the battalion will take steps 
 of twenty-eight or thirty-three inches, according to the gait. 
 
 658. In the right wing the pace will be shortened in proportion 
 as the file is distant from the center; the captain who closes the 
 right flank will only slowly turn in his person, observing to yield 
 ground a little if pushed. 
 
 659. The colonel will take care to prevent the center of the bat- 
 talion from describing an arc of a circle, either too great or too 
 small, in order that the wings may conform themselves to its move- 
 ment. He will see also that the captains keep their companies 
 constantly aligned upon the center, so that there may be no open- 
 ing and no crowding of files. He will endeavor to prevent faults, 
 and, should they occur, correct them without noise. 
 
 660. The lieutenent-colonel, placed before the battalion, will give 
 his attention to the same objects. 
 
 661. When the colonel shall wish the direct march to be re- 
 sumed, he will command : 
 
 1. Forvard. 2. M.\RrH. 
 
 662. At the command march, the color-rank, the general guides, 
 and the battalion will resume the direct march ; the major will 
 immediately ])lace himself thirty or forty paces in front, face to 
 the colonel, placed in rear of the center, who will establish him by 
 signal of the sword on the perpendicular direction which the cor- 
 poral in the center of the battalion ought to pursue ; the major will 
 immediately cause the color-bearer, if necessary, to incline to the 
 right or left, so as to be exactly opposite to his file ; thecolor-bear- 
 or will then take two points on the ground between himself and 
 the majf>r. 
 
 663. The lieutenant-colonel will endeavor to give to the color- 
 company and the next on the left a direction perpendicular to that 
 pursued by the center corporal ; and all the other companies, 
 without precijtitancy, will conform themselves to that basis. 
 
 Article V. — To march in rdreat, in line of battle. 
 
 664. The battalion being halted, if it be the wish of the colonel 
 to cause it to march in retreat, he will command : 
 
 1. Face to the rear. 2. Battalion, about — Fack. 
 
154 SCHOOE OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 665. At the second command, the battalion will face about ; the 
 color-rank and the general guides, if in advance, will take their 
 places in line ; the color-bearer will pass into the rear rank, now 
 leading ; the corporal of his file will step behind the corporal next 
 on his own right, to let the color-bearer pass, and then step into 
 the -front rank, now rear, to re-form the color-file ; the colonel will 
 place himself behind the front rank, become the rear ; the lieuten- 
 ant-colonel and major will place themselves before the I'ear rank, 
 now leading. 
 
 666. The colonel will take post forty paces behind the color file, 
 in order to assure the lieutenant-colonel on the perpendicular, who 
 will place himself at a like distance in front, as loi-escribed for the 
 advance in line of battle. 
 
 667. If the battalion be the one charged with the direction, the 
 colonel will establish markers in the manner indicated, ^o. 589, 
 except that they will face to the battalion, and that the first will 
 be placed twenty-five paces from the lieutenant-colonel. If the 
 markers be already established, the oflicer charged Avith replacing 
 them in succession will cause them to face about, the moment that 
 the battalion executes this movement, and then the marker nearest 
 to the battalion will hasten to the rear of the two others. 
 
 668. These dispositions being made, the colonel will command ; 
 
 3. Battalion^ forward. 
 
 669. At this command, the color-bearer will advance six paces 
 beyond the rank of file closers, accompanied by the two corporjils 
 of his guard of that rank, the center corporal stepping back to let 
 the color-bearer pass ; the two file closers nearest this center cor- 
 poral will unite on him behind the color-guard to seiwe as a basis 
 of alignment for the line of file closers ; the two general guides 
 will place themselves abreast with the color rank, the covering ser- 
 geants will place themselves in the line of file closers, and the cap- 
 tains in the rear rank, now leading ; the captains in the left wing, 
 now right, will, if not already there, shift to the left of their com- 
 panies, now become the right. 
 
 670. The colonel will then command : 
 
 4. March (or double quick — March.) 
 
 671. The battalion will march in retreat on the same principles 
 which govern the advance in line : the center corporal behind the 
 color-bearer will march exactly in his trace. 
 
 672! If it be the directing battalion, the color-bearer will direct 
 himself on the markers, who will, of their own accord, each place 
 himself in succession behind the marker most distant, on being 
 approached by the battalion ; the ofiScer charged with the super- 
 intendence of the markers will carefully assure them on the direc- 
 tion. 
 
 673. In the case of a subordinate battalion, the color-bearer will 
 maintain himself on the perpendicular by means of points taken 
 on the trround. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 155 
 
 674. The colonel, lieutenant-colonel and major will each discharge 
 the same functions as in the advance in line. 
 
 675. The lieutenant-colonel, placed on the outside of the file 
 closers of the color company, will also maintain the three file clo- 
 sers of the basis of alignment in a square with the line of direc- 
 tion : the other file closers will keep themselves aligned on this 
 basis. 
 
 Article VI. — To halt the battalion inarching in retreat^ and to face it 
 
 to the front. 
 
 676. The colonel having halted the battalion, and wishing to face 
 it to the front, will command: 
 
 1. Face to the front. 2. Battalion, about — Face. 
 
 677. At the second command, the color-rank, general guides, 
 captains and covering sergeants, will all retake their habitual places 
 in line of battle, and the color-bearer will repass into the front 
 rank. 
 
 678. The battalion marching in line of battle by the front rank, 
 when the colonel shall wish to march it in retreat, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Battalion., right about. 2. March. 
 
 679. At the command march, the battalion will face to the rear 
 and move oflf at the same gait by the rear rank. The principles 
 prescribed Nos. 669 and following will be carefully observed. 
 
 680. If the colonel should wisli the battalion to march again by 
 the front, he will give the same commands. 
 
 Article VII. — Change of direction, in marching in retreat. 
 
 681. A battalion retiring in line will change direction by the com- 
 mands and means indicated No. 652 and following; the three file 
 closers, united behind the color rank, will conform themselves to 
 the movement of this rank, and wheel like it ; the center file closer 
 of the three will take steps of fourteen or seventeen inches, accord- 
 ing to the gait, and keep himself steadily at the same distance 
 from the color-bearer ; the line of file closers will conform them- 
 selves to the movement of itw center, and the lieutenant-colonel will 
 maintain it on that basis. 
 
156 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION, 
 
 Article VIII. — Passage of obstacles, advancing and retreating. 
 
 ' % ...„ -^..^ h , 
 
 ^imil|llll!llllllllilHllllllllllll!!lll ll|!l Hm ill!ll!li!illllllllllH^lillllllff^ 
 
 rie.i. 
 
 ^t=i: 
 
 1^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 1. a. rr 
 
 rsr 
 
 [iiiiiiiiiiiHiiim:iaiiiiIilB»__ _ ^lllililliiiiiiii^BllH i 
 
 ■HI 
 
 M \. r 
 
 ^ 
 
 ■F 
 
 Tiff. 2. 
 
 riE *" a, ^ -, 
 
 1 i 
 
 .cf 
 
 ^ >■ 
 
 682. The battalion advancing m line will be supposed to encoun- 
 ter an obstacle which covers one or more companies ; the colonel 
 will cause them to ploy into column at full distance, in rear of the 
 next company towards the color, which will be executed in the fol- 
 lowing manner. It will be supposed that the obstacle only covers 
 the third company, the colonel will command : 
 
 Third company, obstacle. 
 
 683. At this command, the captain of the third company will 
 place himself in its front, turn to it, and command, 1. Third com- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 157 
 
 pany, by the left flank, to the rear into column. 2. Double quick. 3. 
 March. lie will then hasten to the left of his company. 
 
 68-4. At the command march, the company will face to the left 
 in marching ; the two lefl files will promptly disengage to the rear 
 in double quick time ; the left guide placing himself at the head of 
 the front rank, will conduct it behind the fourth company, direct- 
 ing himself parallelly with this company ; the captain of the thii'd 
 will himself halt opposite to the captain of the fourth, and see his 
 company file past ; when its right file shall be nearly up with him, 
 he will' command, 1. Third company. 2. By the right flank. 3. 
 March. 4. Guide right, and place himself before the center of his 
 company. 
 
 685. At the command march, the company will face to the right, 
 preserving the same gait, but the moment it shall be at the pre- 
 scribed distance, its captain will command : 
 
 1. Quick time. 2. March. 
 
 686. This company will thus follow in column that behind which 
 it finds itself, and at wheeling distance, its right guide marching 
 exactly in the trace of the captain of that company. 
 
 687. As soon as the third company shall have faced to the left, 
 the left guide of the second will place himself on the left of the 
 front rank of his company, and maintain between himself and the 
 right of the fourth the space necessary for the return into line of 
 the third. 
 
 688. The obstacle being passed, the colonel will command : 
 
 Third company, forward into line. 
 
 689. At this command, the captain turning to his company, will 
 add: 
 
 1. By company, right half ichcel. 2. Double quick. 3. March. 
 
 690. At the command march, the company will take the double 
 quick step, and execute a half wheel; its captain will then com- 
 mand, 1. Forward. 2. March. 3. Guide left. The second com- 
 mand will be given when the company shall have sufficiently 
 wheeled. 
 
 691. At the command march, the company will direct itself 
 straight forward toward tin; line of battle, and retake its position 
 in it according to the principles prescribed for the tbrmation for- 
 ward into line of battle. 
 
 692. It will be suppo.sed that the obstacle covers several contig- 
 uous companies Tthe three companies on the right for example), 
 the colonel will command : ' 
 
158 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 1. Three right co7npanies, obstacle. 2. By the left flank, to the rear 
 into column. 3. Double quick — March. 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^lllMillMliyiSi 
 
 'tMimiHIW IffllllllllHWIJllllV' 
 
 693. At the first command, the captains of the designated com- 
 panies will each place himself before the center of his company, 
 and caution it as to tqe movement about to be executed. 
 
 694. At the command march, the designated companies will 
 face to the left in marching, and immediately take the double 
 quick step ; each captain will cause the head of his company to 
 disengage itself to the rear, and the left guide will place himself 
 at the head of the front rank; the captain of the third company 
 will conform himself to what is prescribed No. 684, and following; 
 the captains of the other companies will conduct them by the flank 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 159 
 
 in rear of the third, inclining toward the licad of thecolunin ; and 
 as the head of each company arrives opposite to the ris^ht of the 
 one next before it in column, its captain will himself halt, sec his 
 company file past, and confoi-m himself for facin<j it to the front, 
 in marching, to what is prescribed No. 684, and following. 
 
 695. When the last company in column shall have passed the 
 ob.stacle, the colonel will command: 
 
 1. Three right companies, foncard^ into line. 
 
 696. At this command, the captain of each of these three com- 
 panies will command, By company, right half wheel. The colonel 
 will then add : 
 
 1. Double quick. 2- March. 
 
 007. At this, briskly repeated by the captains of the three com- 
 panies, each company will conform itself to what is prescribed No. 
 t!90, and following. 
 
 698. It is supposed, in the foregoing examples, that the compan- 
 ies belonged to the right Aving: if they make part of the other, 
 they will execute the passage of an obstacle according to the same 
 |)rinci])lcs and by inverse moans. 
 
 699. When flank companies are broken off to pass an obsta- 
 cle, the general guide on that flank Avill place himself six jiaces in 
 front of the outer file of the nearest company to him remaining in 
 line. 
 
 700. In the preceding movements, it has been supposed that the 
 battalion was marching in quick time, but if it be marching in 
 double quick time, and the colonel shall wish to cause several con- 
 tiguous companies to break to *,' -"'ill first order the bat- 
 
 1 
 
 709. When a battalion, retiring in line, shall encounter a defile 
 which it must pass, the colonel will halt the battalion, and face it 
 to the front. 
 
 710. It will be supposed that the defile is in rear of the left 
 flank, and that its width is Buflicient to give passage to a column 
 by platoon ; the colonel will place a marker fifteen or twenty paces 
 in rear of the file closers at the point around which the subdivi- 
 sions will have to change direction in order to enter the defile; ho 
 will then command : 
 
 To the rear, by the right flank, pass the defile. 
 
 711. The captain of the firet company will immocfately com- 
 mand: 
 
 n 
 
160 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION", 
 
 will afterwards successively put thcmiHelves into line by the oblique 
 step, as the ground may permit. 
 
 705. If the battalion be marching in i-etreat in double quick 
 time, and many contiguous companies be marching before the rear 
 rank of the battalion, the colonel will not change the gait of the 
 battalion in causing them to re-enter into line. 
 
 706. When the color-company shall bo obliged to execute the 
 movement of passing an obstacle, the color-bearer will return into 
 lin& at the moment the company shall face to the left or right ; the 
 major will place himself six paces before the extremity of the com- 
 pany behind which the color-company marches in column, in or- 
 der to give the step and the direction ; h6, himself, first taking the 
 step from the battalion. 
 
 707. As soon as the color-company shall have returned into line, 
 the front rank of the color-guard Avill again move out six paces in 
 front of the battalion, and take the step from the major ; the lat- 
 terwill immediately place himself twenty or thirty paces in front 
 of the color-bearer, and face to the colonel placed behind the cen- 
 ter of the battalion, who will establish him on the perpendicular ; 
 and as soon as he shall be assured on it, the color-bearer will in- 
 stantl}^ take two points on the ground between himself and the 
 major. 
 
 708. It is prescribed, as a general rule, that the compasies of 
 the right wing ought to execute the movement of passing obstacles 
 by the left flank, and the reverse for companies of the other wing; 
 but if the obstacle cover at once several companies of the center, 
 each will file into column behind that. Still in line, and of the same 
 wing, which ma^J)e^i^___p ^mw.,. 
 
 693. At the first command, the captains of the designated com- 
 panies will each place himself before the center of his company, 
 and caution it as to tqe movement about to be executed. 
 
 694. At the command march, the designated companies will 
 face to the left in marching, and immediately take the double 
 quick step ; each captain will cause the head of his company to 
 disengage itself to the rear, and the left guide will place himself 
 at the head of the front rank; the captain of the third company 
 will conform himself to what is prescribed No. 684, and following; 
 the captains of the other companies will conduct them by the flank 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 161 
 
 Article IX. — To pass a defile, in retreat, by the right or left flank. 
 
 zfir^rfp 
 
 709. When a battalion, retiring in line, shall encounter a defile 
 which it must pasp, the colonel will halt the battalion, and face it 
 to the front. 
 
 710. It will be supposed that the defile is in rear of the left 
 flank, and that its width is sufficient to give passage to a column 
 by platoon ; the colonel will place a marker fifteen or twenty paces 
 in rear of the file closers at the point around which the subdivi- 
 sions will have to change direction in order to enter the defile; ho 
 will then command : 
 
 To the rear, by the right fi/ink, pass the defile. 
 
 711. The captain of the first company will immecCately com- 
 mand : 
 
 n 
 
162 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 1. First company, right — Face. 2. March (or double quick — 
 
 March) . 
 
 712. At the command march, the first compan}"- will commence 
 the movement ; the first file will wheel to the right, march to the 
 rear till it shall have passed four paces bej'ond the file closers, 
 when it will wheel again to the right, and then direct itself straight 
 forward toward the left flank. All the other files of this company 
 will come to wheel in succession at the same place where the first 
 had wheeled. 
 
 713. The second company will execute, in its turn, the same 
 movement, by the commands of its captain, who will give the 
 command March, so that the first file of his company may imme- 
 diately follow' the last of the first, Avithout constraint, however, as 
 to taking the step of the first ; the first file of the secpnd company 
 will wheel to the right, on its ground ; all the other files of this 
 company will come in succession to wheel at the same place. The 
 following companies will execute, each in its turn, what has just 
 been prescribed for the second. 
 
 714. When the whole of the second company shall be on the 
 same direction with the first, the captain of the first will cause it 
 to form, by platoon, into line, and the moment that it is in column 
 the guide of the first platoon will direct himself on the marker 
 around whom he has to 'change direction in order to enter the 
 defile. 
 
 715. The second company will continue to march b}^ the flank, 
 direcing itself parallelly with the line of battle ; and it, in its turn, 
 will form, by platoon, into line, when the third company shall be 
 wholly on the same direction Avith itself. 
 
 716. The following companies will successively execute what has 
 just been prescribed for the second, and each Avill form, b}- platoon, 
 into line, when the next company shall be on the same direction 
 with itself. 
 
 717. The first platoon of the leading company, having arrived 
 opposite to the marker placed at the entrance of the defile, will 
 turn to the left, and the following platoons Avill all execute this 
 movement at the same point. As the last comj^anies will not be 
 able to form platoons before reaching the defile, they will so direct 
 themselves, in entering it, as to leave room to the left for this 
 movement. 
 
 718. The battalion will thus pass the defile by platoon; and, as 
 the two platoons of each company shall clear it, companies Avill be 
 successively formed by the means indicated. School of the Com- 
 pany, No. 273, and following. 
 
 719. The head of the column having cleared the defile, and 
 having reached the distance atAvhich the colonel wishes to re-form 
 line faced to the defile, he may cause the leading company to turn 
 to the left, to prolong the column in that direction, and then form 
 it to the left into line of battle ; or he may halt tlae column, and 
 form it into line of battle, faced to the rear. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 163 
 
 720. If the defile be in the rear of the right flank, it will be 
 ])assed b}' the left ; the movement will be executed according to 
 the same principles, and by inverse means. 
 
 721. If the defile be too narrow to receive the front of a platoon, 
 it will be passed by the flank. Captains and file closers will be 
 watchful that the files do not lose their distances in marching. 
 Comp.'inics or platoons will be formed into line as the width of the 
 dcfil" ma}' permit, or as the companies shall successively clear it. 
 
 Article X. — To march by the flank. 
 
 722. The colonel, wishing the battal- 
 ion to march bj- the flank, Avill command : 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. Bight (or Z^/f)— Face. ' ' ' 
 3. Forward. 4. M.\rch (or double quick 
 
 -March). n i i i 
 
 723. At the second command, the cap- Liij^ 
 tains and covering sergeants will place ^ , , , | 
 themselves as prescribed. Nos. 138 and 
 
 Ul. School of the Company. ' ' ' ' ' 
 
 724. The sergeant on tli'c left of the - ■ ' ' 
 
 battalion will place himself to the left n il' ' 1 ^^ 
 
 and by the side of the last file of his , ^ 
 
 company, covering the captains in file. <V vv 
 
 72.5. The battalion having to fixce by , "vsP 
 
 the left flank, the captains, at the second I- "^ 
 
 command, will shift rapidly to the left ^ ' ' '' ■ ' 
 
 of their companies, and each place him- t-i t i i 
 
 self by the side of the covering sergeant i i i r i 
 
 of the company preceding his own, ex- c | i^ r ^ 
 
 copt the captain of the left company, -— r-p- . 
 
 who will place himself b}- the side of the ^~^ 
 
 sergeant on the left of the battalion. ' ' ' ^ ' 
 
 The c^ivering sergeant of the right com- : • . :.i 
 
 pany will place himself by the right side * r. ; i— i 
 
 of the front rank man of the rearmost ■■ ^ y -, 
 file of his com]»any, wavering the ca]itains 
 
 in fiio. ^"^^^^^^ 
 
 72G. At the command march, the bat- ' '■' -^ 
 
 talion will step off with life; the scr- t j. : i --' 
 
 gcant, placed before the leading file (right r I 'l n 
 
 or left in front), will be careful to ]ire- jj_^_j^ , 
 serve exact!}" the length and cadence of 
 
 the step, and to direct himself straight forward ; to this end he 
 
 will take points on the ground. -mi^ 
 
 727. Whether the battalion march by the right or left flank, the 
 li«'Utenant-colonel will yilace himself abreast with the leading file, 
 ami the major abreast with the color file, both on the side of the 
 front rank, and about six paces from it. 
 
164 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 728. The adjutant, placed between the lieutenant-colonel and 
 the front rank, will march in the same step with the head of the 
 battalion, and the sepfeant-major, placed between the major and 
 the color-bearer, will march in the same step with the adjutant. 
 
 729. The captains and file closers will carefully see that the files 
 neither open out, nor close too much, and that they regain insen- 
 sibly their distances, if lost. 
 
 730. The colonel wishing the battalion to wheel by file, will 
 command : 
 
 1. By file right (or left). 2. March. 
 
 731. The files will wheel in succession, and all at the place where 
 the first had wheeled, in conforming to the principles prescribed 
 in the School of the Company. 
 
 732. The battalion marching by the flank, when the colonel 
 shall wish it to halt, he will command : 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 
 
 733. These commands will be executed as prescribed in the 
 School of the Company, Ko. 146. 
 
 734. If the battalion be marching by the flank, and the colonel 
 should wish to cause it to march in line, either to the front or to 
 the rear, the movements will be executed b}^ the commands and 
 means prescribed in the School of the Company. 
 
 Article XI. — To form the battalion on the right or left, by file, into 
 
 line of battle. 
 
 735. The battalion marching by the right flank, when the colonel 
 shall wish to form it on the right by file, he will determine the 
 line of battle, and the lieutenant-colonel will place two markers on 
 that line, in conformity with what is prescribed, No. 415. 
 
 736. The head of the battalion being nearly up with the first 
 marker, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. On the right, by file, into line. 2. JVIarch (or double quick — 
 
 March). 
 
 737. At the command march, the leading company will form 
 itself on the right by file, into line of battle, as indicated in the 
 School of the Company, No. 149 ; the front rank man of the first 
 file will rest his breast lightly against the right arm of the first 
 marker; the other companies will follow the movement of the 
 leading company ; each captain will place himself on the line at 
 the same time with the front rank man of his first file, and on the 
 right of this man. 
 
 738. The left guide of each company, except the leading one, 
 will place himself on the direction of the markers, and opposite to 
 the left file of his company, at the instant that the front rank man 
 of this file arrives on the line. 
 
 739. The formation being ended, the colonel will command : 
 
 €hiides—Po&a!e. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 166 
 
 740. The colonel will superintend the succcBsive formation of 
 the battalion, moving along the front of the line of battle. 
 
 741. The lieutenant-colonel will, in succession, assure the direc- 
 tion of the guides, and see that the men of the front rank, in 
 placing themselves on the line, do not pass it. 
 
 742. If the battalion mai'ch by the left flank, the movement will 
 be executed according to the same principles, and by inverse means. 
 
 Article XII. — Changes of front. 
 Change of front perpendicularly fonrard. 
 
 743. The battalion being in line of battle, it is supposed to be the 
 wish of the colonel to cause a change of front forward on the right 
 company, and that the angle formed by the old and new positions 
 be a right angle, or a few degrees more or less than one ; he will 
 cause two markers to be placed on the new direction, before the 
 position to be occupied by that company, and order its captain to 
 establish it against the markers. 
 
 744. The captain of the right company will immediately direct 
 it upon the markers by a wheel to the right on the fixed pivot; 
 and after having halted it, he will align it by the right. 
 
 745. These dispositions being made, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Change front forward on first company. 2. By company, right 
 half wheel. .3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 746. At the Fccond command, each captain will place bimAelf 
 before the center of his company. 
 
166 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 747. At the third, each company will wheel to the right on the 
 fixed pivot ; the left guide of each will place himself on its left as 
 80on as he shall he able to pass ; and when the colonel shall judge 
 that the companies have sufficiently wheeled, he will command : 
 
 4. Forward. 5. March. 6. Guide right. 
 
 748. At the fifth command, the comjjanies ceasing to wheel will 
 march straight forward ; at the sixth, the men will touch elbows 
 towards the right. 
 
 749. The right guide of the second comj^any will march straight 
 forward until this comj)any shall arrive at the point where it 
 should turn to the right ; each succeeding right guide will follow 
 the file immediately before him at the cessation of the wheel, and 
 will march in the trace of this file until this company shall turn 
 to the right to move upon the line ; this guide will then march 
 straight forward. 
 
 750. The second company having arrived opposite to the left 
 file of the first, its captain will cause it to turn to the right ; the 
 right guide will direct himself so as to arrive squarely upon the 
 line of battle, and when he shall be at three paces from that line, 
 the captain wdll command : 
 
 1. Second company. 2. Halt. 
 
 751. At the second command, the company will halt; the files 
 not yet in line with the guide will come into it jiromptly, the left 
 guide will place himself on the line of battle, and as soon as he is 
 assured in the direction by the lieutenant-colonel, the captain will 
 align the company by the right. 
 
 752. Each following company will conform to what has just 
 been prescribed for the second. 
 
 753. The formation ended, the colonel will command : 
 
 ; ■ Guides — Posts, 
 
 754. If the battalion be in march, and the colonel shall wish to 
 change front forward on the first company, and that the angle 
 formed by the old and new positions be a right angle, he will 
 cause two markers to be placed on the new direction, before the 
 position to be occuj^ied by that company, and will command : 
 
 1. Change front forward on first company. 2. By company , right half 
 wheel. 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 755. At the fii'st command, the caj)tains will move rapidly be- 
 fore the center of their respective companies ; the captain of the 
 first comjDany will command: 1. Right turn; 2. Quick time; the 
 captains of the other comj^anies will caution them to wheel to 
 the right. 
 
 756. At the command inarch, the first company will turn to the 
 right according to the principles prescribed in the school of the 
 soldier. No. 402 ; its captain will halt it at three paces from the 
 markers, and the files in rear will promj^tly come into line. The 
 captain will align the company by the right. , 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 167 
 
 757. Eacli of the other companies will wheel to the right on a 
 fixed pivot ; the left guides will place themselves on the left of 
 their respective companies, and when the colonel shall judge they 
 have wheeled sufficiently, he will command : 
 
 4. Foncard. 5. March. 6. Guide right. 
 
 758. These commands will be executed as indicated No. 74G and 
 following. 
 
 759. The colonel will cause the battalion to change front forward 
 on the eighth company according to the same principles and by 
 inverse means. 
 
 Change of front perpendicularly to the rear. 
 
 
 \ V 
 
 "I 
 
168 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 760. The colonel, wishing to change front to the rear on the 
 right company, will impart his purpose to the captain of this com- 
 pany. The latter will immediately face his company about, wheel 
 it to the left on the fixed pivot, and halt it when it shall be in the 
 direction indicated to him by the colonel ; the captain will then 
 face his company to the front, and align it by the right against 
 the two markers, whom the colonel will cause to be established be- 
 fore the right and left files. 
 
 761. These dispositions being made, the colonel will command: 
 
 1. Change front to the rear, on first company. 2. Battalion, ahoxit — 
 Face. 3. By company, left half icheel. 4. March (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
 762. At the second command, all the companies, except the 
 right, will face about. 
 
 763. At the third, the captains, whose companies have faced 
 about, will each place himself behind the center of his company, 
 two paces from the front rank, now the rear. 
 
 764. At the fourth, these companies will wheel to the left on the 
 fixed pivot by the rear rank ; the left guide of each will, as soon 
 as he is able to pass, place himself on the left of the rear rank of 
 his company, now become the right ; and when the colonel shall 
 judge that the companies have sufficiently wheeled, he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 5. Forward. 6. March. 7. Gruide left. 
 
 765. At the sixth command, the companies will cease to wheel, 
 inarch straight forward towards the new line of battle, and, at the 
 seventh, take the touch of the elbow towards the left. 
 
 766. The guide of each company on its right flank, become 
 left, will conform himself to the principles prescribed. No. 748» 
 
 767. The second company, from the right, having arrived oppo- 
 site to the left of the first, will turn to the left ; the guide will sa 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 169 
 
 direct himself a8 to arrive parallolly with the line of battle, cross 
 that line, and when the front rank, now in the rear, shall be three 
 paces beyond it, the captain will command: 1. Second company. 
 2. Halt. 
 
 768. At the second command, the company will halt; the files 
 which may not yet be in line with the guide, will promptly come 
 into it ; the captain will cause the company to face aoout, and 
 then align it by the right. 
 
 769. All the other companies will execute what has just been 
 prescribed for the second, each as it successively arrives opposite 
 to the left of the company that precedes it on the new line of bat- 
 tle. 
 
 770. The formation being ended, the colonel will command : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 771. The colonel will cause a change of front on the left com- 
 pany of the battalion to the rear, according to the same principles 
 and by inverse means. 
 
 772. In changes of front, the colonel will give a general super- 
 intendence to the movement. 
 
 773. The lieutenant-colonel will assure the direction of the 
 guides as they successively move out on the line of battle, con- 
 forming himself to what has been prescribed in the successive 
 formations. 
 
 Aeticlk XIII. — To ploy the battalion into column doubled on the 
 
 center. 
 
170 
 
 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 Pier 3 
 
 — -- JJ-, ,J1 a rj 
 
 iiliiuiiililiiliijfliiiriiniiiiiiiiiiiglliiiiiiiiiliiiiii 
 
 
 -y 
 
 illllllMliriltplilllllllllilllbiillillllllllllllllllllMllllllllllllllllllllM 
 
 iiniiii l''" 
 
 1. 
 
 776. This movement consists in ploying the corresponding com- 
 panies of the right and left wings into column at company dis- 
 tance, or closed in mass, in rear of the two center companies, ac- 
 cording to the principles prescribed, Article III., Part II., of this 
 School. 
 
 777. The colonel, wishingto form the double column at company 
 distance, (the battalion being in line of battle,) will command : 
 
 1. Boifble column, at half distance. 2. Battalion, inwards — Face. 3. 
 March (or double quick — March). 
 
 778. At the first command, the captains will place themselves 
 two paces in front of their respective companies ; the captains of 
 the two center companies will caution them to stand fast, and the 
 other captains will caution their companies to face to the left and 
 right, respectively. The covering sergeants will step into the 
 front rank. 
 
 779. At the second command, the fourth and fifth companies will 
 stand fast ; the others of the right wing will face to the left, and 
 the others of the left wing will face to the right; each captain 
 whose company has faced, will hasten to break to the rear the two 
 files at the head of his comj)any ; the left guide of each right com- 
 j^any, and the right guide of each left company, Avill each place 
 himself at the head of its front rank, and the captain by the side 
 of his guide. 
 
 780. At the command march, the fourth and fifth companies, 
 which are to form the first division, will stand fast ; the senior cap- 
 tain of the two will place himself before the center of the division 
 and command : Guide right ; the junior captain will place himself 
 in the interval between the two companies, and the left guide of 
 the left company will place himself in the front rank on the left of 
 the division, as soon as he shall be able to pass. 
 
 781. All the other comj)anies, conducted by their captains, will 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 171 
 
 step off -with life to arrancjc themselves in column at company dis- 
 tance, each company behind the prccedinj? one in the column of 
 the same Aving, so that, in the right wino;, the third may be next 
 behind the fourth, the second next to the third, and so on to the 
 right company ; and, in the left wing, the sixth may bo next be- 
 hind the tifth, the seventh next to the sixth, and so on to the left 
 company of the battalion. 
 
 782. The corresponding companies of the two wings will unite 
 into divisions in arranging themselves in column ; an instant be- 
 fore the union, at the center of the column, the left guides of right 
 companies will pass into the line of file closers, and each captain 
 will command : 1. Such company; 2. Halt; 3. Front. 
 
 783. At the second command, which will be given at the instant 
 ■of union, each company will halt ; at the third, it will face to the 
 front. The senior captain in each division will place himself on 
 its right, and command, Bight — Dress, and the junior captain will 
 place himself in the interval betAvccn the two companies. The 
 division being aligned, its chief will command Front, and take his 
 position two paces before its center. 
 
 784. The column being thus formed, the divisions will take the 
 respective denominations of first, second, third, d:c., according to po- 
 sition in the column, beginning at the front. 
 
 785. The lieutenant-colonel, who, at the second command, given 
 by the colonel. Mill have placed himself at a little more than com- 
 pany' distance in rear of the right guide of the first division, will 
 assure the right guides on the direction asthey successively arrive, 
 by placing himself in their rear. 
 
 786. The music will pass to the rear of the column. 
 
 787. The battalion being in march, to form the double column 
 at company distance without halting the battalion, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 1. Double column at half distance. 2. Battalion by the right and left 
 flanJis. 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 788. At the first command, each captain will move briskly in 
 front of the center of his company; the captains of the fourth and 
 fifth will caution their companies to march straight forward ; the 
 other captains will caution their companies to face to the right and 
 left.: 
 
 7S9. At the command march, the fourth and fifth companies will 
 continue to march straight ff)rward ; the senior captain will place 
 himself before the center f»f his division, and command : Guide 
 right ; the junior captain will ]ilace himself in the interval between 
 the two companies. The l«ft guide of the fifth company will place 
 himself on the left of the front rank of the division. Tho men 
 will take the touch of elbows to the right. The color and general 
 guides will retake their places. The three right companies will 
 face to the left, and the three left companies will face to the right. 
 Each captain will break to the rear two fibs at the head of his 
 company ; the left guides of the right companies, and the right 
 
172 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 guides of the left companies, will each place himself at the head of 
 the front rank of his company, and the captain by the side of his 
 guide. 
 
 790. The third and sixth companies will enter the column and 
 direct themselves parallelly to the first division. Each of the other 
 companies will, in like manner, place itself behind the company of 
 the wing to which it belongs, and will bo careful to gain as much 
 ground as possible toward the head of the column. 
 
 791. The corresponding companies of each wing will unite into 
 divisions on taking their positions in column, and each captain, 
 the instant the head of his company arrives at the center of the 
 column, will command : 1. Such company^ by the right (or left) flaiik. 
 2. March. The senior captain of the two companies will place 
 himself in front of the center of his division, and command : Guide 
 right ; the junior captain will place himself in the interval between 
 the two companies. The two companies, thus formed into a divi- 
 sion, will take the touch of elbows to the right, and when each 
 division has gained its j^t'oper distance, its chief Avill cause it to 
 march in quick time. 
 
 792. When the battalion jjresents an odd number of companies, 
 the formation will be made in like manner, and the company en 
 either flank which shall find itself without a cori'esponding one, 
 will place itself at company distance behind the wing to which it 
 belongs. 
 
 793. The double column, closed in mass, will be formed accord- 
 ing to the same principles, and by the same commands, substitu- 
 ting the indication, closed in inass, for that of at half distance. ■ 
 
 794. The double column never being formed when two or more 
 battalions are to be in one general column, it will habitually take 
 the guide to the right, sometimes to the left, or in the center of the 
 column ; in the last case, the command will bo, guide center. The 
 column will march and change direction according to the princi- 
 ples prescribed for a simple column by division. 
 
 795. The double column at company distance will be closed in 
 mass, or, if in mass, will take half distance, by the commands and 
 means indicated for a simple column by division. 
 
 Deployment of the double column, faced to the front. 
 
 796. The colonel, wishing to deploy the double column, will 
 place a marker respectively before the right and left files of the 
 first division, and a third before the left file of the right company, 
 same division ; which being done, he will cause the two general 
 guides to spring out on the alignment of the markers a little be- 
 yond the points at which the respective flanks of the battalion ought 
 to rest ; he will then command : 
 
 1. Deploy column. 2. Battalion outwards — Face. 3. March (or 
 double quick — March). 
 
 797. The column will deploy itself on the two companies at its 
 head, according to the principles prescribed for the deployment of 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 173 
 
 column in mass. The captains of those companies will each, at the 
 command march, place himself on the ri/jjlit of his own company, 
 and align it by the right; the captain of the fourth will then place 
 himself in the rear rank, and the covering sergeant in the rank of 
 file closers, at the moment the caj^tain of the third shall come to its 
 left to align it. 
 
 798. The deployment being ended, the colonel will command : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 790. If it be the wish of the colonel to cause the fire to com- 
 mence pending the deployment, he will give an order to that ef- 
 fect to the captains of the fourth and fifth comjjaniee, and the fire 
 will be executed according to the principles prescribed No. 438. 
 
 800. The battalion being in double column and in march, if the 
 colonel shall wish to deploy it without halting the column, he will 
 cause three markers to be posted on the line of battle, and when 
 the head of the column shall arrive near the markers he will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. Deploi/ column. 2. Batwlion, by the right and left flanks. 3. 
 March (or double quick — March). 
 
 801. Tlie column will deploy on the two leading companies, ac- 
 cording to the principles prescribed for the deployment of a close 
 column No. 533, and following ; at the command march, the chief 
 of the first division will halt it, and the captains of the fourth and 
 fifth companies will align their companies by the right. 
 
 802. If the column be in march, and it be the wish of the colo- 
 nel to deploy the column and to continue to march in the order of 
 battle, he will not cause markers to be established at the head of 
 the column. The movement will be executed b}- the commands 
 and means indicated No 800. observing what follows. At the first 
 command, the chiel' of the first division will command, Quick time. 
 At the comjiiand march, the first division will continue to march in 
 quick time ; the colonel will command, Guide center. The cap- 
 tains of the fourth and fifth companies, the color and the men, Avill 
 immediatel}- conform to the principles of the march in line of battle. 
 The companies will take the quick step by the command of their 
 captainSj'as they successively arrive in line. The movement com- 
 pleted, the colonel may cause the battalion to march in double 
 quick time. 
 
 To form the double column into line of battle, faced to the right or left. 
 
 803. The double column, being at company distance and at a 
 halt, may be formed into line of battle faced to the right or loft; 
 when the colonel shall wish to form it faced to the right, ho will 
 oommand : 
 
 1. Tfi<fht into line rrheel, left comptnicJi on the right into line. 2. Bat- 
 talion, guide right. 3. March (or double quick — March.) 
 
 804. At the fi^t command, each captain will place himself be- 
 fore the center of his company ; the rij^ht corapanies will be c*u- 
 
174 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 tioned that they will have to wheel to the right into line, the left 
 companies that they will have to march straight forward. 
 
 805. At the second command, the left guide of the fourth com- 
 pany will place himself briskly on the direction of the right guides 
 of the column, face to them, and opposite to one of the three last 
 files of his company when in line of battle: the lieutenant-colonel 
 will assure him in that position. 
 
 806. At the command maj-ch, briskly repeated by all the captains, 
 the right companies will form to the right into line of battle, the 
 left companies will put themselves in march in order to form on 
 the right into line of battle ; these formations will be executed by 
 the means indicated No. 391 and following, and No. 416 and fol- 
 lowing ; the lieutenant-colonel will assure the guides of the left 
 wing on the line of battle as they successively come uj)on it. 
 
 807. If the column be in march, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. Right into line wheel. 2. Left companies, on the right into line. 3. 
 Battalion, guide right. 4. March (or double quick — March.) 
 
 808. At the first command, each captain will place himself prompt- 
 ly before the center of his company ; the right companies will be 
 cautioned that they will have to wheel to the right, and the left 
 companies that they will have to form on the right into line. 
 
 809. At the command march, briskly repeated, the right compa- 
 nies will form to the right into line, and the left companies on the 
 right into line. These formations will be executed as prescribed 
 Nos. 402, 417, and following. 
 
 810. If the colonel should wish to move the battalion forward, 
 at the moment the right companies have completed the wheel, he 
 will command : 
 
 5. Forward. 6. March (or double quick — March.) 
 
 811. At the command /orjrarcZ, the captains of the right compa- 
 nies will command. Quick time. At the command march, the right 
 companies will cease to wheel and march straight forward. The 
 colonel will then add : 
 
 7. Guide center. 
 
 812. The movement of the left companies will be executed in 
 double quick time as prescribed above, and as they arrive on the 
 line each captain will cause his company to march in quick time. 
 
 813. The column may be formed faced to the left into line of bat- 
 tle according to the same principles. 
 
 814. If the column be closed in mass instead of at company dis- 
 tance, these movements Avill be executed according to the princi- 
 ples prescribed Nos. 417, 502 and 510. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 175 
 
 Article XIY. — Dispositions agait^sf Cavalry. 
 
 817. A battalion being in column b}' company, at full distance^, 
 right in front, and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to form 
 it into square, he will first cause divisions to be formed ; which be- 
 ing done, he will command : 
 
 1. To form square. 2. To half distance, close column. 3. March 
 (or double quick — March.) 
 
 818. At the command march, the column will close to company 
 distance, the second division taking its distance from the rear rank 
 of the first division. 
 
 819. At the moment of halting the fourth division, the file clo- 
 sers of each company of which it is composed, passing by the outer 
 flank of their companies, will place themselves two paces before 
 the front rank opposite to their respective places in line of battle, 
 and face towards the head of the column. 
 
 820. At the commencement of the movement, the major will 
 place himself on the right of the column abreast with the first di- 
 vision j the buglers formed in two ranks will place themselves at 
 platoon distance, behind the inner platoons of the second division. 
 
 821. These dispositions being made, the colonel may, according 
 to circumstances, put the column in march, or cause it to form 
 square ; if he wish to do the latter, he will command : 
 
 1. Form square. 2. Right and left into line, wheel. 
 
 822. At the first command, the lieutenant-colonel, facing to the 
 Icfl guides, and tlic major, facing to those of the right, will align 
 them, from tlic front, on the respective guides of the f<^urth divi- 
 sion, who Avill stand fast, holding up their pieces, invertc«l perpen- 
 dicularly; the right guides, in placing themselves on the direc- 
 tion, will take their exact dislancos. 
 
 823. At the second command, the chief of the first division will 
 caution it to stand fast; all the captains of the second and third 
 divisions will plar-e themselves before the centers of their respec- 
 tive companies and caution them that they will have to wheel, the 
 right companici* to the right, and the left companies to the left into 
 line of battle. 
 
 824. The color-bearer will step back into the line of file closers, 
 opposite to his place in lino of battle, and will be replaced by the 
 
176 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 corporal of his file, who is in the rear rank ; the corporal of the 
 same file who is in the rank of file closers will stej) into the rear 
 rank. 
 
 825. The chief of the fourth division will command : 1. Fourth- 
 division forward; 2. Guide left, and place himself at the same time 
 two paces outside of its left flank. 
 
 826. These dispositions ended, the colonel will com-mand : 
 
 March (or double quick — March.) 
 
 827. At this command, briskly repeated, the first division will 
 stand fast ; but its right file will face to the right, and its left file 
 to the left. 
 
 828. The companies of the second and third divisions will wheel 
 to the right and left into line, and the buglers will advance a space 
 equal to the front of a company. 
 
 829. The fourth division will close up to form the square, and 
 when it shall have closed, its chief will halt it, face it about, and 
 align it by the rear rank upon the guides of the division, who will 
 for this purpose, remain faced to the front. The junior captain will 
 pass into the rear rank, now become the front, and the covering 
 sergeant of the left company will place himself behind him in the 
 front rank, become rear. The file closers will at the same time 
 close up a pace on the front rank, and the outer file on each flank 
 of the division will face outwards. 
 
 830. The square being formed, the colonel will command : 
 
 Guides — Posts. 
 
 831. At this command, the chiefs of the first and fourth divisions, 
 as well as the guides, will enter the square. 
 
 832. The captains whose companies have formed to the right 
 into line, will remain on the left of their companies ; the left guide 
 of each of those companies will, in the rear rank, cover his cap- 
 tain, and the covering sergeant of each will place himself as a file 
 closer behind the right file of his company. 
 
 833. The field and staff" will enter the square, the lieutenant- 
 colonel placing himself behind the left, and the major behind the 
 right of the first division. 
 
 834. If the battalion present ten, instead of eight companies, the 
 fourth division will make the same movements prescribed above 
 for the second and third divnsions, and the fifth, the movements 
 prescribed for the fourth division. 
 
 835. A battalion ought never to present, near the enemy's 
 g[j.va]ry, an odd company. The odd company, under that circum- 
 ^ance, ought, when the battalion is under arms, to be consolidated, 
 for the time, with the other companies. 
 
 836. The fronts of the square will be designated as follows : the 
 first division will always be the first fi'ont ; the last division, the 
 fourth front ; the right companies of the other divisions will form 
 the second front ; and the left companies of the same divisions the 
 thifrd front. 
 
SCHOOL OP THE BATTALION. 177 
 
 837. A battalion beinp in column by company, at full distance, 
 right in front, and in march, when the colonel shall wish to form 
 square, he will cause this movement to be executed by the coni- 
 mands and means indicated, No. 817. 
 
 838. At the command march, the column will close to company 
 distance, as is prescribed. No. 278. When the chief of the fourth 
 division shall command Quick march, the file closers of this division 
 will place themselves before the front rank. 
 
 S;jn. The major and the buglers will conform to what is pre- 
 scribed, No. 820. 
 
 840. If the colonel shall wish to form square, he will command : 
 
 1. Fon7i square. 2. Right and left into line, wheel. 3. March. 
 
 841. At the first command, the chief of the first division will 
 caution it to halt; all the captains of the second and third divi- 
 sions will rapidly place themselves before the centers of their 
 respective companies, and caution them that they will have to 
 w^hcel, the right companies to the right, and the left companies to 
 the left into line. The chief of the fourth division will caution it 
 to continue its march, and will hasten to its left flank. At the 
 third command, briskly repeated, the chief of the first division 
 will halt his division and align it to the left, the outer files will 
 face to the right and left, the rest of the movement will be exe- 
 cuted as prescribed No. 828 and following. 
 
 842. The lieutenant-colonel and the major, at the command 
 march, will conform to what is prescribed. No. 822. 
 
 843. If the battalion, before the square is formed, be in donble 
 column, the two leading companies will form the first front, the 
 two rear companies the fourth ; the other companies of the right 
 half battalion will form the second, and those of the left half bat- 
 talion the third fi'ont. 
 
 844. The first and fourth fronts will be commanded by the chiefs 
 of the first and fourth divisions; each of the other two by its 
 senior captain. 
 
 845. The commander of each front will place himself four paces 
 behind its present rear rank, and will be replaced momcntaril}' in 
 the command of his company by the next in rank therein. 
 
 840. If the column bo at full distance, instead of at company 
 distnnce, as has been supposed, the square will be formed in the 
 manner prescribed. No. 817 or 838. and following; and the dispo- 
 sitions indicat-cd, Nos. 819 and 820, will be executed at the com- 
 mand form fiquare. 
 
 847. If the column by division, whether double or simple, be in 
 mass, and the colonel shall wish to form it into square, he will first 
 cause it to take company distance; to this effect, he will command : 
 
 1 . To form square. 2. By the head of column, take half distance, 
 
 848. The divisions will take half distance by the means indi- 
 cat^^d, No. 324. an<l following. What is iirescribed. No. 820, will 
 be exeoated as the first and second divisions are put in motion. 
 
 12 
 
178 SfJHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 849. The colonel will halt the column the moment the third 
 division shall have its distance. As soon as the column is halted, 
 the dispositions indicated, No. 819, will be executed, and when 
 these are completed, the colonel may proceed to form square. 
 
 850. If the column be in march, he will also, in the first place, 
 cause company distance to be taken, and, for this purpose, will 
 command : 
 
 1. To form square. 2. By the head of column, take half distance. 3. 
 MaAch (or double quick — March). 
 
 851. This movement will be executed as prescribed. No. 330, and 
 following. What is prescribed, No. 820, will be executed as the 
 first and second divisions ai-e put in motion. 
 
 852. The colonel will proceed to form square the moment the 
 third division shall have its distance ; at the command form square, 
 the dispositions indicated, No. 819, will be executed. If it be 
 intended merely to dispose the column for square, the colonel will 
 not halt the column until the last division has its distance. 
 
 853. In a simple column, loft in front, these several movements 
 will be executed according to the same principles and b}' inverse 
 means ; but the fronts of the square will have the same designa- 
 tions as if the right of the column were in front, that is, the first 
 division will constitute the first front, and thus of the other subdi- 
 visions. 
 
 854. The battalion being formed into square, when the colonel 
 shall wish to cause it to advance a distance of less than thirty 
 paces, he will command : 
 
 1. By (such) front, foncard. 2. March. 
 
 855. If it be supposed that the advance be made by the first 
 front, the chief of this front will command : 
 
 1. First division, foncard. 2. Guide center. 
 
 856. The chief of the second front will face his front to the left. 
 The captains of the companies composing this front Avill place 
 themselves outside, and on the right of their left guides, who will 
 replace them in the front rank ; the chief of the third front will 
 ftice his front to the right, and the captains in this front will 
 place themselves outside, and on the left of their covering ser- 
 geants ; the chief of the fourth front will face his front about, 
 and command : 1. Fourth division, forward ; 2. Guide center. The 
 captain who is in the center of the first front, will be charged with 
 the direction of the march, and will regulate himself by the means 
 indicated in the School of the Company, No. 89. 
 
 857. At the command march, the square will put itself in mo- 
 tion ; the companies marching by the flank will be careful not to 
 lose their distances. The chief of the fourth division will cause 
 his division to keep constantly closed on the flanks of the second 
 and third fronts. 
 
 858. This movement will only be executed in quick time. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 179 
 
 859. The lieutenant-colonel will place himself in rear of the file 
 of direction in order to regulate his march. 
 
 860. If the colonel should wish to halt the square, he will 
 command : 
 
 1. Battalion. 2. Halt. 
 
 861. At the second command, the square will halt; the fourth 
 front will face about immediately, and without further command; 
 the second and third fronts will fiice outwards; the captains of 
 companies will resume their places as in square. 
 
 8G2. In moving the squai*e forward by the second, third, or 
 fourth fronts, the same rules will be observed. 
 
 863. The battalion being formed into square, when the colonel 
 shall wish to cause it to advance a greater distance than thirty 
 paces, he will command : 
 
 1. Form column. 
 
 864. The chief of the first front will command : 
 
 1. First division forward. 2. Guide left. 
 
 865. The commander of the fourth front will caution it to stand 
 fast; the commander of the second front will cause it to face to 
 the left, and then command, By company, by file left. The com- 
 mander of the third front will cause it to face to the right, and 
 then command, By company, by file right. At the moment the 
 second and third fronts face to the left and right, each captain will 
 cause to break to the rear the two leading files of his company. 
 
 866. These dispositions being made, the colonel will command : 
 
 3. MABcn (or double quick — March). 
 
 ^4 
 
 
 Erin 
 
 Cm 
 
 867. At this command, the first front will march forward; its 
 chief will halt it when it shall have advanced a space equal to half 
 it« front, and align it by the left. 
 
 868. The corresponding companies of the second and third 
 fronts will wheel by file to the left and right, and march to meet 
 each other behind the center of the first division, and the moment 
 they unite, the captain of each company will halt his company 
 and face it to the front. The division being re-formed, its chief 
 will align it by the left. 
 
 869. The commander of the fourth front will cause it to face 
 about; its file closers will remain before the front rank. 
 
180 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 870. The column being thus re-formed, the colonel may put it 
 in march by the commands and means prescribed, No. 164, and 
 following ; the right guides will preserve company distance exact- 
 ly as the directing guides. 
 
 871. When the colonel shall wish to re-form square, he will give 
 the commands indicated, No. 840. 
 
 872. To cause the square to march in retreat a distance greater 
 than thirty paces, the colonel will first cause column to be formed 
 as indicated. No. 863 ; and when formed, he will cause it to face 
 by the rear rank ; to this end, he will command : 
 
 1. To march in retreat. 2. Face by the rear rank. 3. Battalion^ 
 
 about — Face. 
 
 873. At the second command, the file closers of the interior di- 
 visions will place themselves, passing by the outer flanks of their 
 respective companies, behind the front rank opposite to their places 
 in line of battle ; the file closers of the other divisions will stand 
 fast. 
 
 874. At the third command, the battalion will face about; each 
 chief of division will place himself before its rear rank, become 
 front, passing through the interval between its two companies; 
 the guides will step into the rear rank, now front. 
 
 875. The column being thus disposed, the colonel may put it in 
 march, or cause it to form square, as if it were faced by the front. 
 The square being formed, its fronts will preserve the same desig- 
 nations they had when faced by the front rank. 
 
 876. The battalion being in square by the rear rank, when the 
 colonel shall wish to march it in retreat or in advance, a distance 
 less than thirty paces, he will conform to what is prescribed. No. 
 854, and following; otherwise, he will re-form the column accord- 
 ing to the principles prescribed. No. 863, by marching toward the 
 fourth front. 
 
 877. If the square is to be marched to the front a distance 
 greater than thirty paces, the colonel will face the column by the 
 front rank ; to this end, he will command : 
 
 1. To march in advance. 2. Face by the front rank. "i. Battalion, 
 
 about — Face. 
 
 878. Which will be executed as prescribed, No. 873, and fol- 
 lowing. 
 
 879. If the column be marching in advance, and the colonel 
 shall wish to march it in retreat, he will command : 
 
 1. To march in retreat. 2. Battalion, right about. 3. March (or 
 ^,, double quick — March). 
 
 880. At the second command, the file closers of the second and 
 third divisions will place themselves rapidly before the front rank 
 of their respective divisions. At the command march, the column 
 will face about and move off to the rear; the chiefs of divisions 
 and the guides will conform to what is prescribed, No. 874. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 181 
 
 881. If the column be marching in retreat, and the colonel shall 
 wish to march it in advance, he will command : 
 
 1. To march in advance. 2. Battalion, right about. 3. March (or 
 double quick — March). 
 
 882. At the second command, the file closers of the second and 
 third divisions will place themselves before the rear rank of their 
 respective divisions ; at the third, the column will face by the 
 front rank. 
 
 To reduce the square. 
 
 '^M^^S 
 
 1 
 
 l-=Rl 
 
 ^ \M'/Mm'm'-fy/''/^/^''^^^^ ** 
 
 E[ ;;^^w////LH\ -^^^«»"^ ^rl lal 
 
 Kg 2 
 
 883. The colonel, wishing to break the square, will command: 
 1. Reduce square. 2. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 884. This movement will be executed in the manner indicated, 
 No. 863, and following ; but the file closers of the fourth front will 
 place themselves behind the rear rank the moment it faces about; 
 the field and staff, the color-bearer, and buglers, will, at the same 
 time, return to their places in column. 
 
 To form square from line of battle. 
 
 885. A battalion deployed, may be formed into square in a di- 
 rection either parallel or perpendicular to the line of battle. 
 
 886. In the first ca.se, the colonel will cause the battalion to 
 break by division to the rear, by the right or left, and then close 
 the column to half distance, as indicated. No. 817, and follow- 
 ing. 
 
 887. In the second case, he will ploy the battalion into simple 
 column by division at half distance in rear of the right or left di- 
 vision, or into column doubled on the center. 
 
 888. To ploy the battalion into column upen one of the flank 
 divisions, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. To form square. 2. Column at half distance by division. 3. On 
 the first (or fourth) division. 4. Battalion, right (or left)— Yaok. 
 5. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 889. This movement will be executed according to the princi- 
 ples prescribed. No 119, and following. 
 
 890. If the battalion be marching in liae of battle, and the oolo* 
 
182 SCHOOL OF THE ba.ttalio:n-. 
 
 nel shall wish to foi*m square in a direction perpendicular to the 
 line of battle, he will command : 
 
 1. To form square. 2. On the first (pv fourth) division^ form column. 
 3. Battalion, by the right (or left) flank. 4. March (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
 891. This movement will be executed according to the princi- 
 ples prescribed for ploying a column by division at half distance, 
 Ko. 150. The chief of the first division will halt his division at 
 the command march. 
 
 892. To ploy the battalion into double column, the colonel will 
 command : 
 
 1. To form square. 2. Double column at half distance. S. Battalion, 
 inwards — Face. 4. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 . 893. This movement will be executed as prescribed, No. 778, and 
 following. 
 
 894. The battalion being in march, to ploy it into double column 
 to form square, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. To form square. 2. Form double column. 3. Battalion by the 
 right and left flanks. 4. Makck (ov double quick — March). 
 
 895. This movement will be executed as prescribed. No. 788. 
 The chief of the leading division will halt his division at the com- 
 mand march. 
 
 Observations relative to the formation of squares in two 7-anks. 
 
 896. When the colonel shall judge it proper to have a reserve,. 
 this reserve, in a column of three divisions, will be formed of the- 
 inner platoons of the second division. The second division will, irt 
 this case, close to platoon distance on the first division. When the 
 square is formed, the reserve platoons will move forward a distance 
 nearly equal to a platoon front. 
 
 897. In re-forming column, the first division will move forward 
 platoon, instead of company distance. 
 
 898. If the column be formed of four divisions, the inner platoons 
 of the third division will compose the reserve; then, in re-forming 
 column, the first division will conform to the general rule, and the 
 chief of the third, as soon as his division is formed, will close it to 
 platoon distance on the second division. The colonel may, if ne- 
 cessary, form the reserve of the entire third division. In this case, 
 the movement will be executed in the following manner: 
 
 899. If the column be at full distance, when it shall close, at the 
 command to form square, to half distance, the chief of the third 
 division will cause four files to break to the rear from the right and 
 left of his division; the guides will close upon the outer files re- 
 maining in line, and the left guide will march exactly in the trace 
 of the file immediately in fi-ont of him. This division will then 
 close in mass on the second division; and the chief of the fourth' 
 division will close to half distance on the same division. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 183 
 
 900. At the command /onn square, the chief of the reserve divi- 
 sion will command, 1. Third division, forward. 2. Guide center; at 
 this command, tlic guides on the flanks will fall into the line of file 
 closers. At the command march, the reserve will move forward 
 the distance of a company front. When halted, its chief will 
 cause the platoons to be doubled, and for this purpose will com- 
 mand : 
 
 1. On the center double platoons. 2. March. 
 
 901. At the first command, the chiefs of platoon will place them- 
 selves in front of the center of their respective platoons ; the chief 
 of each outer platoon will face his platoon toward the center, and 
 cause to break to the rear two files from the left or right. At the 
 command march, the outer platoons will direct their march so as to 
 double on the center platoon at the distance of four paces ; their 
 chiefs will align these outer platoons on the center, and the files 
 previously broken to the rear will come into lino. 
 
 902. If the column be at half, instead of full distance, the colo- 
 nel before forming square will oi-der the chiefs of the third and 
 fourth divisions to move forward their divisions as prescribed No. 
 899. 
 
 903. If the columji be closed in mass, at the command t0 form 
 square, the chief of the third division will break four files to the 
 rear from each of the flanks, as prescribed No. 899. 
 
 904. The colonel will halt the column as soon as the second divi- 
 sion shall have gained its distance. 
 
 905. If the colonel shall wish the column to continue marching, 
 at the command, 7?*/ the head of column take half distance, the chief 
 of the reserve division will give his cautionary commands in suf- 
 ficient time to place his division in motion, simultaneously with 
 the one which precedes it. The chief of the fourth division will 
 give the command march., at the instant there is company distance 
 betVcen his division and the second. 
 
 906. When the colonel shall wish to re-form the column, at the 
 command form column^ the chief of the third division will com- 
 mand, Form division ; at this command, the chiefs of the outer pla- 
 toons which have doubled in rear of the center platoons, will give 
 the commands and make the preparatory movements for deploy- 
 ing on the center platoons, which will be executed at the command 
 7?iarc/i, given by the c-olonel and briskly repeated by the chief of 
 this division. The division being re-formed, the chiefs of the outer 
 platoons will retake their places in column, and the chief of this 
 division will again cause four files from each of its flanks to break 
 to the rear. 
 
 907. If, before the formation of the square, the column had been 
 left in front, it would be formed b\' the same commands and ac- 
 cording to the same principles. The second division, in this case, 
 would form the reserve. 
 
 90R. The column being formed, if the colonel should wish to 
 march it in retreat he will face it by the rear rank. The files of 
 
184 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 the third division broken off to the rear, will face about with the 
 battalion, and, when the column is put in motion, will march in 
 front of the rear rank. But, should the colonel Avish to re-form 
 the square, he will cause the battalion to face by the front rank. , 
 
 909. If the battalion be in line, instead of in column, the chief 
 of the reserve division will bring it into column in such manner 
 that there may be a distance of onl}- four paces between this divi- 
 sion and the one which is to be immediately in front of it; and 
 when this division is halted and aligned, its chief will cause the 
 usual number of files to be broken to the rear. The chief of the 
 division which should occupy in column a position immediately in 
 rear of the reserve division will, on entering the column, take a 
 distance of twelve paces between it and the division established 
 immediately in front of the reserve division. 
 
 Squares in four ranks. 
 
 910. If the squai'e formed in two ranks, according to the prece- 
 ding rules, should not be deemed sufficiently strong, the colonel 
 may cause the square to be formed in four ranks. 
 
 911. The battalion being in column by company at full distance 
 right in front, and at a halt, when the colonel shall wish to form 
 square in four ranks, he will first cause divisions to be formed, which 
 being executed, he will command : 
 
 1. To fo7-7n square in four ranks. 2. To half distance, dose column. 
 3. March (or double quick — March). 
 
 912. At the first command, the chief of the first division will 
 caution the right company to face to the left, and the left com- 
 pany to face to the right. The chiefs of the other divisions will 
 caution their divisions to move foi'ward. 
 
 913. At the command march, the right company of the first di- 
 vision will form into four ranks on its left file, and the left com- 
 pany into four ranks on its right file. The formation ended, the 
 chief of this division will align it by the left. 
 
 914. The other divisions will move forward and double their 
 files marching ; the right company of each division will double on 
 its left file, and the left company on its right file. The formation 
 completed, each chief of division will command, Gxiide left. Each 
 chief will halt his division when it shall have the distance of a 
 company front in four ranks from the preceding one, counting from 
 its rear rank, and will align his division by the left. At the in- 
 stant the fourth division is halted, the file closers will move raj)idly 
 before its front rank. 
 
 915. The colonel will form square, re-form column, and reduce 
 square in four ranks, by the same commands and means as pi'e- 
 scribed for a battalion in two ranks. , 
 
 916. If the square formed in four ranks be reduced and at a halt, 
 and the colonel shall wish to form the battalion into two ranks, he 
 will command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 186 
 
 1. In two ronhs undouble files. 2. Battalion outwards — Face. 
 
 3. March. 
 
 917. At tlio first command, tl>e captainn will step before the cen- 
 ters of their rospoctive companies, and those on the right will cau- 
 tion them to face to the right, and those on the left to face to the 
 loft. 
 
 918. At the second command, the battalion will fiice to the right 
 and left. 
 
 919. At the command march, each company will undouble its 
 file-8 and re-form into two ranks as indicated in the school of the 
 company No. 376, and following. Each captflin will halt his com- 
 pany and face it to the front. The formation completed, each chief 
 of division will align his division by the left. 
 
 920. If the column be in march, with divisions formed in four 
 ranks, and the colonel shall wish to re-form them into two ranks, 
 he will command : 
 
 1. Guide center. 2. In two ranks, undouble files. 3. March. 
 
 921. The captain, placed in the center of each division, will con- 
 tinue to march straight to the front, as will also the left file of the 
 right company, and the right file of the left company. Each com- 
 pany will then be re-formed into two ranks, as prescribed in tlie 
 school of the company. 
 
 922. The battalion being formed into two rank.«;, the colonel Avill 
 command, Guide left (or right). 
 
 923. To form square in four ranks on one of the flank divisions, 
 the colonel will command : 
 
 1. To form square, in four ranis. 2. Column at half dist<in re. by di- 
 vision. 3. On the fir.^t (or fourth) divi.sion. 4. Battalion, right 
 (OT left) — Facb. 5. }\iIarcu (or double quick — March). 
 
 92.4. At the second command, each chief of division will place 
 himself before the center of his divistt)n, and caution it to 'face to 
 the right. 
 
 925. At the fourth command, the right guide of the first divi- 
 sion will remain faced to the front, the battalion will face to the 
 right. 
 
 926 At the command march, the first file of four men of the 
 first division will face to the front remaining double<l. All the 
 other files of four men will step off together, and each in succes- 
 sion will close up to its proper distance on the file preceding it, 
 and face to the front, remaining doubled. When the last file shall 
 have closed, the chief of division will command, Left — Dress. 
 
 927. The other divisions will ploy into column in the same man- 
 ner as with a battalion in two ranks, observing what follows; tbc 
 cbicfs of division, instead of allowing their divisions to file past 
 them on entering the column, will continue to lead them, and as 
 each division shall arrive on a line with the riglit guide of the first 
 division, its chief will halt the right guide, who will immediately 
 
186 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 face to the front ; the first file of four men will also halt at the 
 same time and face to the front, remaining doubled. The second 
 file will close on the first, and when closed, halt, and face to the 
 front, remaining doubled. All the other files will execute succes- 
 sively what has just been prescribed for the second. When the 
 last file shall have closed, the chief of division will command, Left 
 — Dress. 
 
 928. If the battalion be in march, the colonel will command: 
 
 1. To form square, in four ranks. 2. On the first division, form 
 column. 3. Battalion, by the right flank. 4. March (or double 
 guick — March), 
 
 929. At the second command, each "chief of division will step in 
 front of the center of his division and caution it to face by the 
 right flank. The chief of the first division will caution his cover- 
 ing sergeant to halt, and remain faced to the front. 
 
 930. At the command march, i\\Q battalion will face to the right; 
 the covering sergeant of the first division will halt and remain 
 faced to the front, the first division will then form into four ranks 
 as heretofore prescribed. The other divisions will ploy into col- 
 umn in the same manner as if the movement had taken place 
 from a halt. 
 
 931. If the colonel should wish to form a pei'pendicular square 
 in four ranks, by double column, he will command : 
 
 1. To form square, in four ranks. 2. Double column, at half distance. 
 3. Battalion imcards — Face. 4. March (or double quick — 
 March). 
 
 932. At the second command, the captains of companies will 
 place themselves before the centers of their respective companies, 
 and caution those on the right to face to the left, and those on the 
 left to face to the right. The captain of the fifth company will 
 caution his covering sci-gcant to stand fast. 
 
 933. At the thii-d command, the battalion will face to the left 
 and right ; at the command march, the left file of the fourth, and 
 the right file of the fifth compan}', will face to the front, remaining 
 doubled. The fourth company will close successively by file of 
 fours on the left file, and the fifth company, in like manner, on the 
 right file ; the files will face to the front, remaining doubled. The 
 formation completed, the chief of division will command. Right 
 dress. The junior captain will place himself in the interval 
 between the two com^janies. 
 
 934. The other companies will close as prescribed for the double 
 column in two ranks, observing what follows : each captain will 
 halt the leading guide of his company the moment the head of his 
 company arrives on a line with the center of the column. In the 
 right companies, the left guides will step into the line of file closers, 
 and the left file of four men will face immediately to the front, 
 remaining doubled, and by the side of the right guide of the left 
 company. The companies will each form into four ranks, as pre- 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 187 
 
 scribed No. 926, the right companies on the left file, and the left 
 companies on the right file. The formation completed, the junior 
 captain will place himself between the two companies, and the 
 senior will command, Jiight d?'css. 
 
 935. If the battalion be in march, the colonel will command : 
 
 1. To form square^ in four ranks. 2. Form double column. ,3. Bat- 
 talion by the right and left flanks. 4. March (or double quick — 
 March. 
 
 936. At the second command, the captains will place themselves 
 before the centers of their respective companies, and those on the 
 right will caution them to face by the left flank, and those on the 
 left to face by the right flank ; the captain of the fifth company 
 will caution his covering sergeant to halt, and remain faced to the 
 front. 
 
 937. At the command march, the fourth and fifth companies will 
 halt. The battalion will face to the left and right; the covering 
 sergeant of the fifth company will halt and remain faced to the 
 front, the movement will then be executed as if the battalion was 
 at a halt. 
 
 Oblique squares. 
 
 938. The battalion being in line of battle, when the colonel shall 
 wish to form the oblique square, he will command : 
 
 1. To form oblique .square. 2. On the first division form column. 
 
 939. At the second command, the lieutenant-colonel will trace 
 the alignment of the first division in the following manner : he 
 
188 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 will place himself before and near the right file of this division, 
 face to the left, march twelve paces along the front rank, halt, face 
 to the right, march twelve paces perpendicularly to the front, halt 
 again, face to the right, and immediately place a marker at this 
 point. The covering sergeant of the right company will step, at 
 the same time, before its right file, face to the left, and conform 
 the line of his shoulders to that of the shoulders of the marker 
 ■established by the lieutenant-colonel. These two markers being 
 established, the lieutenant-colonel will place a third marker on the 
 same alignment, at the point where the left of the division will 
 halt. 
 
 940. The chiefs of division will place themselves in front of the 
 centers of their divisions ; the chief of the first division will im- 
 mediately establish it by a wheel to the right on a fixed pivot, 
 against the markers, and align it by the left. The chiefs of the 
 other divisions will caution them to face to the right. The colonel 
 will then command : 
 
 3. Battalion right — Face. 4. March (or double quick ^—M-Aucb). 
 
 941. The three rear divisions will direct their march so as to 
 place themselves at half distance from each other, and in the rear 
 of the first division, as previously indicated, observing what 
 follows : 
 
 942. The chief of the second division, instead of breaking the 
 headmost files to the rear, "will break them to the front, and at the 
 command march, will conduct his division towards the point of 
 entrance into the column. Arrived at this point, he will halt in 
 his own jjerson, cause his division to wheel by file to the right, 
 instructing the right guide to direct himself parallelly to the first 
 division; and as soon as the left file has passed, its chief will halt 
 the division, and align it by the left. The other divisions will 
 break to the rear, but slightly ; each will enter the column as pre- 
 scribed for the second, and the moment the battalion is ployed in- 
 to column, the colonel will cause it to form square. 
 
 943. The formation of a battalion into oblique square on the left 
 division, will be executed according to the same principles and by 
 inverse means. 
 
 944. Should the battalion be in march, the colonel will first 
 cause it to halt. ^, 
 
 945. In the preceding example, the battalion was supposed to 
 be deployed ; but if it be already formed in column, the desired 
 obliquity will be established by causing it to change direction by 
 the flank ; to this end, the colonel will command : 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION, 
 
 189 
 
 1. To form oblique square. 2. Change direction by the right (or leff) 
 
 flank. 
 
 13 o a aaocTDrcTTTLra 
 
 
 
 D 
 
 il 
 
 M k 
 
 oaoaoO'Dn'O ooo 
 
 
 m 
 
 •r '■ 
 
 1 ]< 
 
 a C'C DQCODDDDD 
 
 
 a 
 
 z\ 
 
 M li 
 
 ca 
 
 oo onoa o odd 
 
 
 ■ 
 
 S.' 
 
 m 1. 
 
 crjo a nnnaoaon 
 
 046. At the second command, the lieutenant-colonel will trace 
 the new direction in the following manner ; lie will place before 
 the right and left files of the headmost division, two markers, and 
 a third on the prolongation of the first two, on the side of the 
 change of direction, and at twelve paces from the flank of the 
 column. He will then place himself before the third marker, 
 march twelve paces perpendicularly to the front, halt, and finish 
 tracing the new direction in the manner indicated, Ko. 030. 
 
 947. The colcmel will then command : 
 
 3. Battalion right (or left) — Face. 4. March (or double quick — 
 
 March.) 
 
 04S. The rhangp of direction having been executed, the colonel 
 will cause tho square to bo formed. 
 
 040. Should the column be in march, the colonel Will first cause 
 it to halt. 
 
190 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 950. Oblique squares in four ranks, "will be executed by the same 
 means, and according to the principles prescribed for the formation 
 of squares in four ranks. 
 
 951. Whether the battalion be ployed into simple or double 
 column, the particular dispositions for the formation of the square 
 will be executed as pi*escribcd No. 819 and following. The divi- 
 sion which is to form the rear of the column, will be closed in 
 mass, and as soon as it is aligned, the major will rectify the position 
 of the guides on the side of the column opposite to the direction. 
 
 952. If it be the wish of the colonel merely to prepare for square, 
 he will in all formations with that view substitute the command 
 'prepare for square in place of to form square, and in that case, the 
 last division will enter the column at company distance. 
 
 Remarks on the formation of squares. 
 
 953. It is a general principle that a column by company, which 
 is to be formed into square, will first form divisions, and close to 
 half distance. Nevertheless, if it find itself suddenly thi*eatened 
 by cavalry without sufficient time to form divisions, the colonel 
 will cause the column to close to platoon distance and then form 
 square by the commands and means which have been indicated ; 
 the leading and rearmost comj^anies will conform themselves to 
 what has been prescribed for divisions in those positions. The 
 other comjianies will form by platoon to the right and left into 
 line of battle, and each chief of platoon, after having halted it, 
 will 2)lace himself on the line, as if the platoon were a company, 
 and he will be covered by the guide in the rear rank. 
 
 954. A battalion in column at full distance, having to form square, 
 will always close on the leading subdivision ; and a column closed 
 in mass, will always, for the same purpose, take distances by the 
 head. In either case, the second subdivision should be careful, in 
 taking its distance, to reckon from the rear rank of the subdivis- 
 ion in front of it. 
 
 955. If a column by company should bo required to form square 
 in four ranks, the doubling of files will always take place on the 
 file next the guide. 
 
 956. When a column, disposed to form square, shall be in march, 
 it will change direction as a column at half distance ; thiis, having 
 to execute this movement, the column will take the guide on the 
 side opposite to that to which the change of direction is to be 
 made, if that be not alread}^ the side of the guide. 
 
 957. A column doubled on the center at company distance or 
 closed in mass, may be formed into square according to the same 
 principles as a simple column. 
 
 958. When a battalion is ployed, with a view to the square, it 
 will always be in rear of the right or left division, in order that it 
 may be able to commence firing, pending the execution of the 
 movement. The double column, also, affords this advantage, and 
 being more promptly formed than any other, it will habitually be 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 191 
 
 «mployed, unless particular circumstances cause a diflfcrent form- 
 ation to be preferred. 
 
 959. A battalion, in square, will never use any other than the 
 fire by file and by rank ; the color being in the line of file closers, 
 its guard will not fall back as prescribed No. 41 ; it will fire like 
 the men of the company of which it forms a part. 
 
 960. If the square be formed in four ranks, the first two ranks 
 will alone execute the firings prescribed above ; the other two ranks 
 will remain either at shoulder or support arms. 
 
 961. The formation of the square being often necessary in war, 
 and being the most cumplicated of the manoeuvres, it will be as 
 frequently repeated as the supposed necessity may require, in or- 
 der to render its mechanism familiar to both ofiicers and men. 
 
 962. In the execution of this manoeuvre, the colonel will care- 
 fully observe that the divers movements which it involves succeed 
 each other without loss of time, but also without confusion ; for, 
 if the rapidity of cavalry movements requires the greatest prompt- 
 itude in the formation of squares, so, on the other hand, precipi- 
 tancy always results in disorder, and in no circumstance is disor- 
 der more to be avoided. 
 
 963. When the colonel shall wish to cover by skirmishers the 
 movements of a column preparing to form square, he will detach 
 for this purpose one or two inner platoons of one of the interior 
 divisions of the column. In this case, the exterior platoons of this 
 division and the following subdivisions, will, according to circum- 
 stances, close on the preceding subdivision, in such manner, that 
 there may be between them only the distance necessary- for form- 
 ing into line. 
 
 964. When tlie colonel shall be ready to form square, he will, in 
 order to recall the skirmishers, cause to the color to be sounded. If 
 on the return of the skirmishers, there be not room for them to 
 form into line of battle, they Avill double on the outer platoons of 
 their respective companies. 
 
 Column against Cavalry. 
 
 -9^ 
 
 965. When a column closed i)) mass has to form square, it will 
 begin by taking company dist-ince ; but if so suddenly threatenod 
 
192 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 by cavalry as not to allow time for this disposition, it will be formed 
 in the following manner : 
 
 966. The colonel will command : 
 
 1. Column against Cavalry. 2. March. 
 
 967. At the first command, the chief of the leading division will 
 caution it to stand fast and pass behind the rear rank ; in the inte- 
 rior divisions each captain will promptly designate the number of 
 files necessary to close the interval between his company and the 
 one in front of it. The captains of the divisions next to the one 
 in rear, in addition to closing the interval in front, will also close 
 up the interval which separates this division from the last; the 
 chief of the fourth division will caution it to fi^ce about, and its 
 file closers will pass briskly before the front rank. 
 
 968. At the command inarch, the guides of each division will 
 place themselves rapidi}' in the line of file closers. The first divi- 
 sion will stand fast, the fourth will foce about, the outer file of 
 each of these divisions will then face outwards; in the other divi- 
 sions the files designated for closing the intervals will form to the 
 right and left into line, but in the division next to the rearmost 
 one, the first files that come into line will close to the right or left 
 until they join the rear division. The files of each company which 
 remain in column will close on their outer files, formed into line, 
 in order to create a vacant space in the middle of the column. 
 
 969. Jf the column be in march, the column against cavalry will 
 be formed by the same commands and means. At the command 
 march, the first and fourth divisions will halt and the latter divis- 
 ion will face about ; the interior divisions will conform tp what 
 has been prescribed above. 
 
 970. The battalion being no longer threatened by cavah*y, the 
 colonel will command : 
 
 1. Form column. 2. March. 
 
 971. At the command march, the files in column will close to thQ 
 left and right to make room for those in line, who will retake their 
 places in column by stepping backwards, except those closing the 
 interval between the two rear divisions, who will take their places 
 in column by a flank movement. The fourth division will face 
 about, the guides will resume their places. 
 
 972. If the colonel should be so pressed as not to have time to 
 order baj^onets to be fixed, the men will fix them, without com- 
 mand or signal, at the cautionary command, column against cavalry. 
 
 973. As this manoeuvre is often used in war, and with decided 
 advantage, the colonel will frequently cause it to be executed, in 
 order to render it familiar. 
 
 Article XY. — The rally. 
 
 974. The battalion, being in line of battle, the colonel will some- 
 times cause the disperse to be sounded, at which signal the bat- 
 talion will break and disperse. 
 
SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. '193 
 
 075. When the colonel sliall wish to rallv tho lviff.,i;^^ u -i, 
 cause fo^A. .0^0. to bo sounded, and at tirs^me t m^^^^^^^ Two 
 
 of S" T^nce ifFit' ''''" ''""^^ !•'■' 'r.P^">' ^^^^""^ '^^ P^««« in rear 
 ^^\':!l^ lil'/^c ' V^ ^"^ '^^'^^^1'^ '" ^'"6 of battle. 
 
 P«fVii- ,^'\^^«^oneMviU cause the color-com])any to be promntlv 
 n an .?'". '"^"T-^ the markers, and each dn^auy by the com^ 
 an 1 of ,ts capta.n will be aligned on the color^company accoiS 
 ?4 i.% Pi-'nciples heretofore prescribed. ^ ^ ' 
 
 J7a When the colonel shall wish to rally the battalion in mF 
 umn he wil cause tl^e asseucbly to be sounded, and phac" two znark' 
 ers before the position to be occupied by the first <?om nan vth^ 
 
 niar-Keis ana each of the other capta ns will rallv his commnv nt 
 
 Serlrilfel^lu;':^'""" '"^ '"" ^''"* '■'™'<' P--do uTK 
 
 Article XYI.—Eules for manoeuvring by the rear rank. 
 
 hylL \'cTlnt\^C '''r'^'y ^« ^^"^<^ ^ b'-^ttalion to mancEuvre 
 will be ohLlil ' ' ''" '"'' P^"^"'^^ "^^•'^' ^'^^^ ^^''--'".^ -^'es 
 «).!n^' .'^/^^; ^""alion being by the front rank, when the colonel 
 shall wish to mancBuvre by the rear rank, he will command 
 
 I. Face by the rear rank. 2. Battalion. 3. ^6om?— Pace. 
 i.T}'^^ ^t battalion be deployed, this movement will be execu 
 
 98^ Tf'tl 'T T^r""''^ ^^' ''^« ^'^ ^y ^he rear rank. '" 
 
 • 1.. , \:^^ battalion be in column by company or bv ^-,Ufnr.r. 
 nght or left in front the chiefs of subd'ivisiol; t^' t'ke 'thet new 
 
 Les::'i^^^^j:'^, te-.!S^^^«-^of his subdi:^ 
 
 Lesson III. — Principles of the direct step in common and 
 
 quick time (Nos. 94, 102) 12 
 
 Lesson IV. — Principles of the double quick step (No. 104) 13 
 
 PART SECOHD. 
 
 General rules 14 
 
 Lesson I. — Principles of shouldered arms 16 
 
 Lesson TI. — Manual of arms. Support arms (No. 133.) Pre- 
 sent arms (No. 143.) Order arms (No. 147.) Position of 
 order arms (No. 149.) Load in nine times (No. 156.) 
 Ready (No. 171.) Aim (No. 174.) Fire (No. 177.) Fix 
 bayonet (No. 188.) Charge bayonet (No. 193.) Trail 
 arms (No. 197.) Unfix bayonet (No. 200^ Secure arms 
 (No. 204.) Right shoulder shift arms (No. 210.) Arms 
 at will (No. 219.) Ground arms (No. 222.) Inspection 
 arras (No. 227.) Remarks on the manual of arms (No. 
 237) Mark time (No. 241.) Change st«p (No. 245.) 
 
194 SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 rear rank is deployed, the subdivisions which, in line of battle by 
 the front rank, ought to find themselves on the right of the subdi- 
 vision on -which the deployment is made, will face to the left ; and 
 those which ought to be placed on its left, will face to the right. 
 
 988. "When a battalion in line of battle, faced by the rear rank, 
 is to be ployed into column, the colonel will announce in the com- 
 mands, left or right in fronts according as it may be intended that 
 the first or last subdivision shall be at the head of the column, be- 
 cause the first subdivision is on the left, and the last on the right 
 of the battalion faced by the rear rank. The column ]}y the rear 
 rank will take the guide to the right, if the first subdivision be in 
 fi'ont, and to the left in the reverse case. 
 
 989. A column, faced by the rear rank, will be brought to its 
 proper front by the moans heretofore prescribed. If the column 
 be formed by company, or by platoon, the chiefs @f subdivision, in 
 order to take their new places in column, will pass by the left of 
 subdivisions, now right, and the file closers by the right, now left. 
 
 ^j 
 
 \^ V-^ 
 
 iAi(h ^ <tT^t-t 
 
 I. ■jL'orm coiunm. 1. March. 
 
 971. At the command 77iarch, the files in column will close to th^ 
 left and right to make room for those in line, who will retake their 
 places in column by stepping backwards, except those closing the 
 interval between the two rear divisions, who will take their places 
 in column by a flank movement. The fourth division will face 
 about, the guides will resume their places. 
 
 972. If the colonel should be so jjressed as not to have time to 
 order bayonets to be fixed, the men will fix them, without com- 
 mand or signal, at the cautionary command, column against cavalry. 
 
 973. As this manoeuvre is often used in war, and with decided 
 advantage, the colonel will frequently cause it to be executed, in 
 order to render it familiar. 
 
 Article XV. — The rally. 
 
 974. The battalion, being in line of battle, the colonel will some- 
 times cause the disperse to be sounded, at which signal the bat- 
 talion will break and disperse. 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 TITLE FIEST. 
 
 ARTICLE FIRST. 
 
 Formation of a regiment in order of battle, or in line 3 
 
 Posts of company officers, sergeants and corporals 4 
 
 Posts of field officers and regimental staff 4 
 
 Posts of field music and band 5 
 
 Color-gua#d 5 
 
 General guides 6 
 
 ARTICLE SECOND. 
 
 Instruction of the battalion 6 
 
 In struetion of officers 7 
 
 Instruction of sergeants 7 
 
 Instruction of corporals 8 
 
 Commands 8 
 
 TITLE SECOND— SCHOOL OF THE SOLDIER. 
 
 PART FIR8T. 
 
 General rules and division of the school of the soldier 8 
 
 Lesson 1. — Position of the soldier (No. 78.) Eyes right, left 
 
 and front (Nos. 80, 83) 10 
 
 Lesson //.—Facings (Nos. 88, 91) 12 
 
 Lesson III. — Principles of the direct step in common and 
 
 quick time (Nos. 94, 102) 12 
 
 Lesson IV. — Principles of the double quick step (No. 104) 13 
 
 PART BECOWD. 
 
 General rules 14 
 
 Lesson I. — Principles of shouldered arms 16 
 
 Lesson II. — Manual of arms. Support arms (No. 133.) Pre- 
 sent arms (No. 143.) Order arms (No. 147.) Position of 
 order arms (No. 149.) Load in nine times (No. 156.) 
 Ready (No. 171.) Aim (No. 174.) Fire (No. 177.) Fix 
 bayonet (No. 188.) Charge bayonet (No. 193.) Trail 
 arms (No. 197.) Unfix bayonet (No. 200.) Secure arma 
 (No. 204.) Right shoulder shift arms (No. 210.) Arms 
 at -will fNo. 219.) Ground arms (No. 222.) Inspection 
 arms (No. 227.) Remarks on the manual of arms (No. 
 237) Mark time (No. 241.) Change step (No. 245.) 
 
198 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 March backwards (No. 247.) 15 
 
 Lesson III. — Load in four times (No. 250.) Load at will (No. 
 
 257.) 28 
 
 Lesson IV. — Firings. Direct fire (No. 261.) Oblique firi4igs 
 (No. 266.) Position of the two ranks in the oblique fire 
 to the right (No 267.) Position of the two ranks in the 
 oblique fire to the left (No. 270.) Fire by file (No. 275.) 
 Fire by rank (No. 285.) 29 
 
 Lesson V. — Fire and load kneeling (No. 292.) Fire and load, 
 
 lying (No. 300.) 31 
 
 Lesson VI. — Eayonet exercise 33 
 
 PART THIRD. 
 
 Lesson I. — Alignments 34 
 
 Lesson II. — March by the front (No. 325.) March by the front 
 in double quick time (No. 334.) Face about in marching 
 (No. 343.) March backwards (No. 345.) * 35 
 
 Lesson III. — March b}^ the flank (No. 351.) March by the 
 
 flank in double quick time (No. 368.) 38 
 
 Lesson IV. — General principles of wheeling (No. 377.) "Wheel- 
 ing from a halt (No. 383.) Wheeling in marching (No. 
 393.) Turning (No. 400.) Wheeling and turning in 
 double quick time (No. 403.) 40 
 
 Lesson V. — Long marches in double quick time and the run 
 
 (No. 406.) Stack arms (No. 410.) Take arms (No. 413.) 43 
 
 TITLE THIED— SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 
 General rules and division of the school of the company 45 
 
 LESSON FIRST. 
 
 Article I. — To open ranks (No. 8.) 46 
 
 Article II. — Alignments in open ranks (No. 18.) 47 
 
 Article J/J.— Manual of arms (No. 26.) 48 
 
 Article IV— To close ranks (No. 28.) 48 
 
 Article V. — Alignments, and manual of arms in closed ranks 
 
 (No. 30) 49 
 
 LESSON SECOND. 
 
 Article I — To load in four times and at will (No. 44) 50 
 
 AHicle II. — To fire hy company (No. 48) 50 
 
 Article III— To fire by file (No. 55) 51 
 
 Article IV.— To fire by rank (No. 58) 51 
 
 Article F.— To fire by the rear rank (No. 68) 52 
 
 LESSON THIRD. 
 
 Article I. — To advance in line of battle (No. 84)...,. 53 
 
 Article II. — To halt the company marching in line of battle, 
 
 and to align it (No. 99) 55 
 
 Article ZZ7.— Oblique march in line of battle (No. 101) 55 
 
 Article IV. — To mark time, to march in double quick time, and 
 
 the back step (No. 109.) 56 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS. 199 
 
 Article V. — To march in retreat (No. 119) 57 
 
 LESSON FOURTH. 
 
 Article I.—To march by the flank (No. 135) 59 
 
 Article II.— To change direction by file (No. 142) 60 
 
 Avticle III. — To halt the company, marching by the flank, and 
 
 to fiice it to the front (No. 145) 60 
 
 Article IV. — The company being in mai*ch by the flank, to form 
 
 it on the right or left, by file into line of battle (No. 148) 61 
 Article Y. — The companj- marching by the flank, to form it by 
 
 company or platoon into line, and cause it to face to the 
 
 right and left in marching (No. 153) 62 
 
 LESSON FIFTH. 
 
 Article I. — To break into column by platoon, either at a halt 
 
 or marching (No. 171) 64 
 
 Article II.— To march in column (No. 105) 67 
 
 Article III— To change direction (No. 211) 69 
 
 Article IV.— To halt the column (No. 231) 71 
 
 Article V. — Being in column b}^ platoon, to form to the right 
 or left into line of battle, either at a halt, or marching (No. 
 235) 72 
 
 LESSON SIXTH. 
 
 Article I. — To break the company into platoons, and to re-form 
 
 the company (No. 205) 75 
 
 Article II. — To break files to the rear and to cause them to re- 
 enter into line (No. 289) 77 
 
 Article III. — To march in column in rout<?, and to execute the 
 
 movements incident thereto (No. 306) 79 
 
 Article 7F.— Countermarch (No. 334) .' 82 
 
 Article V. — Being in column by platoon, to form on the right 
 
 or left into line of battle (No. .343) 83 
 
 Formation of a company from two ranks into single I'anks, 
 
 and reciprocally (No. 359) 85 
 
 Formation of a company from two ranks into four, and recip- 
 rocally, at a halt, and marching (No. 371) 86 
 
 TITLE FOURTH— SCHOOL OF THE BATTALION. 
 
 Formation of the battalion (No. 1) 91 
 
 Composition and march of the color-escort (No. 4) 91 
 
 Honors paid to the color (No. 11) , 92 
 
 General rules and division of the school of the battalion (No. 
 
 14) 92 
 
 PART FIRST. 
 
 Article I. — To open and close ranks (No. 22)... 93 
 
 Article //.—Manual of arms (No. 30) 93 
 
 Article III. — Loading at will, and the firings (No. 31) 94 
 
 PART SECOND. 
 
 Article I. — To break by company to the right (No. 69). Break 
 by company to the left (No. 74). Break by division (No. 
 
200 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 
 
 75). To break by company, marching (No. 84) 97 
 
 Article II. — Break to the rear by the right or left of companies 
 (No. 87). Break to the rear by the right or left of corn- 
 companies, marching (No. 04). Advance or retire by the 
 right or left of companies (No. 105). Advance or retire 
 by the right or left of companies, marching (No. 110). 
 Advancing or retiring by the right or left of companies, 
 
 to form fine to the front (No. flS) 99 
 
 Article III. — Ploy the battalion into close column on the first 
 division (No. 119). Ploy the battalion into close column 
 on the fourth division (No. 141). Ploy the battalion into 
 close column on any interior division (No. 143). Battal- 
 ion being in march, to ploy it into column on the first di- 
 vision (No. 149) 103 
 
 PART THIRD. 
 
 Article I. — March in column at full distance (No. 164). Col- 
 umn being in march, to execute the about (No. 170). 
 Column arriving in front of the line of battle, to prolong 
 it on this line (No. 175). Column arriving behind the line 
 of battle, to prolong it on this line (No. 184). Column 
 arriving on the right or left of the line of battle, to pro- 
 long it on this line (No. 188). Manner of prolonging a 
 line by mai-kers (No. 189) 108 
 
 Article III. — Change of direction in column at full distance 
 
 (No 231) 112 
 
 ^r^zde /T'— Halt the column (No. 239) 113 
 
 Article V — Close the column to half distance, or in mass (No. 
 252). Close the column on the eighth company (No. 267). 
 Execute this movement marching (No. 273) 114 
 
 Article VI. — March in column at half distance, or closed in 
 
 mass (No. 281) 116 
 
 Article VII. — Change direction in column at half distance (No. 
 
 287) 117 
 
 Article VIII. — Change direction of a column closed in mass, 
 marching (No. 288). Change direction of a column, 
 closed in mass, from a halt (No. 306) 117 
 
 Article IX. — Take distances by the head of the column (No. 
 323). Take distances by the rear of the column (No. 
 333). Take distances on the head of the column (No. 
 341) 121 
 
 Article X. — Countermarch of a column at full or half distance 
 (No. 351). Countermarch of a column closed in mass 
 (No. 352) 125 
 
 Article XL — Being in column by company, closed in mass, to 
 form divisions (No. 364). To form divisions, marching 
 (No. 376) 126 
 
 PART FOURTH. 
 
 Article II. — To form a column, at full distance, to the left into .